Home

vista-128fb-v1-insta..

1. 6 12 7 12 5b Connections to 7720ULF Long RANGE Radi0 12 8 12 5c Connections to 7920SE Long RANGE Radi0o iii 12 9 13 1 Long Range Radio to Keypad Temi nalS i 13 2 14 1 Wiring the Vista Gateway ModuUle i 14 4 15 1 External Sounder Connections mi E NE ENIAN EENEN KEE TETEA E RREA 15 3 16 1 Auxiliary Relay Used as Unsupervised Bel 16 2 16 2 Auxiliary Relay Used for Resetting 4 Wire Smoke Detectors iii 16 2 18 1 Event Log Printer Connections
2. 4 2 Os 111 111111 9 0 4 3 5 1 Keypad Connections to Keypad Port 1 TermIinalS 5 2 5 2 Using a Supplementary Power Supply for Additional 6 02 5 3 6 1 2 WireSmoke Detector Connected to Zone L ie 6 2 6 2 4 WireSmoke Detector Connections Zones 1 6 4 6 3 Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 3 nnn 6 5 Poling Loop 9 0 9 1111111 0 7 3 7 2a Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender 7 4 7 2b Polling Loop Connection
3. 7 5 11 0 7 6 SECTION 8 Wireless Zone Expansion eere rene 8 1 Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones iii 8 1 Wireless Systems AVal 2 nennen 8 1 RF System Oper ational SUPAVISIONS 7 7 1 7 0 0 8 2 RF System Installation Advisories 5 8 3 Installation and Setup of the 4281 5881 RF RECEIVE 8 3 installing the 5800 T M 72 7 0 1 a 8 4 FOU SSDS ier Medea 8 4 5700 SELES Transmite S eU Ossi sates pete a a 8 5 61518 6 Transmiter SAUD an 551 0 13 31311 000 8 8 Checkout Procedure for Wireless ZONE 8 11 SECTION 9 Relay OUEDUIS cc 9 1 333 3 11111311111110 9 1 Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules 9 1
4. 6 4 1 stalling tne canin 21 4 1 GradeA MercantilePremises 1 4 2 GradeA MercantileSafeand 4 3 Installing the Control s 111 RO K 4 3 Connecting the AC Transformer and 4 4 Pane Earth Ground
5. 28 3 SECTION 29 Setting the Real Time Clock 29 1 General Information aaa 29 1 Ssang ther rimMmeand 1 73 3 3 1111 110 29 1 SECTION 30 User Access Codes eit 30 1 37111511411 5 4 40 30 1 User Codes ang Leva 3 7 3 11 1 9 0 0 30 1 To ADD a Master Manager or Operator Code i 30 4 To Change a Master Manager or Operator 6 6 30 6 ToAdd an RF Key to an Existing User iii 30 6 To Delete a Master Manager or Operator 6 6 30 7 EdE
6. 21 1 1 7 1 7 0 21 2 Moving from One Page of Programming to 21 2 2 wage 10 21 2 OA I Nr 511111 0 21 3 Programming Systen Wide Data F tl OS iio brit 1110 1 21 3 Programming Partition Specific Data Fields sees nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nna 21 3 FOS Mu Mode 2 ai oe 21 4 SECTION 22 Zone Type Defi niti ons EDD 22 1 ZoneNumbperBergnet ons ii cc 22 1 Zone TV OSD LEPC ONS sais I I 3 113131 11 1 01 22 1 SECTION 23 Zone Index Zone Type Defaults 23 1 ZON C wt 1110 23 1 c saa 23 2 SECTION 24 Data Field Descriptions 24 1 Tableof Contents SECTION 25 93 Menu Mode Programming g
7. 6 1 Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2 6 2 Compatible 2 Wire 1 4 1 1 1 4 3 nnn nna ann n assu ni sana resa aan nans 6 3 Wiring 4 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 6 3 Compatible 4 Wire 1 4 1 1 6 1 4 6 4 FireAlarm Verification Smoke Detectors nnne nnne nnn nnn nn nnn nnn nnn nnn 6 4 6 ies i 6 4 Wiring 2 Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone
8. C 1 User Codes Authority Levels 7 39 1 30 1 AS Aire odes 5 35 ERR US 20 8 User Scheduling Menu Mode 26 20 Using a Supplementary Power Supply 5 2 Using ACS Relays and Triggers 14 3 Using ACS Zone Inputs ER RR 14 3 ZN TYPE 18 DELAY USE LLL 24 18 Using the Built in User s Manual 31 5 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION 24 15 Zone 6 Alternate Tamper Function 4 2 24 19 Zone 6 Tamper Configuration esee 6 4 Zone 90A 3 cm 10 1 Viewing Capabilities Of 21 9 30 1 31 4 ZONE dtu IEEE IR MU NEL 20 2 Viewing Data FieldS 21 3 Zone Alarm Reports 25 13 Viewing Downloaded Messages 31 5 Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters 8 5 Viewing Zone Descriptors ee 31 5 Zone Descriptors 3030 7 0 25 1 7 VIP MODULE PHONE 6 24 2 ZOBe MOEN E 1133 909 23 1 VIP Madle LLL 1 5 10 1 25 25 ZONE LIST Lys lt 1411 25 25 Vista Gateway Module 14 1 14 4 25 25 31 3 Zone List Programming 30
9. 151 Zer 069 Ninth 222 SHOP 152 Ones 002 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation A substitute word can be programmed for each of the 20 custom words used in your alpha zone descriptions The VIP Module will announce this substitute word in place of the custom word that is displayed on the alpha keypad For example an alarm display of J ohn s Bedroom could be announced as Son s Bedroom since there is no annunciation for the custom word J ohn Notethat if a substitute word is not assigned the VIP Module will not annunciate the zone descri ptor at all but will only annunciate the zone number To enter custom word substitutes do the following 1 From Data Field Programming Mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 2 Press O NO to each menu option until the CUSTOM INDEX prompt is displayed CUSTOM INDEX Enter 1 at this prompt 0 0 1 yes CUSTOM WORD NO Enter the custom word number 01 20 for which a voice 00 QUIT substitute is desired Enter 00 to quit this Programming Mode Press to accept entry 01 ENTER INDEX Enter the 3 digit substitute word index number from the relay voice descriptor and custom word substitutes vocabulary list found in the Relay Voice Descriptors part of this section Press to accept entry The CUSTOM WORD NO prompt will be displayed Enter
10. Inside Back Cover How To Use This Manual This manual is written to accommodate both the new and the experienced installer of ADEMCO products A general description of the entire system is located at the beginning of the manual followed by the basics of programming The wiring and physical setup of the hardware follows The sections at the core of the manual include both hardware setup and programming requirements of each device to make that specific device operational in the system A checkout procedure is included at the end of each section We recommend this method to ensure that each device is working properly before proceeding to the next section t must also be used if you are making a particular addition to the system of one of these devices Each of the sections covering the installation of peripheral devices includes the programming for that device If you are an experienced user of ADEM CO products you may choose to wire and then program the entire system at once If so refer to The Mechanics of Programming section and the Data Field Descriptions section after the hardware setup is complete A blank pull out programming form is included with this manual Without an understanding of the programming methodology you will not be able to successfully perform the required programming in each of these sections We therefore urge you to read the M echanics of Programming section before any programming is perfo
11. B 1 0 7 2 Direct Wire Downloading 12 11 28 4 DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK 24 14 Disarm Delay acm tnt 26 2 ile 22 3 DIS 7 31 2 DISPLAY BURG amp PANIC ALARMS OF OTHER PAFUHTIONS 011 24 18 Display Faulted ZONES i 31 2 DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS 24 18 DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS 24 18 DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES 24 5 DOWNLOAD ID NUMBER eene 24 5 DOWNLOAD PHONE NUMBER 24 5 Downloading Requirements nn 28 1 Downloading ee 1 8 28 1 DUAL REPORTING 1 24 7 DUPLICATE serial number 25 8 Duress Reporting 30 3 30 4 Early Power Detect iuis ioo aes ecrire aaa 13 3 Eanh GroUNd cscalal ela 4 4 20 2 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM 24 15 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM 24 14 ENABLE BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY CHIME ANNUNCIATION24 20 ENABLE BURG FEATURES ON PARTITION 124 21 ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS amp BB pH 24 10 ENABLE FORCE ARM FOR AUTO AHRM 24 17 ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION 24 17 ENABLE J2 TRIGGERS BY PARTITION 24 17 ENABLE OPEN CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER G0 plc 24 5 Entering Progr
12. 26 11 Holiday Schedule 26 5 House ID Sniffer Mode 8 3 HOEN Gaer ela 32 5 IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER 24 3 Installer COGS oi 24 1 30 3 Installing the Cabinet LOCK 4 1 Installing the Control o aie oo obe Du pat ue an ici es 4 1 Installing the Control s Circuit Board 4 3 Installing the Transmitters sss 8 4 INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING 24 3 Interior W Delay Type 10 22 2 Interior Follower Type 04 s 22 2 d2 Frigger QUIDUIS s 3 1110 12 1 Key Functions for Programming 7820 Radio 25 23 Keypad 3 31 1 Keypad Macros 7 1111 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 0 1 5 KEYPAD na 24 2 Keypad Panic Keys ii 1 4 Keypad POM T 1170001 5 2 Keypad POCZ it bo eta 315 5 2 79 0 2 1 5 1 Keyswitch 7 12 4 Keyswitch Operation and Wiring 12 3 FBVSWIICH S sac oes lie 1 6 24 2 2 T 27 1 OARS Niccolo 25 8 Level 0 Installer User 1 Codes 30 3 Level 1 Master Codes n 30 3 Level 2 Manager Codes
13. eese 25 1 2 8 AVI A PN 25 1 op pienso or er EU rtl antra URS Let 25 3 Sequential Mode 7 1 09 25 9 ROEG ode PrO 111111111111 1117 9 25 12 Alpha Descriptors Progratrmmitig sisse 7 111111111111 0 0 25 16 1 33 711111111111111 9 0 0 25 21 Relay ROI 3 8 11111 11111111 25 25 ZONE LSE 1 TT 25 30 Raay D 8078 7 25 30 Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Annunciation 25 32 RifF Serral Numbe CiarMoge 3 3 2 71 111111111 1 9 25 32 SECTION 26 Scheduling Options 11e eee nere 26 1 patet ome a RU ex ri CREE eR io 26 1 Da M d ERE aid EDU ERES Yep Re deer b 15 26 3 Oben Close Bi I I TT TT TT SS TT 26 4 SIUNNG ME MO 0 26 6 Scneduling Men SUWUCLUFES ase 0 26 7 Fe U
14. 7 3 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules 9 1 4285 4286 VIP MOdUle 10 1 4297 Polling Loop Extender 7 3 5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE 17 5 D 1 5140LED Indicator Module 12 1 12 4 D 1 BOO OI SS cle ese 3 3 ened 1 6 6 8 4 DOORS E 7 inn 8 7 5800TM Module nnn 8 3 SSOOTM WVIAC ono 8 3 Se rr AR 5 1 D 3 685 Receiver 1 11 2 rp A E 12 7 VE UIN 12 7 7820 Long Range Radio i 13 1 O205E 12 7 AAV Module 9 00 11 1 AC GOHZ OF 3333 3110 24 14 AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING 24 2 3 305 4 4 20 1 Access 000 MT HU 30 6 Access Control amp Lighting and Appliances 14 3 Access Control Dialer EVEnNts n 14 4 Access Control of an Entry Exit Point 14 2 ACCESS CONTROL RELAY eere 24 16 Access Control Using an RF Transmitter Zone 14 2 Access Control 1 6 14 1 31 3 C 2 Access Point Type 27 eese 22 3 Access Schedules i 26 7 ACCESS SO CUNY sus ce 7 28 3 ACFION 7
15. o li w n ro no Jo no ro po po po J a 2 2 2 2 5711 5711WM important 5716 DOOR WINDOW TRANSMITTER SET SWITCHES WITH UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER DOOR WINDOW TRANSMITTER BATTERY REMOVED SIDE XMTR ID 33 SHOWN HOUSE ID 1 SHOWN 6 5432 1 POS 1 UP NORMAL RESPONSE 33 SHOWN POS 12 UP N O DN FAST RESPONSE 2 N C POS 2 UP NO COVER TAMPER Avoid ID 32 37 with N O DN COVER TAMPER use N C setting POS 6 UP NO DN N C DIP SWITCH POSITION HOUSE DIP SWITCH POSITION ID dos A 33 up up ue up 1 up up up UP a4 UP up up vp 2 f up FUP UP UP UP 3 se UP UP 4 o o UP UP 3 up up up 5 UP UP fe 38 UP 6 uP up UP 39 up up 7 I UP 40 UP UP UP TUP 8 UP UP UP Oa o gt UP UP 9 UP UP UP 42 5 UP 10 a u p 1 ue ul 44 UP UP UP U
16. 6 5 Compatible 2 Wire Glassbreak Detectors 6 5 Checkout Procedure for Hardwired 26 6 6 Tableof Contents SECTION 7 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion Zones 009 128 7 1 POLICE COD OV pu Re et 7 1 Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones 7 1 WIFING 5 RPM DON 11 111111 11111111 1111 7 2 9 1111111111 01 7 5 Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop 2
17. 075 Garage 023 NOE ari 012 Sii 219 Gist 138 Smoke 024 Glass 1 391 Offagna OIL SON Si i 223 Off T47 SoU 155 Ha 050 058 Stairs 006 Heat sene OLO QD uscite 070 Station 156 Open 148 Storage 157 Inside 209 Outside 2 40 1 Sunia gala 154 System 062 Kitchen 022 Panic 013 Partition 090 Temperature 158 Laundry 140 Patio 149 159 E 027 Phone 061 TAPES ete 072 Library 141 Power 063 FOOl acute 213 carina 019 Pump 166 TWO 071 LIVING sn 030 Loading 142 Rear 0S8 SS 025 Lower 094 Right 028 Upper 187 ROOM 018 Upstairs 183 Machine 143 Utility 185 Master 007 Medical 014 Second 056 West 215 Mother s 212 Service 150 Window 017 Motion 145 Seven 076 Wing 216 Seventh 220 DS 078
18. 20 3 CONTACT ID EVENT CODES inler toe tet Eu 27 2 Index 2 Contacting Technical Support 32 6 CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR esses 24 12 CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE n 24 11 CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE ee 24 11 CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO eene 24 11 Gross editori 1 7 3 2 CUSTOM INDEX 4 7 077 1 5539 3 25 3 Custom Message Display Installer s MESSAGE m OP 25 19 Custom Word SubstituteS 25 33 Custom Word S rerien 1 1 1 25 18 DAENCIVPUIORE ii ee 28 3 Data Field Descriptions sees 24 1 Data Field Program Mode 21 1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END MONTH24 16 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END WEEKEND 24 16 DELAY FOR ZONE TYPES 17 amp 18 24 19 DEVICE PROG 3 3 010 25 2 Device Programming 25 21 DIAL TONE DETEGTION 0 6 6 24 6 3 3 0 24 6 7027 17 6 DIACER ZFAUET 77 7 7 17 6 DialeF Sect 3 3 o 17 6 Dialer OUMU 55 17 5 DIALER SELECTION ioi tous ici 24 19 BI tained 32 1 DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR ii D 1 DIP Swilch Tables ee
19. 3 3333 19 3 TOM 27 1 D 1 SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT 24 7 Setting Up a Partitioned System 2 2 Setup of the 4281 5881 RF Receivers 8 2 1 7 150 D 1 Speed Key ID MACGrOS 2421221525526 i 31 6 STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY 24 7 STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY 24 7 START STD eiat dn 25 25 2 33 1 1 0 25 26 1 77 25 9 Supervised Fire Without Verification Type 09 22 2 SUPErvisea TA aid uas 3 3 5 50 8 8 SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LORRA TRIGGER QUTPUTS Ec 24 18 Supervisory Messages 32 4 SUPERVISORY ON OPEN amp SHORT 24 18 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND 24 14 SWINGER SUPPRESSION eee 24 10 System COMmmands C 1 System Communication 27 1 System Derfgulis s 1 coi madssa eue 21 1 Index System Group 1 Codes i siete e e s 25 12 25 14 System Group 2 Codes 25 12 25 15 System Group 3 Codes 25 12 25 15 System Group 4 Codes 25 12 25 16 System EoOBSEb S oso 537 32 1 32 5 System 20
20. 5 0 32 5 System Sensor A77 716B EOL Relay Module 6 3 SYSTEM ZONE BYPASS INHIBIT 24 21 Syse ZONES 23 33 11 1 Suet Du dee 1 3 TECHNOLOGY TYPE 77 25 9 Telephone Line CONnNECtIons 17 5 Telephone Line SUpervision 17 5 TEMPORAL SIREN PULSE ict 24 1 Temporary Schedule Worksheet 26 18 Temporary Schedules Programming 26 19 Temporary Schedules 26 5 26 18 TEST REPORT INTERVAL coeno cei ansi 24 3 Testing The Syste M setis leto eee eio re tpe tea aee 32 1 Theory of Partitioning i 2 1 Time nenne 29 1 Time Driven Events 071 0 701 26 3 26 12 Time Windows Definitions Worksheet 26 9 Time Windows Programming 26 9 223 26 3 26 7 e cL 26 7 Time Driven Event Programming 26 14 Time Driven Event Worksheet 26 12 To ADD a Master Manager or Operator Sep T 30 6 To Add an RF Key to an Existing User 30 8 To CHANGE a Master Manager or Operator 30 7 To Delete a Master Manager or Operator CO neta 30 9 To EXIT The User Edit M
21. 15 1 Eras Mauedqp nionde eM 15 1 BECKTON SUPE VI 3 31 A E 15 2 IA SS SR CU 0 711111 1 1 0 15 2 indicating DEVi 111 0 15 2 9 GITRAE BA CIEFCBUIES is 3 33 1111 1111 9 090 15 4 SECTION 16 AuxilTary Relay i 16 1 ROYV FUNCIONS 7 7 7 LIU 16 1 SECTION 17 Dialer Outputsiasiienaisici kEERCE EIE FEE EFE ERREREKI E REEVA ERU CERE TERRIER 17 1 Dialer Outbuts AvallablG 01111111111 0 0 17 1 Lie 7 80 17 1 FEPNORSL TRE dans car cavi a E coa 111 1 0 17 1 OAC OWN esas T P A REN 17 2 SECTION 18 Eventil ogiOptionSi siissussiia nani 18 1 General Information 18 1 Event LOG Printer Connections ccm 18 1 Programming EVEN bog O DW OMS sistens reducere baa 3 en raras Di ui x Rx dci p AR ER E Raja 18 3 Event boggihg PEOCGHULEES 3 2 2 3 2 3 11111110 18 3 SECTION 19 4100APG Pager Interface 19 1 caT al 0 377111111111111111 19 1 Mounting te 41 1333 3 ene 19 1 111111111111 1 19 2 Programming the Control 1313 1 1 3 10
22. 2320 701 25 25 Action COG 26 12 Action Specifier 26 12 Active 1 0309 0 26 14 Index Addressing The Keypads cccccseeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeseaees 5 3 Ademco 442 Express 21 1 27 2 D 1 ADEMCO 4146 12 3 Ademco AB12 3 111 5 0 4 2 ADEMCO CONTACT ID 21 1 27 4 D 1 ADEMCO HIGH SPEED 21 1 27 2 27 4 D 1 ADEMCO LOW SPEED 21 1 27 1 D 1 Ademco No N6277 Cam Lock 4 1 Affects Lobby 0 2 2 24 11 AGENCY LISUNOS 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 1 8 D 1 Agency Statements i A 1 ALARM CODES 0 25 12 2 33 1 D 1 ALARM SOUNDS BELL 1 2 esses 24 19 sarc ver 15090 5 2 ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM acci 24 17 ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM DISARM WINDOW S 72 6 24 17 ALPHA DESCRIPTOR VOCABULARY 25 20 Alpha Descriptors 25 16 Alpha Keypad 1 25 21 ALPHA NUMERIC PAGER INSTALLED 24 8 ALPHA PROG 7 1 0 25 2 ean 7 11 55 a 13 3 Arm Disarm COmmands i 26 13 Arm AWAY Type 21 nnn 22 3 Arming AWay e 31 2 Arming
23. 18 2 19 1 Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer 19 2 19 2 Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial PrINtEr ie 19 3 20 1 Connecting the Backup Batteries to the Control cccceseeeeceeeeeceeeceeeeeesseeseeeeseeaeseeeeeseaseeessaegseeeeseeaas 20 3 25 1 RF Transmitter Loop Designations 25 7 25 2 6139 Key Functions for Programming the 7820 Radio 25 24 20 1 Direct Wire Downloading 2000 28 4 Summary of Connections Diagram
24. 24 10 Restore Supervisory COdes 25 12 Restrict Disarming 777 0 0 26 3 RF Expande 7 25 22 RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK IN INTERVAL 24 12 RF Serial Number Clear Mode 25 33 HF System Installation Advisories 8 2 RF System Operation and Supervision 8 2 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK IN INTERVAL 24 13 RF Transmitter Loop Designations 25 7 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE 24 12 RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND 24 12 RING DETECTION COUNT eese 24 6 28 2 RINGER EQUIVALENCE eene D 1 BUS TX olent 1 1111 0 10 2 RLY VOICE DESCR s aedes rotes aie diae no es oes p 25 2 Scheduling Commands i C 2 Scheduling Menu Mode 2 2 sesssssnnn 26 6 1 1 6 26 1 SECONDARY FOBMIAT na 24 6 SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER 2222 24 5 SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT 24 11 SEND CANCEL IF ALARM OFF esse 24 14 SEQUENTIAL LEARN elle 25 2 Sequential Mode Programming 25 9 Serial Number DEVices 7 2 SerialNumberssRine 3 25 4 OC
25. UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP cic VIV UP N 1 DEVICE ID DIP SWITCH POSITION 3 4 6 10 UP UP 11 UP UP 12 UP UP 13 UP UP 14 UP 15 UP UP 16 UP 17 UP 18 UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP c U c rU o A o Appendix B DIP Switch Tables DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR POLLING LOOP DEVICES 4275 PIR MIRROR SHOWN SET FOR DR SIDE VIEW 1 2 34567 UP lil POS 6 UP A DN A POS 7 UP A DN A DN B INST MODE UP B PULSE COUNT DN B WALK TEST UP B W T DISABLE LI THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD DN THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD UP DEVICE DIP SWITCH POSITION c 5 c 5 lt UJ c le rmlm m mimimimimimimia i c Ss Nl a SSIN 2 O xc o i o o s o m 2jlo 5 C E Cc Cc Cc Cc E Cla
26. 21 3 Programming the Control for the Long Range Radio 0 1 0 13 2 PS24 Power Supply Module 1 6 20 1 20 2 Quick Arm i 24 4 30 1 31 2 RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT 24 2 RCVR SET UP 3027777 3 0 32 5 Real Time 6 9 332 3 41 1 18 3 29 1 RECEIVER TYPE sc 0 5 079 6 1 24 13 Recent Close 9 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 Regulatory Agency StateMeEnts ee A 1 Relay comimahds 3311 0 26 12 FHelay GIOUD 3 0 25 29 2 deo taut dr aod ences codes 9 1 25 7 RELAY PROG 9307 07 8 1 0 0 25 2 Relay Programming siae aid eso elles od beatae 25 25 RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES 24 15 RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS 24 15 RELAY TIFE cera O 25 29 Relay Voice Descriptors 25 30 25 31 Remote Keypad Sounder 12 2 Remote Point Modules 7 1 REPORT CODE 7 7 0 25 2 Report Code Programming 25 12 1 916 1333 27 1 RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 1 24 20 RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 2 24 20 RESTORE REPORT TIMING
27. Zones Enter code 6 BYPASS 3 digit zone number To automatically bypass all faulted zones use Quick Bypass method Enter code BYPASS Chime Mode Enter code 9 CHIME To turn Chime M ode off enter code CHIME again Quick Arming Note that if QUICK ARM is enabled field 29 the key can be pressed instead of entering the security code for any of the arming procedures Away Stay Instant Maximum etc A user code other than the Installer Code must be programmed into the system in order for the Quick Arm feature to work SUMMARY OF ARMING MODES Mode Features for Each Arming Mode 7 Exit Delay Entry Delay Perimeter Armed Interior Armed AWAY Yes INSTANT MAXIMUM 31 2 Section 31 Keypad Functions Global Arming If enabled for the user the keypad will display the following ARM ALL If NO the keypad prompts for arming each partition 0 NO 1 YES individually If YES the system attempts to arm all partitions allowed by this user If there are any faults open doors windows etc the keypad will display them See notes below These faults must be corrected or the zone bypassed before arming will occur When faults are corrected repeat the arming procedure Notes When using the Global Arm feature if there are faults in any of the selected partitions the system will enter a Summary Mode in which the faulted zones of all of the selected partitions will be displayed These
28. 1 25 30 MEDINII T rir iiie uo qoe pot eos eerte 12 11 28 1 28 4 ZONE NOU Used oe nece tele e eene pos ive ow dese 22 1 Voltage TOGErS Dm 1 6 ZONE PROG CC CG CG li ie ii 25 2 Zone Programming sees 25 3 Zone Type Dertalllis o ae teg 23 2 Zone Type Definitions 224 ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES FOR ZONE WATERFLOW SILENCE OPTION sss 24 19 TYPES 1621 6 0 24 20 Wire Run Length TE 5 1 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9 1024 10 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT 24 14 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT 24 14 TYPES 10 24 9 Wireless System Commands 22 eseteseteiinionn C 1 ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION ZT 25 26 Wireless Zone Expansion PEERS IRA 5 1 3 8 1 TP 2 1 Wiring Bell QUtputS 15 2 Wiring Devices to Zones 1 8 6 1 Wiring the 4100APQ sees 19 2 Wiring the Long Range Radio 13 2 Wiring the VIP Module enin sini iibri eene tes bo ees 10 2 Wiring To The KeypadS i 5 1 Wiring Addressing RPM Dewvices 7 2 Index 6 WARNING THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM While this System is an advanced wireless security system it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary fire or other emergency Any alarm
29. Enter the check in monitoring interval in 2 hour increments Enter 02 15 ti mes 2 hours 4 30 hours Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time entered will result in a trouble response and related communication report Enter 00 to disable transmitter supervision Max 2 4 hr for UL RF RECEIVER TYPE oj Enter O if noreceiver is being used Enter Lif using 4281 Series receivers Enter 2 if using 5881 Series receivers Important the 4281 Microprocessor must have part number N 5334Vx where x is any number TOUCH TONE W ROTARY BACKUP oj Enter 1to enable rotary backup dialing if communicator is not successful in dialing using TouchTone DTMF on first attempt Enter O if this option is not desired COMM SPLIT REPORT SELECTION 0 This field allows certain reports to be directed to either the primary or secondary phone number Enter 0 1 or 2 in accordance with the following 0 split reporting disabled 1 Alarm Alarm Restore and Cancel reports sent to primary telco number all others to secondary telco number 2 Open Close and Test reports sent to secondary tel co number and all other reports to primary 3 Fire Alarms and Fire Restore reports sent to primary telco number all reports to secondary See 5 for split dual reporting combinations 1 42 CALL WAITING DEFEAT 0 Enter 1 for the panel to defeat Call Waiting on the first attempt DO NOT enable un
30. Note E xpanded overrides 442 format STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY Lo L L1 LI LI LJ Alm Rst Byp Trbl Opn Cls Low Batt Enter O for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the secondary phone number default is 0 Default is 000000 Note E xpanded overrides 4 2 format USE ONLY LRR LONG RANGE RADIO 0 Enter Lif the built in dialer is not being used and only the L RR will be used to communicate Otherwise enter O USE LRR LONG RANGE RADIO IF DIALER FAILS oj Enter Lif LRR is to be used as a backup to the built in dialer if the dialer fails The radio messages begin transmitting the same time as the dialer Oncethe dialer receives a kissoff the LRR will stop transmitting no matter where it might be within its sequence Otherwise enter O LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION 1 CATEGORY ENABLE LI LJ LI LI LI LJ Alm Trbl Byp Opn ClsSyst Test Enter 1to enable reports for primary Subscriber ID of Long Range Radio Otherwise enter O Default is 000000 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION 2 CATEGORY ENABLE L LI LI LJ LJ L Alm Trbl Byp Opn ClsSyst Test Enter 1to enable reports for secondary Subscriber ID of Long Range Radio Otherwise enter 0 Default is 000000 24 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 8 64 ALPHA NUMERIC PAGER INSTALLED 0 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 Enter Lif the alpha numeric pager interface is installed Otherwise ente
31. 30 3 Level 6 Duress Codes nn 30 4 Levels 3 5 Operator Codes 30 4 Limitation of Access Schedules 26 3 26 17 9 dui due Me 0 D 1 Listen to Follow oe e e via 11 1 11 2 v 32 5 LOBBY PARTITION iii 7116 24 11 LOG FIRST MAINTENANCE SIGNAL 24 16 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION 1 CATEGORY ENABLE 24 8 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION 2 CATEGORY ENABLE cala 24 8 Long Range Radio Trouble Messages 13 2 Long Range Rago s csi 2 2 3 0 7 25 23 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Long Range Subscriber nsns icio aa 12 1 LOW SPEED FORMAT PRIMARY 24 6 LOW SPEED FORMAT SECONDARY 24 7 LRR BQ 2 3 3 3 3 1 13 3 CARGRG IS 13 3 LRR reporting options i 13 1 Ez 11111 0 32 5 Mie folem cor VE UR MOON ENT 31 6 MAIN DIALER TOUCH TONE OR ROTARY DIAL i UM 24 4 Main Logic Board MLB Supervision Type 28 22 3 WAIN LOGIC Board cies 14 1 Maintenance Signal Support 1 3 Manager ere 30 3 Manual Relay Activation Mode 31 7 MASTER COGO 9 3 1 0 30 3 Master 3 3 1 1310 0 2 5 MAX OF DIALER RETRIES 1 1 0 24 19 Mechanics of Programming 21 1 MODEM
32. After programming all system related programming fields in the usual way press 793 while still in Programming Mode to display the first choice of the menu driven programming options which are as follows 25 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions ZONE PROG For programming the following O No 1 Yes Zonenumber e Zone response type Partition number for zone e Dialer Report Code for zone e Bell aux relay assignment for zone e nput device type for zone whether RF polling loop etc e Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters and serial polling loop devices into the system all other zone characteristics must be pre programmed SEQUENTIAL LEARN For programming the following 0 No 1 Yes e Input device type for zone whether RF polling loop etc Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters and serial polling loop devices into the system all other zone characteristics must be pre programmed REPORT CODE PROG For programming the following 0 No 1 Yes e Alarmreport codes for zones e Restore and supervisory codes e All other system report codes ALPHA PROG For entering alpha descriptors for the following 0 No 1 Yes e Zone descriptors message Custom words e Partition descriptors e Relay descriptors DEVICE PROG For defining the following device characteristics for addressable 0 No 1 Yes devices including keypads RF receivers 4281 5881 420
33. Input Type escription 5818 Recessed Transmitter RF Reed switch magnetic contact sensor that is easily concealed in the frame and edge of a door or window Has a single unique input loop code 5827 Wireless K eypad House D Can be used to turn the burglary protection on and off Features the same built in panic functions as wired keypads The keypad is identified as zone 000 on wired keypads when it transmits with a low battery 5827BD Wireless Bi directional House ID Used with 5800TM Module Keypad e Operates the system similarly to wired keypads e Can indicate system status via its 3 LEDs and sounder e Includes 3 panic keys e HouselD must be set e Requires 5800TM Transmitter Module must be enabled in 93 Menu Mode Device Programming and assigned to a partition in 1 48 Glassbreak Detector Requires both sound and shock of breaking glass to cause alarm to be transmitted Has unique input code PIR Detector Dual element passive infrared detector transmitter with built in selectable pulse count Has unique input code Note Thereis a 3 minute lock out between fault transmissions to conserve battery life 8 11 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons Checkout Procedure for Wireless Zones 8 12 Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that transmitters have all been properly programmed l Enter Installer Code 3 Keypad s wil
34. The serial printer must be configured for 1200 baud rate seven data bits even parity and one stop bit 7 E 1 J2 HEE Red Violet 1112 OOo 4100SM Aux Pwr Red O Aux Gnd Black O17 RD OL TxD 1200 Baud Serial DB 25 i ES DB 25 Printer 7 E 1 4100APG DB 3 Serial Port Input RJ 11 Line To Telco Figure 19 2 Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer When you complete the module s mounting and wiring you should install the module s cover with label affixed as indicated next Programming the Control for the Pager e Infield 64 enter 1to enable the 4100APG pager interface e Infield 65 enter the phone number of the paging service for Alarm reports Up to 17 digits may be entered e n field 66 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Alarm reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered e Infield 67 enter the phone number of the paging service for Trouble reports Up to 17 digits may be entered e n field 68 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Trouble reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered 19 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Sf In field 69 enter the phone number of the paging service for Bypass reports Up to 17 digits may be entered In field 70 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Bypass reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entere
35. 1 111111 1 1 31 0 4 4 SECTION 5 Installing the Keypads 5 1 Keypads That May BU 37 7 5 1 MWIFIDO TIS ae qup FU PRU a E 1 5 1 Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads 5 2 Mounting the 1 RE x es quce El Va a EN uw Vi UN c a VR RR E up ny dyes 5 3 Addressing the K eypads Preliminary Checkout 9 5 3 SECTION 6 Basic Hardwired Zones 001 O08 6 1 Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1 6 1 Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1
36. 19 3 ALOOAP 3 11171 11311 7 19 4 SECTION 20 Final Power U p Procedure 20 1 6 0 ri en vx 7 7 00 1 01 20 1 E ortn Ground Connections tout mr Tr 20 2 Backup Power C akuta 111 0 20 2 Connecting the Backup Battery to the Control 20 3 Total Control Pane Load Workshests 20 4 SECTION 21 The Mechanics of Programming 21 1 Using Data Fidd ProgrammiM OS avi 5 311 11111111 0 0 21 1 System and Communication Defaults
37. L ow Speed Digits programmed in System Group 4 report codes Report Code Programming in the 93 M enu Mode 32 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Power Failure If the POWER indicator is off and the message AC LOSS is displayed the keypad is operating on battery power only Check to see that the circuit breaker for the branch circuit that your system s transformer is wired to has not been accidentally turned off Instruct the user to call a service representative immediately if AC power cannot be restored Turning the System Over to the User Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by going over each of its functions as well as the User s Manual supplied e In particular explain the operation of each zone entry exit perimeter interior fire etc Besurethe user understands how to operate any emergency feature s programmed into the system To The Installer 32 6 Regular maintenance and inspection at least annually by the installer and frequent testing by the user are vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm system Theinstaller should assume the responsibility of developing and offering a regular maintenance program to the user as well as acquainting the user with the proper operation and limitations of the alarm system and its component parts Recommendations must be included for a specific program of frequent testing at least weekly to ensure the system s proper operation a
38. Section 15 External Sounders Shows wiring for bell outputs configured using factory default programming selections BELL 1 FACTORY DEFAULTS Bell 1 is configured as a burglary bell circuit Use non polarized Grade A indicating devices eg Ademco No AB12 see below Wiring is not supervised cut white jumper W1 on main PCB Activates for zones 3 8 alarms by default zones 3 8 are assigned to burglary part 1 Steady alarm output 16 minute timeout BELL 2 FACTORY DEFAULTS Bell 2 is configured as a fire bell circuit Use polarized indicating devices Class B open short supervision 24 hr trouble response to faults Activates for zone 1 2 alarms by default zones 1 amp 2 are assigned to fire partition 3 Model 610 7 Pulsed alarm output No timeout AB12 WIRING NOTES Disconnect the AB12 s factory wired connection from it s terminal 4 to it s outer box AB12 BELL BOX WIRING Set field 3 17 to 1 to enable zone 6 tamper function Il Ala C A Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition Program it Slo gt i 5 E for day trouble night alarm response type 05 wl gt O D cl when this bell is used by only 1 burg part mz m zZ els Program it for 24 hr audible alarm response type r E m si a RA Als 07 when this bell is used by more than 1 burg pio 1 CU part ain g FI a 5 gt All wiring from AB12 to panel must be run in gir SIF 5 Ro conduit B e I AB12 OU
39. VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions 3 4 SECTION 4 installing The Control In This Section Mounting the Control Cabine Installing the Cabine Lock GradeA Mercantile Premises Listing GradeA Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Installing the Control s Circuit Board Connecting the AC Transformer and Battery Pane Earth Ground Connections Mounting the Control Cabinet Mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors not supplied in a dean dry area which is not readily accessible to the general public The back of the control cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose e Before mounting the circuit board remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that you will beusing DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN INSTALLED Installing the Cabinet Lock Use an ADEMCO No N6277 Cam Lock and No P 3422 2 Clip for universal commercial cabinets 1 Insert the key into the lock Position the lock in the hole making certain that the latch will make contact with the latch bracket when the door is closed While holding the lock steady insert the retainer clip into the retainer slots RETAINER CLIP NOTE POSITION j RETAINER RETAINER SLOTS 4 CLIP UNLOCKED CABINET DOOR BOTTOM Figure 4 1 Installing the Lock 4 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions U L For UL installations which are intended to provide c
40. VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Global Arm 0 NO 1 YES Part 2 SHOP 0 NO 1 YES Part 1 AO WHSE User 003 Auth 3G Press O NO or 1 YES depending on whether this user will be allowed to arm more than one partition via Global Arm prompts described in the Keypad Functions section The keypad now prompts for the user s access to the next partition Press O NO or 1 YES depending on whether this user will have access to the displayed partition number If NO the keypad displays this prompt for the next partition number in sequence If YES the keypad prompts for the following User s authority level in the displayed partition see Authority Level prompt above Open Close option for this user in the displayed partition see Open Close prompt above e Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition When all partitions have been displayed the keypad will scroll through all partitions to which access has been assigned and will display the user number authority level open close and global arm options that were programmed for each partition to which the user was granted access For example Note that the G following the authority level indicates that the global arm feature is enabled for this user in the displayed partition and that the period at the end of the second line indicates Open Close reporting is enabled for this user in the displayed partition The indicates the pa
41. When all output devices have been programmed enter 00 to quit Enter 99 to exit Program M ode Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitutes Vocabulary Word Index Word Index P PERPE ON 116 Daughter s 208 Alarm 255 Den 052 067 Detector 128 Apartment 117 Device 060 Appliances DIM ce 163 Arai 118 Dining 031 ae 119 Door 016 DOWN 008 Bonis 120 Downstairs 184 Back 121 Driveway 130 Bar 0 122 DUC cin 131 Basement 021 Bathroom 051 Eo E EEN 132 Battery 053 Eight 077 0 092 Eighth 221 Bedroom 015 Equipment 133 Blower 123 004 Boiler 124 Bright 162 Factory 134 Building 125 Father S 211 Burglary 039 Fence 135 218 Call 72 009 FIPE sena 040 Central 089 First 136 Chime 054 Five 074 Closed 126 Floor 029 Computer OE 127 0 FOU sani 073 Consdle 066 Fourth 217 FOYEr 137 Word Index Word Index Word Index Fontana 087 TINO deitas 165 SIdes ceste 153 North 146 Six
42. 0 0 0 0 0 0 U pon entering Schedule Menu Mode this prompt will appear Enter 1 to program time windows Refer to Time Windows Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter Oto move to the O C Schedules prompt Enter 1to program opening and closing schedules Refer to Open Close Schedules Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter 0 to move to the Holidays prompt Enter 1to program holiday schedules Refer to Holiday Schedule Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter Oto move to the Timed E vents prompt Enter 1to program timed events for relay outputs additional schedules and other system functions Refer to Time Driven E vent Programmi ng later in this section for detailed procedures Enter 0 to move to the Access Sched prompt Enter 1to program access schedules Refer to Limitation of Access Schedules Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter Oto move to the Quit prompt Enter 1 to quit 80 Scheduling Menu Mode and return to normal operating mode Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling programmi ng options If 0 is pressed the Time Window prompt is displayed 26 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Time Windows The system provides 20 time windows that are defined with start and stop times These windows are used for various open close and access schedules as well as f
43. 8 U ser Number New User s Code Delete a User s Code Your User Code 8 User Number To Be Deleted Your Code Again View User Capability User s Code Set Real Time Clock Installer Master Only Code 463 Arming Away Arming Stay Arming Instant Arming Maximum Quick Arm Global Arming Disarming Bypassing Zones Quick Bypass Chime Mode Partition GOTO GOTO Home Partition Panics View Downloaded M essages Display All Zone Descriptors Display User Self Help Enter Code Away 2 Enter Code Stay 3 Enter Code Instant 7 Enter Code M aximum 4 Use K ey Instead Of User Code Followed by Any of the Above Arming M ode K eys If Enabled for the User the Keypad Will Display Prompt Answer The Prompted Questions Enter Code Off 1 Enter Code Bypass 6 Zone Number ToAutomatically Bypass All Faulted Zones Use Quick Bypass Method Enter Code Bypass Enter Code Chime 9 To Turn Chime M ode Off Enter Code Chime Again User Code Partition Number 0 8 User Code 0 x 1 Zone 95 A Key Zone 99 B Key 2 3 Zone 96 C Key Press O for 5 Seconds Press for 5 Seconds Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds Appendix C 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Programming Commands Scheduling Commands Output Device Control Access Control Appendix C 2 Site Initiated Download User Code 1 Direct Wire Download E
44. 93 Menu Mode 2 Program the zone with a response type 27 Access Point 3 Enter the access point number 00 31 of the door and indicate whether this is an entry or exit console 4 Enter the partition number 5 Enter the input type as CS 09 6 Enter the keypad ECP address See Zone Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programmi ng section for a detailed explanation Using an RF Transmitter Zone An rf button type transmitter 5804 can be used to provide access or egress for up to 4 doors One button will control one door Also a button can be used to provide access or egress due to a panic or duress condition An rf transmitter 5816 can be used with a remote switch to provide exit in case of a fire alarm The PIR 5890 can be used to provide exit while preventing entry through a door The smoke detector 5808 can be used to provide egress in emergency situations Programming the RF Transmitter 1 Enter Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode 2 Program the zone with a response type 27 Access Point 3 Enter the access point number 00 31 of the door 4 Indicate whether rf device is for entry or exit Section 14 Access Control Enter the partition number Enter the input type supervised rf 03 unsupervised rf 04 or button rf 05 Enter the loop number oO NS pi Enroll the serial number See Zone Programming in 93 Menu M ode Programmi ng section for a detailed explanation RF buttons and pendants must
45. Press to continue To enter System Group 2 codes press 1 Y Section 25 493 Menu Mode Programming STAY Enter the first digit of the Arm STAY report Press Enter ist 00 2nd 00 the second digit of the report If the user number is desired as the second digit enter 01 not necessary for Contact D or High Speed formats Press to continue Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner Other codes in System Group 2 are Time Set Log Reset Log 50 90 Full Event Log Overflow Exit Error by Zone Exit Error by User Recent Close Once you have entered these report codes the system will prompt QUIT REPORT MENU If you have completely finished entering report codes press 1 1 YES 0 NO 0 Y to quit Report Code Programming If you wish to enter other system report codes enter O N Press to continue System Group 3 Codes SYSTEM GROUP 3 To enter System Group 8 codes press 1 Y 1 YES 0 NO 0 EARLY OPEN Enter the first digit of the E arly Opening Report Code Press ist 00 2nd 00 Enter the second digit of the report code If the user number is desired as the second digit enter O1 not necessary for Contact ID or High Speed formats Press to continue Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner Other codes in System Group 2 are Early Close L ate Open Late Close Failed to Open e Failed to Close Auto Arm Failed e Schedule Change Once you have entered these report co
46. RATING G POWER FOR NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE B YEL DATAIN TB2 8 28VDC OR VFW UP TO 2 4A FROM CONTROL DEPENDING ON BELL CURRENT BLK GROUND NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AND CONSOLE DATA OUTPUTS ARE GHN DATA OUT POWER LIMITED TO CONTROL 12V SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE CIRCUITRY INCLUDING NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE RELAY COILS CURRENT DRAIN AT 12V IS 25 mA 80 mA PER ACTIVE OUTPUT RED Figure 9 1b 4204CF Relay Module 9 3 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons 9 4 SECTION 10 4285 4286 VIP Module In This Section General Information Mounting the VIP Module Wiring the VIP Module U L The 4285 4286 VIP Module is not permissible for commercial fire or UL commercial burglary installations General Information The 4285 4286 VIP Module is an add on accessory that permits the user to access the security system and relays via a TouchTone telephone either from the premises or by calling the premises from a remote location Only one VI P Module can be used in a security system This module must be enabled as Device Address 4 in Device Programming in the 93 Menu M ode Programmi ng section and must be assigned to a partition The 4285 4286 VIP Module offers the following features Allowstheuser toreceive synthesized voice messages over the phone regarding the status of the security system Allowsthe user to arm and disarm the security system and per
47. SECTION 10 4285 4286 VI P Module rere rennen 10 1 General 7 7 1 10 1 0 a 10 2 Wiring the 2 1 1 11 1 0 10 2 SECTION 11 Audio Alarm Verification AAV Unit 11 1 6 1 37 71111 71111 0 11 1 AAV Module ODE GU ON su leccare 11 1 Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections 11 2 Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options 11 2 SECTION 12 J 2 Trigger Outputs 1 eere nre nre 12 1 General VAT ORIMAU 8 8111111111 0 12 1 Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and WIrINg i 12 1 Remote Keyswitch Operation and Wiring e 12 3 5140LED Inarcator
48. normally need not be replaced for Wi WA 4142TR cable supplied PINS 2 3 6 8 amp 9 NOT USED POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER at least 3 yrs WHITE WHITE S not supervised 19 0 SAIN Connect RJ31X using RJ31X cable supplied Supervision is programmable KEYPAD PORT 1 GIG 90 99 000 1 0 955 a TRNSFMR BELL OUTPUTS AUX RELAY OPTIONAL REMOVABLE TERMINAL BLOCK KIT ADEMCO NO 4142BLK AC WIRING IS S 3 SUPERVISED a o o J S s WARNING lt o d lt amp 6 TO PREVENT OUTPUT CL Si EU EE Y RISK OF BL JBL Sr BE II Red Blk Gm Yel SEG a A SO REMOTE KEYPADS ara W ENCLOSURE O O AUX RELAY FORM C NW 2 SOE DISCONNECT ADEMCO No 1451 programmable response i SEE NOTE 3 TELCO JACK supplied HORN HORN not supervised INPUT 120VAC SONO BEFORE SP e SERVICING 1 0A max Connect to a A A resistive loads Rano 0 T DER 1 THIS PANEL OUTPUT Pv 2k note 2 dk 1 e ALARM 4209U ALARM POLARITY SHOWN not supervised EARTH GROUND See instructions for Y N C d proper earth ground NOTES 0 ma ea ee Each output may be selected for N connections i NOTE 1 Style Y supervision or no supervision i See main PCB jumpers W1 W4 and The combined standby current Sala field 310 p drawn from aux pwr 1 aux pwr 2 and polling loop cannot exceed FIRE CKTS Supervise using 2k EOLR a I 1 0A The combined alarm cur
49. then ZONE TYPE may be used instead of using a ZONE LIST and EVENT to activate the device If a System Operation such as DISARMING or ANY FIRE ALARM is to activate the device the appropriate choice would also be entered under the ZONE TYPE option The ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION option functions independently of the EVENT ZONE LIST combination If a specific ZONE TYPE is chosen any zone of that response type going into alarm trouble or fault will cause the device to activate as selected in ACTION If the same ZONE TYPE is also chosen for the STOP programming any zone of that type that restores will de activate the device If a SYSTEM OPERATION is chosen that operation will cause the device to activate as selected in ACTION The different choices for ZONE TYPE and SYSTEM OPERATION arelisted in Programmi ng Relays later in this section and on the Programming Form PARTITION No P The device s Start ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION may be limited to an occurrence on one partition 1 8 or any partition 0 The STOP programming determines when and under what conditions the device will be de activated The following options are available 1 2 3 RESTORE ZONE LIST ZL f a ZONE LIST is used as the Stop event the device will de activate when all the zones in that list restore from a previous fault trouble or alarm condition This will occur regardless of what is programmed
50. which do not need to be supported for the full 24 hour battery backup period can be disconnected from the auxiliary outputs allowing a smaller capacity battery to be used Therelay re activates within a few seconds after AC power restores 16 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 16 4 SECTION 17 Dialer Outputs In This Section Dialer Outputs Available TdephoneLine Connections T deohone Line Supervision Dialer Operation Dialer Outputs Available TheVISTA 128FB provides one main built in dialer for communication to the central station and one optional 5140DLM Backup Dialer both supervised for voltage and current on the phone lines Telephone Line Connections UL Connect the main dialer and backup dialer if used outputs to telephone company lines which provide loop start service using the RJ 31X Cables supplied Do not connect to telephone company lines which provide ground start service The 5140DLM Backup Dialer mounts to the main PCB shield and connects to the main PCB J 3 connector using a ribbon cable supplied with module as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram at the end of this manual Connect the earth ground screw on the 5140DL M to the earth ground screw terminal 30 on the main PCB using 16 AWG wire Cut the blue jumper when the dialer outputs are connected to telephone lines which telephone company MTU installed For Listed fire central station UL864 N
51. 00 00 13 105 03 00 10 E 13 00 15 00 107 00 07 00 02 110 00 10 00 05 112 03 00 11 12 13 00 07 00 114 00 04 00 09 117 00 11 07 13 00 12 00 119 00 09 00 14 121 03 00 12 01 13 00 01 00 124 03 00 04 126 00 06 00 06 128 03 00 12 08 13 00 08 00 603 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 24 109 0 de 0 jo 00 f0 0 605 00 00 00 00 s 00 00 fo 0 oo 00 00 90 607 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 e9 po 00 fo 0 00 00 fo 00 610 612 00 00 00 00 614 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 800 00 00 00 00 802 00 00 00 00 804 00 27 10 Section 27 System Communications COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES cont d ZONE LOW SPEED EXPRESS HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 808 00 00 00 00 810 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 812 00 00 00 00 815 00 00 00 00 817 00 00 00 00 00 819 00 00 00 00 822 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 824 00 00 00 00 826 00 00 00 00 829 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 831 00 00 00 00 971 03 00 07 01 07 00 02 00 974 03 00 04 00 05 00 988 00 00 00 00 980 00 00 fo o0 o0 0 00 90 995 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 996 Joo 00 oo 00 joo 0 j00 0 TROUBLE 05 00 00 00 01 BY PASS 00 00 00 00 00 BYP RST 00 x i 00 00 00 00 DURESS 02 00 13 13 01 00 11 00 To program report codes see Report Code Programming in the 93 Menu M ode section 27 11 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 27 12 SECTION 28 Downloading Primer Remote downloading is not a UL Listed feature In This Section General Information Get
52. 6 APPENDIX A Regulatory Agency Statements A 1 UL nstalladoen FR SUI SIVA CS 23 ce 2 11 00 A 1 ER sore NIEPAJ ocal EI 111111311111111 0 A 1 UL864 NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire A 1 UL609 GradeA Local Mercantile Premises Local Mercantile Safe amp Vault A 2 UL 365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm iii A 2 UL611 UL 1610 Central Station Burglary A 2 California StateFireMarshal CFSM Requirements i A 3 APPENDIX B DIP Switch SS B 1 APPENDIX C Summary of System Commands C 1 APPENDIX D Specifications ases vir rr ER E a c E E E XE ER E ER ER ERR NER REN EE D 1 INDE X cicli Index 1 THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY List of Figures A SS stalling Me 3 7 1111 1111 0 4 1 4 2 Cabine Attack 6 6
53. 76 1 77 2 00 2 01 2 02 Section 24 Data Field Descriptions ACCESS RELAY partition specific 00 The system can be programmed to provide user acti vated access control If enabled the assigned relay will pulse for 2 seconds when the user enters his code and presses 0 Enter the relay number 01 32 for the relay that will be used for access control Enter 00 if not used in this partition This function has not been UL Listed for use with the VISTA 128F B control Must be 00 for commercial fire and UL Note See the Access Control section for enhanced access control capability LOG FIRST MAINTENANCE SIGNAL Enter O for no logging Enter 1 to log first maintenance signal from each smoke detector NUMBER OF PARTITIONS 1 Enter the number of partitions 1 8 to be used in the system DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END MONTH 0410 Enter the months 00 12 in which daylight savings time starts and ends Enter 00 00 if daylight savings time does not apply to the user s region Standard setting for U S is 04 10 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END WEEKEND 1 5 Enter the start and end weekends for daylight savings time as follows 1 first 2 second 3 third 4 fourth 5 ast 62next to last 7 third from last Standard setting for U S is 1 5 Fields 2 05 2 08 must be set to O for UL installations 2 05 AUTO ARM DELAY partition specific 15 EN Enter the time between the end of the ar
54. COMM 777 28 3 32 5 3 3 23 23 28 1 MODULE RELAY JE 3 3 P esos 25 29 Mounting the 4100APG 2 00 6 19 1 Mounting the Control Cabinet 4 1 Mounting The Keypads 222 2 2 222222222222020222326666 5 3 Mounting the VIP Module 10 2 MUNZAGCOSS 7777 0 28 6 MUCTIPLE ALARMS 37 24 3 Multiple Partition Access eessssssss 30 5 National Electric COdEe 4 4 No Alarm Response Type 23 22 3 NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR ZONES 3 8 24 6 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS eere 24 16 OC or OPEN CIRCUIT 71 5 4 1 3 3 3 3 23 3 3 3 333 11 1 32 5 One Man Fire Walk TEeSt 32 2 On Line Control F nctlofis usos tace edu er eue eee 28 3 OPEN CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH 24 5 Open Close 99 4 0 i 30 5 Open Close Reports by Exception 24 17 26 5 Open Close Schedule Programming 26 10 Open Close Schedule Worksheet 26 10 Open Close Schedules 22222 26 4 26 7 Open Close WINdOWS i 26 13 Operator
55. During arethe only valid choices for bypass commands If 3 During is selected for auto bypassing the system will bypass the zone s specified on a particular zone list at the beginning of the window and unbypass the zone s at the end of the window If it is selected for auto unbypassing the system will remove the bypass of the zone s at the beginning of the window and will restore the bypass of the zone s at the end of the window Action Code Action Specifier 30 Auto bypass Zone list Zone list 31 Autounbypass Zone list Zone list Open Close Windows Activation time 3 During is the only valid choice for these commands Action Code Action Specifier 40 Enable Opening Window by partition Partition s 41 Enable Closing Window by partition Partition s 42 Enable Access Window for access group Access Group 50 Off Normal Reminder None Starts local keypad beeping if fire off normal condition exists Section 26 Scheduling Options 3 Enter the desired activation time which refers to when the action is to take place relative to the time window Select from Activation time Description Beginning of time window End of time window 3 During time window active period only On at beginning of window off at end This can be used in conjunction with the arm disarm or bypass commands to control a part of the system during the window For example if bypass is selected to activate during the window the zones in the z
56. Enter the desired hour Press to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner Press to move to the AM PM position Pressing any key in the 0 9 range will toggle the AM PM indication Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry After the windows for that day have been completed the system will prompt for disarm and arm time windows for the next day Press if no changes are desired Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week When all the windows for all the days have been completed the system will prompt which days of the schedule are to be acti vated Days MTWTFSS Hit 0 7 x x User Scheduling Menu Mode Section 26 Scheduling Options This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary schedule Toselect the days which are to be activated enter 1 7 Monday 1 An X will appear under that day indicating the temporary schedule for that day is active Entering a day s number again will deactivate that day Pressing O will toggle all days on off The temporary schedule will only be in effect for the days which have the letter x under them As the week progresses the selected days are reset to the inactive state but all other entries for the temporary schedule will remain programmed Press to store the entries or press to exit the Temporary Schedule Entry M ode without making any changes The system provides up to 20 timers which will be a
57. Fill out the Total Control Panel Load Worksheet shown on next page to determine the total standby and alarm load drawn from the control s internal 12V power supply If using the PS24 fill out the Total PS24 Module Load Worksheet found in the PS24 s instructions to determine the required capacity of the backup batteries that must be connected to the PS24 Select two 12V batteries from the Battery Selection Table in the PS24 s instructions that have a capacity greater than or equal to the calculated capacity When calculating standby capacity use 24 hours for central station fire and 60 hours for remote station fire in the standby capacity formula If not using the PS24 fill out the Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet following the other worksheets to determine the required capacity for the backup battery Select one of the batteries given in the Battery Selection Table later in this section which has a capacity greater than or equal to the calculated battery Section 20 Final Power U p Procedure Connecting the Backup Battery to the Control If not using the PS24 connect the battery or batteries to the VISTA 128FB as shown in Figure 20 1 If using the PS24 connect the backup batteries to the PS24 using the cables supplied with the PS24 as shown in the PS24 s instructions Both the VISTA 128F B and the PS24 run brief battery tests every 60 seconds to determine whether the battery is connected If a low or disconnected batter
58. Fire e UL864 NFPA 72 Local Central Station and Remote Station Burglary e UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault e UL611 UL 1610 Grades A AA Central Station e UL365 Grades A AA Police Connect VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions SECTION 2 Planning a Partitioned System In This Section Theory of Partitioning Seting Up a Partitioned System Common Lobby Logic Master Keypad Setup and Operation Theory of Partitioning This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas as if each had its own control These areas are called partitions Partitions are used to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed or to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals E ach system user can be assigned to operate any or all partitions and can be given a different authority level in each Before anything can be assigned to those partitions you must first determine how many partitions are required 1 8 Following are some facts you need to know about partitioning Keypads E ach keypad must be given a unique address and be assigned to one partition it can also be assigned to Partition 9 if Master keypad operation is desired See Master Keypad Setup and Operation later in this section Zones E ach zone must be assigned to one partition The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition s keypad s Fire zones must be assigned to
59. House 0 programmed into the system for the RF receiver This can be likened to a family in which everyone has the same last name House ID but each person has a different first name Transmitter ID The zone number must then be programmed into the system using Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Transmitter Supervision Eachtransmitter except 5701 and 5727 is supervised by a check in signal that is sent to the receiver at 70 90 minute intervals If at least one check in is not received from a transmitter within a certain period of time programmed in field 1 31 the keypad will display the zone number and CHECK Eachtransmitter including 5701 and 5727 is also supervised for low battery conditions and will transmit a low battery signal to the receiver when the battery has approximately 30 days of life remaining The keypad will display the transmitter number and LO BAT Transmitter Battery Life e Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4 to 7 years depending on the environment usage and the specific wireless device being used External factors such as humidity high or low temperatures as well as large swings in temperature may reduce the actual battery life in a given installation The wireless system can identify a true low battery situation thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that given point within the system e Unsupervise
60. Instructions See the diagram below for correct connections In addition the green wire is referred to in step 2 of the IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY section of the 4100SM Instructions use the violet wire instead Connector 8 on the main PC board see the Summary of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this manual is intended to be interfaced to either a local serial printer see E vent Log printer Connections in the E vent Log Options section or a computer Make connections to a computer as shown below Note that the violet wire connection for a computer differs from that used when connecting a serial printer Remove the alpha numeric pager interface if it is installed while performing the direct wire download It may be reconnected once the direct wire download is completed 4100SM TO TERM 11 T AUX PWR 1 OUTPUT 10 RM not used not used not used e not used B d gd RED BLUE WHITE 10 FT CABLE NOTE ENTER THE INSTALLER CODE 5 TO INITIATE DOWNLOADING BEFORE MAKING THE ABOVE CONNECTIONS TO AVOID TRIGGERING A FAULT ON INPUT 1 DOWNLOADING PC Figure 26 1 Direct Wire Downloading Connections 28 4 SECTION 29 Setting the Real Time Clock In This Section General Information Setting theTime and Date General Information This system provides a real time clock which must be set in order for the system s event log to keep track of events by time and dat
61. Menu Mode 26 6 The 80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program most of the scheduling and timed event options Toenter this mode the system must first be in the normal operating mode all partitions disarmed Enter Installer Code 8 0 The following can be programmed while in this mode e Define time windows e Assign open close schedules to each partition e Assign holiday schedules e Program time driven events for system functions and relay activation e Assign limitation of access schedules Some scheduling features are programmed in Data Field Programming M ode Installer Code 8000 The general Programming M ode scheduling fields are listed below System Wide Fields 1 74 1 75 Relay time out values 2 01 2 02 Daylight savings time options 2 11 Allow disarming outside window if alarm occurs Partition Specificfields 1 76 Access control relay for this partition 2 05 Auto arm delay value 2 06 Auto arm warning time 2 07 Auto disarm delay value 2 08 Force arm enable 2 09 Open Close Reporting by Exception 2 10 Restrict disarm only during windows Report Code Programming in 93 Menu Mode System Group 3 Scheduling related report codes E vent driven relay activation options are programmed using the Relay Programming in the 93 Menu Mode These actions are in response to a programmed action However relay activation can also be ti me driven and thus be used to initiate a desired action Time driven relay activation opti
62. Moduli earn 12 4 Auxiliary Alarm Signaling EQUIPMENT 12 6 E vene Log Printer Connections RS a CURE ES Co dE E ena ae 12 9 DIr Wire vog eb Ei na ERR RU FAEERE 11111 1 13133130 12 10 SECTION 13 7820 Long Range Radigo 2 ern 13 1 General Mroma ON eso oii eios Data es Cle Peed f 797 13 1 Wiring the Long Range Radio to the Control ie 13 2 Programming the Control for the Long Range 13 2 Mesage C 13 2 SECTION 14 Access CONT OL ti 14 1 General Information tt aida 14 1 Access Control OF ah ENEYEEXMEPO0N tacca 14 2 Using the VISTA 128F B Without the VGM and PassPoint ACS i 14 4 Access rale E VOLES oran 11 1 1 14 4 Vista Gateway Module Wiring and Programming ii 14 4 Tableof Contents SECTION 15 External SOUNGERS
63. OFF turns off the siren and disarms the system the second code OF F clears the memory of alarm and resets the glassbreak detector Compatible Glassbreak Detectors Use detectors that meet the following ratings Standby Voltage 5VDC 13 8VDC Standby Resistance Greater than 20k ohms equivalent resistance of all detectors in parallel Alarm Resistance Less than 1 1k ohms see note below Alarm Current 2mA 10mA Reset Time L ess than 6 seconds ThelEl 735L Series detectors have been tested and found to be compatible with these ratings You can use up to 50 IEI 735L Detectors connected in parallel 6 5 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions 1 The alarm current provided by zone 8 will support only one glassbreak detector in the alarmed state 2 Do not use other N O or N C contacts when using glassbreak detectors on zone 8 Other contacts may prevent proper glass break detector operation Y ou can use detectors which exceed 1 1k ohms in alarm provided they maintain a voltage drop of less than 3 8 volts in alarm Checkout Procedure for Hardwired Zones 6 6 After installation of all hardwired zones is complete each partition of the security system should be checked as follows l Makecertain that all devices and sensors connected to the hardwired zones are not in a faulted state Doors and windows with contacts should be closed PIRs should be covered use a doth to mask them tempora
64. OPEN CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH 0 Enter 1to enable Open Close reporting for the keyswitch Enter O if reporting is not desired NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR ZONES 3 8 m Enter O if end of line resistors are to be used Enter 1if end of line resistors are not to be used in which case only normally closed devices must be used Must be 0 for commercial fire and UL installations DIAL TONE PAUSE 0 This field sets the time the system will wait for dial tone before dialing Applies if true dial tone is not selected in field 43 or the dial tone is not actually detected Enter the desired wait time for dial tone detection as follows Enter single digit 0 5 seconds 1 11 seconds or 2 30 seconds Must be 0 for commercial fire and UL installations 24 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 6 43 DIAL TONE DETECTION 1 44 45 46 47 48 49 Determines whether the control will wait for a true dial tone before dialing or if it will wait for a predetermined delay before dialing delay is programmed in Dial Tone Pause field 42 The latter may be necessary in high noise environment telco networks where noise can be confused with dial tone resulting in premature dialing Enter 1 for true dial tone wait If no dial tone is detected will dial at end of pause programmed in field 42 Enter O to pause for seconds entered in field 42 then dial RING DETECTION COUNT og Only applic
65. Partition 1 Users E ach user may be given access to one or more partitions If a user is to operate more than one partition and would like to arm disarm all or some of those partitions with a single command the user must be enabled for global arming for those partitions when entering user codes A user with access to more than one partition multiple access can log on to one partition from another partition s keypad provided that program field 2 18 Enable GOTO is enabled for each partition he she wants to log on to from another A partition can be selected as a common lobby partition and other partitions can affect this partition by causing arming disarming of this partition to be automated see Common Lobby Logic later in this section VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Setting Up a Partitioned System The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below If you need more information on how to program the prescribed options see The Mechanics of Programming section as well as each corresponding section s programming procedure l Determine how many partitions the system will consist of programmed in field 2 00 2 Assign keypads to partitions Device Programming Mode in 93 Menu Mode 3 Assign zones to partitions Zone Programming Mode in 93 Menu Mode All fire zones must be assigned to Partition 1 to ensure that all Fire Test modes operate correctly 4 Confirm zones are displayed at the
66. SYSTEM GROUP 1 1 YES O NO O0 CLOSE 1st 00 2nd 00 Enter the first digit of the Bypass Restore Report Code double digit entry and press The second digit will be the ID Second digit of the Alarm Report Code for each zone if programmed Press to continue Enter one zone for each group of 16 zones When finished entering Restore and Supervisory Codes for all zone groups enter 000 Press to continue If you have completely finished entering report codes press 1 Y to quit Report Code Programming If you wish to enter other system report codes enter O N Press to continue To enter System Group 1 codes press 1 Y Enter the first digit of the Closing Arm AWAY report Press Enter the second digit of the report If the user number is desired as the second digit enter 01 not necessary for Contact ID or High Speed formats Press to continue Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner Other report codes in System Group 1 are Opening Disarm System Low Battery Low Battery Restore AC Loss AC Restore Periodic Test Power Cancel Program T amper Once you have entered these report codes the system will prompt QUIT REPORT MENU 1 YES 0 NO 0 System Group 2 Codes 25 14 SYSTEM GROUP 2 1 YES 0 NO 0 If you have completely finished entering report codes press 1 Y to quit Report Code Programming If you wish to enter other system report codes enter O N
67. Specifier 01 Relay On Relay 02 Relay Off Relay 03 Relay Close for 2 seconds Relay 04 Relay Close XX minutes set in field 1 74 Relay 05 Relay Close YY seconds set in field 1 75 Relay 06 Relay Group On Relay Group 07 Relay Group Off Relay Group 08 Relay Group Close for 2 seconds Relay Group 09 Relay Group Close XX minutes set in field 1 74 Relay Group 10 Relay Group Close Y Y seconds set in field 1 75 Relay Group 26 11 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 26 12 Arm Disarm Commands Activation times 1 Beginning 2 End 3 During are the only valid choices for automatic arming and disarming functions During can be used to arm or disarm the control for a specific time only For example if during is selected with Arm STAY the system will automatically Arm STAY at the beginning of the window and automatically disarm at the end of the window Action Code Action Specifier 20 Arm STAY Partition s 21 Arm AWAY Partition s 22 Disarm Partition s 23 Force Arm STAY Auto bypass faulted zns Partition s 24 Force Arm AWAY Auto bypass faulted zns Partition s The auto arm warning field 2 06 applies when using time driven events to auto arm Temporary schedules will not override an auto arming or auto disarming programmed in time driven events The auto arming window cannot be extended using the Installer Code 82 Mode Bypass Commands Activation times 1 Beginning 2 End 3
68. TO INSTRUCTIONS N8988 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY WARNING TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE M fi aut tic fi Sprinkl i d waterfl UL Listed local trol coded REN THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO UI Listed ce fel station rid remote Son protected verses unit when eed wah ST40DLM back ip dialet module I aces lanes e INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY A OO i with the National Fire OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using G6 Rein E Se toe hd orco DIRE Protection Association s THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS THE DD The 5 0DLM Dialer default functions shown S da e 0 TOTAL DELAY CONTROL UNIT PLUS AGI 18 IRE ire Protection Assoc ANS Quincy MA 02269 Printed DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO SEE TELCO amp OUT 5 REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER information describing proper THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY JACK SHOCK 17 OUT 1 OPEN CLOSE installation operation THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING O BELOW 8 IN T NO LOOP 3 0 JURISDICTION header J3 usin Tohon O gonnec using SUPPE capo RATINGS OUT lo W 2K TO GROUND cable supplied HIGH 10 14VDC 20mA MAX repair service is to be
69. U U U U U U U U U 16 4278 PIR b MIRROR SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 SIDE VIEW DN 12345678 a N POS 7 UP NORMAL MODE DN INSTANT MODE POS 8 UP W T DISABLE DN WALK TEST DIP SWITCH POSITION UP up up UP uP up uP UP uP UP DEVICE 10 c U C U cai ai UP CICICICIC Ujo v c U c U 47 uP 48 St IR UP RUP Pa EH EUR oo C C C C C C C C IC C G CIC IC C CIC JC IC C C 6 UU Ul UU UV Ul U Ul U V VU UsU VU UU cic U U ID 2 47 48 59 60 4194 REED CONTACT SURFACE MOUNT O lS 49 SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 SIDE VIEW 123 45 6 DN UP 4 MT DEVICE DIP SWITCH POSITION ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 aa aie Lis sees pee UP es PPS 32 ue ue u4 ru u 15 PUP ur UP uP CM EH EYE 7 TUPIT Eag a UP ees OS TS UP eee 28 2 UP UP 90 31 L292 ee iat SS Ea Vai 21955 Ps CIC 47 UP UPIUP CIC CIC GIG CIC cic CIC CIC CIC Ul U UU U U U
70. a central station report if desired This zonetype is usually assigned to a zone that contains a foil protected door or window such as in a store or to a zone covering a sensitive area such as a stock room drug supply room etc It can also be used on a sensor or contact in an area where immediate notification of an entry is desired 22 2 Type 06 24 Hour Silent Alarm This zone type sends a report to the Central Station but provides no keypad display or sounding This zone type is usually assigned to a zone containing an Emergency button Type 07 24 Hour Audible Alarm This zone type sends a report to the central station and provides an alarm sound at the keypad and an audible external alarm This zone type is usually assigned to a zone that has an E mergency button Type 08 24 Hour Auxiliary Alarm This zone type sends a report to central station and provides an alarm sound at the keypad No bell output is provided This zone type is usually assigned to a zone containing a button for use in personal emergencies or to a zone containing monitoring devices such as water sensors temperature sensors etc Type 09 Supervised Fire Without Verification This zone type provides a fire alarm on short circuit and a trouble condition on open circuit The bell output must be programmed to pulse when this zone type is shorted This zone type IS always active and cannot be bypassed Type 10 Interior W Delay This zo
71. a garage loading dock or basement door Type 03 Perimeter Burglary This zone type gives an instant alarm if the zone is faulted when the panel is armed in the AWAY STAY INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode This zone type is usually assigned to all sensors or contacts on exterior doors and windows Type 04 Interior Follower This zone type gives a delayed alarm using the programmed entry exit ti me if the entry exit zone is faulted first Otherwise this zone type gives an instant alarm This zone type is active when the panel is armed in the AWAY or MAXIMUM Mode MAXIMUM Mode eliminates the entry delay This zone type is bypassed automatically when the panel is armed in the STAY or INSTANT Mode This zone type is usually assigned to a zone covering an area such as a foyer lobby or hallway through which one must pass upon entry or exit after faulting the entry exit zone to reach the keypad to disarm the system Since this zone type is designed to provide an instant alarm if the entry exit zone is not violated first it will protect an area in the event an intruder hides on the premises prior to the system being armed or gains access to the premises through an unprotected area Type 05 Trouble by Day Alarm by Night This zone type will give an instant alarm if faulted when armed in the AWAY STAY INSTANT or MAXIMUM night Mode During the disarmed state day the system will provide a latched trouble sounding from the keypad and
72. a particular transmitter that may be carried off the premises 5801 5802M N may be turned off by enrolling it as a UR unsupervised RF type as described later in this manual Some 5800 Series transmitters have built in tamper protection and will annunciate a CHECK or TRBL condition if covers are removed 8 8 Section 8 Wireless Zone E xpansion Transmitter Input Types All of the transmitters described have one or more unique factory assigned input loop codes Each of the inputs requires its own programming zone e g a 5804 s four button inputs require four programming zones Transmitters can be programmed as one of the following types RF Sends periodic Check in signals as well as Fault Restore and Low Battery signals Thetransmitter must Supervised RF remain within the receiver s range UR Sends all the signals that the RF type does but the U ised RF control does not supervise the Check in signals The transmitter may therefore be carried off premises BR These only send Fault signals They only send Low Battery signals when they are activated button pressed U sed Button RF l i ad Thetransmitter may be carried off premises Transmitter Battery Life Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4 to 7 years depending on the environment usage and the specific wireless device being used Factors such as humidity high or low temperatures as wel
73. an alarm on one some or all zones as selected in Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode If 3 61 1 the auxiliary relay remains active until Aux Relay Timeout expires or until User Code OF F is entered This option can be used to provide a third unsupervised bell output for supplementary strobes sounders etc when wired to the Aux Power 1 output or to a separate power supply as shown in Figure 16 1 If field 3 61 4 the auxiliary relay remains activated until User Code 67 is entered This option can be used for elevator recall or ventilator shutdown on fire alarms By default the relay is set to activate on alarm zones 1 8 with no timeout field 3 61 1 This usage might be required for a common fire and burglary alarm strobe indicator When field 3 6121 the auxiliary relay can also be programmed to give a brief activation for confirmation of arming field 3 57 or for entry exit or perimeter zone faults while Chime Mode is active field 3 59 16 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions ALARM AUX RELAY FACTORY DEFAULTS Activates for zones 1 8 alarms LL steady alarm output No timeout NOTES Use non polarized indicating devices Wiring is not supervised Do not exceed ratings of the supply used If Aux Pwr 1 output is used then combined alarm current drawn from Aux Pwr 1 Aux Pwr 2 Bell 1 and Bell 2 cannot exceed 2 3A max LE HMd XNV Can draw power from A
74. and 12 for C Refer to the System Communication section for more information about report codes and report code formats Press to continue 25 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 25 6 010 BELL RLY SEL 0 010 INPUT TYPE RF Xmitter 3 Note that input types 4 amp 5 are valid for certain 5800 Series transmitters only e g 5801 5802 5802CP amp 5803 When using 5700 Series transmitters always set the input type to 3 RF The zone number of the transmitter identifies whether or not supervision is required e g 5700 wireless zone number 63 is not supervised Input type 10 is applicable only if PassPoint ACS is installed with the Vista Gateway Module 010 CONS ECP ADDR 01 31 01 010 ACS ZONE NO 00 31 01 010 SMART CONTACT 1 YES 0 NO E ach zone can be assigned to activate either one or both bell outputs and or the system s auxiliary relay Enter one of the following assignments O none 1 Bell 1 2 Bell 2 3 Bells 1 amp 2 4 Aux Relay 5 Bell 1 amp Aux Relay 62Bell 2 Aux Relay 7 Bells 1 amp 2 amp Aux Relay Press to continue Enter the input device type as follows 00 not used 01 hardwired 03 supervised RF transmitter RF type 04 unsupervised RF transmitter UR type 05 RF button type transmitter BR type 06 serial number polling loop device SL type 07 DIP switch type polling loop device 08 right loop of DIP switch type device 09 keypad input
75. and are grouped into five categories as follows Use the 3 amp 1 keys to scroll to the next and previous screens respectively ALARM EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have either caused an alarm TYPE CCC UUU or have been restored in selected partition CHECK EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have caused a trouble or TYPE CCC UUU supervisory condition in selected partition BYPASS EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have been bypassed in TYPE CCC UUU selected partition OP CL EVENT LOG Displays time date and user number for each arming and TYPE CCC UUU disarming of the system for the partition selected SYSTEM EVENT LOG Displays time date for system conditions such as AC loss TYPE CCC UUU communication failure etc regardless of partition ALL EVENT LOG Displays all categories of events in chronological order from TYPE CCC UUU most recent to oldest TEST EVENT LOG Displays all test events TYPE CCC UUU To display the events in a particular category press 8 at the desired category screen If in Display Mode the most recent event is displayed Press 1 to display older events press 3 to go forward in time If in Print Mode the first press of 8 will causethe printer to print all events in that category with each event automatically scrolled on the display keypad The following is a typical display P8 01 01 12 02A Shows burglary alarm occurred in zone 3 of Partition 8 at BURGLARY 0
76. arm and disarm the system when programmed within the open and close time windows without causing a report to be sent to the central station reporting by exception field 2 09 The system can be programmed to automatically arm disarm in case an employee fails to arm disarm manually auto arm auto di sarm Open Close Definitions General Theopen dose scheduling is controlled by one of three schedules Each schedule consists of one time window for openings and one time window for closings herearethreetypes of schedules available Daily Holiday and Temporary Daily Schedule e Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of one opening window and one dosing window per day 26 4 Section 26 Scheduling Options Holiday Schedule e A holiday schedule will override the regular daily schedule on selected holidays throughout the year e The opening and closing windows are programmed in the daily schedule but the holidays themselves are defined in the Holiday Schedule Programming in the 80 M enu Mode Temporary Schedule Thetemporary schedule provides a method for the end user to override the daily and holiday schedules e t consists of one opening window and one closing window for each day of the week Theschedule takes effect for up to one week after which it is automatically deactivated e This schedule is programmed using the 81 Temporary Schedule M enu M ode Additional Schedules e Addition
77. before the follower zone is processed 4 f a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones the relay will activate without the other zone being faulted 5 If arelay is programmed to activate on either an alarm or trouble both zones must trip before the relay will activate and both zones must restore for the relay to deactivate if relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore Call Waiting Defeat Logic Although this option does not directly prevent false alarms it may prevent the central station from taking action on a potential false alarm After the panel s initial call to report the alarm the panel may attempt to make an additional call perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoral If Call Waiting is not defeated an operator at the central station attempting to contact the premises to verify whether the alarm is valid would hear the phone ringing indefinitely and have to dispatch on the call This option enabled in program field 1 42 attempts to defeat Call Waiting on the first outgoing call attempt to both the primary and secondary numbers It does this by dialing a special sequence preceding the phone number but after the PABX number The panel will dial 70 if using TouchTone and 1170 if using rotary The panel does not attempt to defeat Call Waiting on each call attempt because the phone company may not complete the call if the sequence is dialed on a phone line that does not have Call Waiting
78. closed circuit sensors only cannot be used in UL installations Compatible Polling Loop Devices cont d 4275 4192SD 4192SDM 4192SDT 4192SDTM 4192CP 4192CPM 4939SN BR 4939SN GY Dual PIR Surface Mount Reed Contact Wide Gap Extender Module Photoelectric Smoke Detector Devices Photoelectric Smoke Detector w Heat Detector lonization Smoke Detector Serial Number Surface Mount Reed Contacts Serial Number Recessed Reed Contact Aluminum Overhead Door Contact Section 7 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion Dual element PIR with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable Includes mirrors for both wide angle and curtain long range applications and can use the 1875PA Pet Alley mirror Built in selectable pulse count capability Wide gap surface mounted reed contact with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable Used to increase the polling loop current 128mA to extend the polling loop wire run length and or to provide individual electrically isolated loops Connects to the polling loop and is powered from panel s auxiliary power or by a separate power supply with battery backup One piece photoelectric smoke detector with built in RPM DIP switch programmable 4192SDM provides maintenance signals One piece photoelectric smoke detector with 135 F 57 C heat detector and built in RPM DIP
79. current cannot exceed 128mA If total load exceeds 128MA then a 4297 Loop Extender Module can be used This module is powered from the panel s auxiliary power and provides a separate polling loop output which can support an additional 128mA load Note that the total number of polling loop points connected to the panel cannot exceed 120 20 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Total Control Panel Load Worksheets To calculate the total current for the Aux Power 1 Aux Power 2 Bell 1 and Bell 2 outputs and polling loop current multiply the each device s standby and or alarm current by the number of units used l Enter devices used on AUX POWER 1 OUTPUT Total Current CUN OU pub Device Model Device Current X of Units Standby Alarm calculate standby and alarm currents then add to get Aux Power 1 current subtotal 2 Enter devices used on AUX POWER 2 OUTPUT Total Current ADE OWE Z OU put Device Model Device Current X of Units x Standby Alarm calculate standby and alarm currents then add to get Aux Power 2 current subtotal Aux Power 2 Output Subtotal terminals 10 amp 11 1 0A max 1 7A max 20 4 Enter devices connected to Bell 1 output calculate alarm currents then add to get Bell 1 output current subtotal Enter devices connected to Bell 2 output calculate alarm currents then add to get Bell 2 output current subtotal Enter the total polling loop using values calculated in th
80. ded WT ria Gui CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT SMOKE DETECTOR provideo with this equipment ZONE DELAY SEC MODEL DELAY SEC OTHER OUTS LOW 1K TO GROUND BACK UP DIALER ON HOOK HIGH 10 14VDC THRU 5K VOLTAGE THRESHOLD BLUE ROUND SERENI EARTH 1 LE ee INTACT 25V 3 wire to main PCB Q VOLTAGE 123235283 CUT 13V lena 30 TRIGGERS OOOOOOOOO J2 t ised TT Q OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK UP DIALER MODULE ird 4 4142TR cable not supplied l E MAIN PCB SHIELD MAIN DIALER ON HOOK BATTERY TABS DI THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED EC Ee ee BLK RED DETECTOR S IS TO BE USED Ja KEYPAD PORT 2 CUT 13V n CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM co See instr regarding port 2 use SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD WE BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS KEYPAD PORT 2 QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION BLUE i INTACT Supervised using 2k EOLR e to keypad green wire SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH Connect to 12V 12AH min 34 4AH max 12345 678 2 4 5 AUX PWR 2 to keypad red wire INTERFACE TO 5140DLM lead acid batteries using cables supplied CUT Not supervised no EOLR used 000000000 i Rating 10 14 VDC RUTHCRITS EANVING IUBISBIGTION See instructions for required capacity BELL1 BELL2 i 400mA max See note 1 THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL 000000000 J3 Float charging voltage 13 7VDC Battery Make connections usin i 7 DATA OUT 2 to keypad yellow wire SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A
81. described in the table below in order from highest to lowest ranking 30 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 30 2 1 3 Operator level A 4 Operator level B 5 Operator level C Level 0 Installer User 1 Codes Programmed in field 00 default 5 1 4 0 Installer Open Close reporting is selected in field 39 Can perform all system functions arm disarm bypass etc but cannot disarm if armed by another code or by Quick Arm Can add delete or change codes of all other authority levels and can select Open Close reports for any user Is the only code that can be used to enter program mode The Installer Code can be prevented from re entering the Program M ode by exiting using 98 Theonly way to access Programming M ode if this done is by powering down the system powering up again and then pressing both the and keys at the same time within 30 seconds of power up Must program at least one Master Code during initial installation Master Codes are codes intended for use by the primary user s of the system Level 1 Master Codes Can perform all normal system functions Can be used to assign up to 141 lower level codes which can be used by other users of the System Cannot assign anybody a level of O or 1 May change his own code Can add delete or change Manager or Operator Codes E ach user s code can be individually eliminated or changed at any time Open Close reporting of added users a
82. disarm the system if the control powers up armed 24 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 4 29 QUICK ARM partition specific m 90 Enter 1to enable arming of the burglary system in AWAY STAY INSTANT or MAXIMUM modes by using the key instead of the user code When armed the system reports closing as User 0 if Open Close reporting for User 2 typically a Master level user was enabled for a given partition Enter O if Quick Arm is not desired The user code must always be used to disarm the system Note that if Quick Arm is used the Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes cannot disarm the system MAIN DIALER TOUCHTONE OR ROTARY DIAL 0 Enter 1 if TouchTone service is being used Enter O if rotary phone service is used If selecting TouchTone make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for TouchTone service Note that whether or not TouchTone dialing for call placement is permitted communication by the use of DTMF signaling ADEMCO High Speed will still take place See field 1 33 for TouchTone w Rotary backup 91 32 33 34 PABX ACCESS CODE This field is used to enter up to four 2 digit numbers 00 09 B F 11 15 If not required enter nothing and proceed to next address otherwise enter prefix needed to obtain an outside telco line PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT partition specific LI LI Enter 00 09 B F 11 15 15 15 Enter a 3 or 4 dig
83. displayed again Enter the next time window number to be programmed and repeat the procedure Quit Enter 0 at the Quit prompt to return to the main menu 12 YES 0 NO 0 choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu M ode Since the time windows are shared among all partitions it is important to make sure that changing a time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions 26 8 Section 26 Scheduling Options Daily Open Close Schedules Open Close Schedule Worksheet Write in the previously defined time window numbers for open amp close for each partition Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun Hol Op CI Op CI Op CI Op CI Op CI Op CI Op CI Op CI L5 ol zc Ln pn py oo N FISSA 3 op ocn pog 6 s 3 8 AI Open Close Schedule Programming E ach partition can be assigned one daily open close schedule plus a holiday open close schedule Temporary schedules are programmed separately using the 81 Temporary ScheduleMenu Mode To program additional open close schedules see Time Driven Events Programming After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press 0 until the 0 C Schedules prompt appears O C Schedules Enter 1to program opening and closing schedules 1Yes 0 No 0 Partition Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following 01 08 00 Quit 01 open dose schedules will apply Enter 00 at the Partition prompt to quit open close schedules programming a
84. door that has been programmed as an entry exit delay door after arming the system without setting off the alarm Enter the exit delay time 01 15 multiplied by 15 seconds or 00 for no delay up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds for zones assigned to Zone T ype 01 ENTRY DELAY 2 partition specific 06 Entry Delay 2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those assigned to Entry Delay 1 This delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL commercial burglary installations EXIT DELAY 2 partition specific 08 Exit Delay Z2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those assigned to Exit Delay 1 This delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL commercial burglary installations 24 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 2 13 15 16 17 19 20 22 BELL 1 TIMEOUT partition specific 04 Defines the length of time Bell Output 1 and the keypad s sounder will sound for all audible alarms multiply entry 01 15 by 2 minutes for actual duration Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for UL commercial burglary installations and 6 minutes for UL commercial fire installations KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT 0 Enter the partition number 1 8 in which the keyswitch is being used Enter 9 if keyswitch is to be used to silence fire bells in the event of a fire alarm Otherwise enter 0 Requires the use of zone 7 wired loop zone 7 is no longer available as protection zone w
85. ey sequence the following prompt appears Otherwise the Speed K ey sequence automatically begins ENTER USER CODE AKAAAK Enter your user code The programmed Speed K ey sequence will begin automatically Section 31 Keypad Functions Toactivate a Speed K ey not assigned to the A B C keys press and hold down the D key for 2 seconds until the following prompt appears ENTER SPEED KEY 01 32 00 QUIT Enter the desired Speed K ey number If a user code is required for any part of the Speed Key sequence the following prompt appears Otherwise the Speed K ey sequence automatically begins ENTER USER CODE AKAAAK Enter your user code The programmed Speed K ey sequence will begin automatically The system will apply the user code s Global Arming capabilities if the macro executes any arming or disarming commands Manual Relay Activation Mode 70 Mode The system allows users to manually activate relays by keypad command using either the keypad or a telephone keypad if VIP Module is used The user will be prompted either by keypad alpha display or telephone voice module To activate relays from a keypad enter 4 digit Security Code 70 To activate relays using a telephone and VIP Module first dial the 2 digit phone access code When the system acknowledges the access enter 4 digit Security Code 70 The following prompts voi ce responses will begin ENTER DEVICE NO Voice ENTER DEVIC
86. faults must be corrected or bypassed code BYPASS will attempt to bypass the faults in all of the selected partitions This Summary Mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed e f when disarming the system using a Global Disarm any of the selected partitions has a condition which would cause the keypad to beep such as alarm memory or a trouble condition the system enter a Summary Mode in which the alarm memory or trouble conditions of all of the selected partitions will be displayed This mode will continue until either approximately 120 seconds elapses or a second disarm occurs which clears the beeping Access Control The system has the capability to utilize access control by one of 3 methods l Onerelay may be used for access control in each partition The relay is programmed in data field 1 76 To activate this relay the user enters his User Code 0 The relay will pulse for 2 seconds 2 For a more powerful method of access control program input devices keypads RF buttons hardwired and output devices relays as access points see the Access Control section Up to 32 access point devices relays among 8 partitions can be controlled For example if a keypad is programmed as an access input device then entering User Code 73 or User Code 74 will activate the appropriate access point relays see also Zone Programming and Relay Programming in the 93 Menu M ode section 3 Ifa Vis
87. following e Cut the white jumpers W1 for Bell 1 and or W4 for Bell 2 on the main PCB Program zones 970 Bell 1 and 971 Bell 2 for a response type of 00 to disable supervision see Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section e Donot install the EOL resistor s across the unsupervised output s Wiring Bell Outputs By default Bell 1 is set to operate as an unsupervised burglary bell output You may use any UL Listed nonpolarized burglary indicating device rated for 10 14 VDC operation on this output Note that a local burglary Grade A listing requires that a bell in a tamper protected housing be used such as ADE MCO AB 12 and that bell wiring be run in conduit By default Bell 2 is set to operate as a supervised fire bell output Note that the panel supervises this wiring for open short and earth ground faults You may use any UL Listed polarized fire indicating device rated for 10 14 VDC operation on this output Observe polarity when wiring polarized devices Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices Compatible devices are listed below The wiring connections follows this chart Model Description beige PA400R red at 90 dB 910 feet Wheelock LS1 12 VFR Wheelock MS1 12 VFR Strobe Wheelock MT 12 MS VFR Horn Strobe Gentex GXS 2 1575 Strobe Gentex SHG 12 15 Horn Strobe Gentex SHG 12 1575 Horn Strobe Faraday 5336L U 14 12 DC Horn Strobe Faraday 5337L U 14 12 DC Horn Strobe 15 2
88. is not desired Note This field must be set to L if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be sent ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM DISARM WINDOWS partition specific of Enter lif disarming of the system should be allowed only during the arming disarming windows or if the system is in alarm if 2 11 is set to 1 Note that this applies only to operator level users Installer Master and Manager level users can disarm the system at any time Enter O if disarming can occur at any time O disable for displayed partition 1 enable for displayed partition ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM OCCURS oj U sed only if field 2 10 partition specific field is set to 1 Enter 1to allow the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm opening window if an alarm has occurred Enter Oto allow disarming only during the disarm window regardless of system status If field 2 10 is set to 0 for a partition this field 2 11 has no effect for that partition ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION partition specific o Enter Lif this partition is to be accessed from another partition s keypad using the GOTO command Otherwise enter O USE PARTITION DESCRIPTOR 0 Enter Lif partition descriptors will be programmed If enabled the normal keypad display will include a partition number and four digit descriptor Enter Oto cause the keypads to display a nonpartitioned system type of display no partition number will appear ENABLE J2 TR
89. ll NOTE The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday schedule Limitation of Access Schedules Programming To program access schedules do the following Enter Scheduling Menu Mode Installer Code 80 After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press O until the Access Sched prompt appears Access Sched Enter 1to program access schedules 1Yes 0 No 0 ACCESS SCHED 4t Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and O8 01 08 00 Quit 01 Press to accept entry Enter 00 at the Access Sched 7 prompt to quit the access control menus and display the Quit prompt displayed MON A1 Window 1 Enter the first time window number 01 20 for this access 00 00 00 00 00 schedule for the displayed day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be Press to continue MON A1 Window 2 Enter the second time window number from 01 20 for this 00 00 00 00 00 access schedule for the displayed day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press to continue TUE A1 Window 1 Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week When the 00 00 00 00 00 last day of the week has been programmed the windows for holidays may be entered 26 16 Section 26 Scheduling Options Hol A1 Window 1 Enter the first time window number for holidays for this access 00 00 00 00 00 schedul
90. o o o Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat 51 Dual Reporting standard standard COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO HIGH SPEED FORMAT 94 82 ADEMCO High Speed L ow Speed Format Prim o ADEMCO High Speed ADEMCO High Speed o ADEMCO High Speed io o Primary Primary Format Secondary F ormat L ow Speed Format Sec Checksum Verification No checksum Sescoa Radionics Selection Radionics Secondary 0 no 52 Standard E xpanded Reporting For Primary lo o o o o o Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat 53 Standard E xpanded Reporting For Secondary lo o o o o o Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat 51 Dual Reporting standard standard COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO s CONTACT ID FORMAT 94 83 ADEM CO Contact ID Low Speed Format Prim o ADEMCO Contact ID ADEM CO Contact ID o ADEMCO Contact ID o 0 Primary Primary Format Secondary F ormat L ow Speed Format Sec Checksum Verification No checksum Secondary Sescoa Radionics Selection o Radionics 0 no 52 Standard E xpanded Reporting For Primary lo o o o o o Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opr Cls Low Bat 53 Standard E xpanded Reporting For Secondary lo o o o o o Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat 51 Dual Reporting standard standard 27 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES ZONE
91. on the programmed holidays throughout the year Holiday Schedule Worksheet The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system Each holiday can be assigned to any combination of partitions List the desired holidays in a Month Day format on the worksheet Check the partitions for which these holidays apply Holiday Schedule Programming After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press O until the Holidays prompt appears Holidays Enter 1to program holiday schedules 1Yes 0 No 0 HOLIDAY NUMBER Enter the 2 digit holiday number 01 16 to be programmed 01 16 00 Quit 01 and press to accept entry Enter 00 at the Holiday Number prompt to quit the holiday menus and display the Quit prompt 01 ENTER DATE The cursor will be positioned on the tens of months digit Enter 00 00 the appropriate month then press to proceed to the day field Enter the appropriate day for the holiday Press to accept the entry Part 12345678 Holidays can be set for any partition as follows Press Oto Hit 0 8 x x turn all partitions on or off or use Keys 1 8 to toggle the letter X under the partition to which this holiday will apply Press the key when all desired partitions have been assigned The Holiday Number prompt will be displayed again Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be programmed Quit Enter O at the Quit prompt to return to the main menu 12 YES 0 NO 0 choices and con
92. press to display other alarms ZN TYPE 18 DELAY USE 1 Enter 0 if there is to be no delay for zone type 18 Enter 1 to use delay set in field 3 16 for zone type 18 Note For UL Listed installations combined initiating device s delay and this field s delay cannot exceed 90 seconds SUPERVISORY ON OPEN amp SHORT oj Enter O if you want a supervisory response on a shorted zone and a trouble response on an open zone Enter 1if you want a supervisory response on either a shorted or an open zone WATERFLOW ALARM SILENCE OPTION 0 Enter O if you want waterflow supervisory zones to be silenced by entering the Code OFF Enter Lif you want waterflow supervisory zones to silence automatically when waterflow ceases This feature may only be set to 1 by permission of the local authority ALARM SOUNDS BELL 1 2 1 0 Bell 1 Bell 2 Enter 0 for pulsing 1 for steady output on Bell Outputs 1 and 2 If pulsing is selected field 08 applies ZONE TYPES 17 amp 18 DELAY 00 Enter 01 15 times 2 seconds if delay is desired for waterflow and fire supervisory zones This may help prevent alarms due to minor fluctuations in waterflow Otherwise enter OO 24 17 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions UL 24 18 3 17 3 18 Fora Fora 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 30 3 31 3 50 3 55 ZONE 6 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE 0 Enter 1to enable Zone 6 as a tamper zone Bell Tamper EXTENDED DEL
93. relay number in field 1 76 partition specific See Relay Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section for a detailed explanation Access Control Dialer Events All PassPoint ACS events can be sent to the VISTA 128F B s dialer via the VGM These events will also belogged into the control s event log This is enabled in the PassPoint ACS Seethe PassPoint ACS documentati on for a deailed explanation Vista Gateway Module Wiring and Programming Wiring the Vista Gateway Module The Vista Gateway Module is connected between the ECP bus VISTA 128F B keypad terminals and the network bus of the PassPoint Access Control System SeeFigure 14 1 for the proper wiring connections 4949999994944 4 44 ECHELON PROM C NETWORK JJJJJJ a Sa Ba M a a M MA i Vla Vo Ml A A la EM TRANSFORMER TO CONTROL S YELLOW TERMINALS Figure 14 1 Wiring the Vista Gateway Module Programming the Vista Gateway Module Seethe PassPoint ACS instructions to program the Vista Gateway Module SECTION 15 External Sounders In This Section General Information Bell Circuit Supervision Wiring Bal Outputs Compatible Alarm l ndicati ng Devi ces Programming the Bell Outputs General Information TheVISTA 128FB provides two bell circuit outputs for operating fire and burglary alarm notification appliances Each bell output is rated
94. section for a full explanation of these zones and specific zone assignments Maintenance Signal Support The control monitors maintenance signals from certain smoke detectors 5808 4192CPM 4192SDM 4192SDTM Maintenance signals are triggered when a smoke detector gets dirty and indicate that the detector should be cleaned or replaced If a detector maintains a high or low sensitivity condition for longer than 24 hours the control sends a Dialer report Trouble message for non Contact ID reports E vent Code 385 or 386 for Contact ID reports makes an event log entry and displays HSENS xxx or LSENS xxx at the keypads xxx zone number NOTE 5808 Wireless Smoke Detectors report high sensitivity regardless of whether the condition is actually high sensitivity or low sensitivity 8 Partitions Provides the ability to control 8 separate areas independently each functioning as if it had its own separate control Partitioning features Include e A Common Lobby partition 1 8 which can be programmed to arm automatically when the last partition that shares the common lobby is armed and to disarm when the first partition that shares the common lobby is disarmed Section 1 General Descri pti on e A Master partition 9 used strictly to assign keypads for the purpose of viewing the status of all 8 partitions at the same time master keypads e All zones except fire assignable to one of 8 partitions e Firezones must be assign
95. switch programmable 4192SDTM provides maintenance signals One piece products of combustion ionization detector with built in RPM DIP switch programmable 4192CPM provides maintenance signals Compact surface mount magnetic reed contact with built in RPM Serial Number I D programmed by control panel Recessed 1 2 dia magnetic reed contact with built in RPM Serial Number I D programmed by control panel 24 inch armored cable Serial Number I D programmed by control panel VISTA 128FB Installation I nstructions Compatible Polling Loop Devices cont d 7500 Single Technology e Glassbreak detector with built in RPM Glassbreak Detector Dip switch programmable Dual Technology Dual technology glassbreak detector with Glassbreak Detector built in RPM DIP switch programmable U L Models 7500 and 9500 Glassbreak Detectors are not UL Listed SECTION 8 Wireless Zone Expansion In This Section Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones Wireless Systems Available RF System Operation and Supervision RF System Installation Advisories Installation and Setup of the 4281 5881 RF Receiver Installing the 5800TM Module HouselD Sniffer Mode 5700 Series Transmitter Setup 5800 Series Transmitter Setup Checkout Procedure for Wire ess Zones Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones Supervised by control panel for check in signals except certain non supervised transm
96. system whether commercial or residential is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a variety of reasons For example ntruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or disconnect an alarm warning device ntrusion detectors e g passive infrared detectors smoke detectors and many other sensing devices will not work without power Battery operated devices will not work without batteries with dead batteries or if the batteries are not put in properly Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason however briefly e Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver Even if the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path e A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough e While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States they may not acti vate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35 of all fires according to data published by the Federal Emergency Management Agency Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may not work are as follows Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned Smoke detectors may not sense fires
97. system for programming if using keypad programming and must remain connected to the system in order to allow the primary user to program additional user codes into the system at a later time Keypad Panic Keys Accommodates three keypad panic keys 1 A B and 3 C e Designated as zones 995 1 X 996 3 3 and 999 e Activated by wired and wireless keypads e Activated and reported separately by partition distinguished by subscriber account number or partition number if Contact I D reporting is used VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Keypad Macros Accommodates 32 keypad macro commands per system each macro is a series of keypad commands For example by pressing either the A B C or D key the system can be programmed to log onto another partition bypass zones 2 and 3 and arm that partition in the AWAY mode explained in detail later in this manual Characteristics of keypad macros are Assignable to the A B and C keys by partition Other macros not assigned to these keys executed by using the D key E ach macro can be 32 characters keystrokes in length Bell Outputs Provides two style Y supervised bell outputs on the control panel itself A 4204CF Relay Module can supply two additional style Y supervised bell outputs Auxiliary Relay Provides a built in Form C relay which can be used for one of the following Alarm activation Trouble supervisory activation 4 wire smoke detector r
98. system s real time clock must be set Refer to the Setting the Real Time Clock section f you have selected the printer to be on line field 1 72 events will print automatically as they occur Todisplay or print on demand the following commands apply commande Display Mode Installer or Master Code 6 0 Print Mode Installer or Master Code 6 1 Clear Event L og Installer or Master Code 6 2 To EXIT Event Log Press at any time Display Printing After entering either the Display or Print Mode the following will be displayed ENTER 0 RECENT The Event Log holds up to 224 events and can display or print all events in a category complete or only those events in a category occurring since the last Clear Event L og command recent Note that once the event log is full the oldest event will be erased upon the logging of any new event Press the desired Display Mode key O or 1 18 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 18 4 SCAN LOG BY PART The system allows viewing of any partition s event log Enter 0 NO 1 8 PART the partition number for the partition whose events are to be displayed Entering O NO will display all events that occurred in the system regardless of partition Events are displayed in chronological order from most recent to oldest For display and printing purposes events are stored on a partition by partition basis except system events
99. that the code be kept secret Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system unless armed by that user ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of reporting Users 001 150 uniquely If any other report format is used only user numbers 001 015 can uniquely report to the central station Users 016 150 will report as User 015 Multiple Partition Access Examples E ach user is programmed for a primary home partition A user can also be given access to operate one or more additional partitions Within each partition each user may be programmed to have different levels of authority For example User 8 the VP of Engineering could be assigned to work within the Engineering Department Partition 1 of ABC Manufacturing Since he needs the full capabilities in his area heis assigned as a MASTER with Level 1 authority This means he may arm disarm bypass add or modify users in Partition 1 He must also be able to gain access to the manufacturing area Partition 2 on an emergency basis Y ou can set this up easily with the partitioned system by requesting that he also be assigned to Partition 2 with a level of authority set lower such as Level 4 OPERATOR L evel B which allows him to arm and disarm but nothing else The control will automatically assign him the same user number within Partition 2 and does not require reprogramming of his already existing 4 digit security code EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS ues ues tee
100. the Sequential Mode and return to Data Field Programming M ode 25 11 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions When you have finished programming all zones test each using the system s Test Mode Do not use the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode for this as it will only check for transmission of one zone on a particular transmitter NOT the zones assigned to each additional loop and will NOT verify polling loop type Report Code Programming 25 12 All report codes are entered using 93 Menu Mode Programming either through Report Code Programming or through the Zone Programming while entering other zone information In the VISTA 128FB reports are divided into six categories These categories represent the main menu options found in the Report Code Programming Reports and the categories in which they are found are as follows ALARM CODES RESTR SUPV CODES SYSTEM GROUP 1 for groups of 16 zones Zone Alarm Reports Alarm Restore Closing arm away Trouble Opening disarm Trouble Restore System Low Battery Bypass Low Battery Restore Bypass Restore AC Loss AC Restore Periodic Test Power Cancel Program T amper SYSTEM GROUP 2 SYSTEM GROUP 73 SYSTEM GROUP 74 Arm STAY Early Open Fire Walk Test Start Time Set Log Reset Early Close Fire Walk Test End Log 50 90 F ull Late Open Off Normal E vent Log Overflow Late Close Exit Error by Zone Failed to Open Exit Error by User Failed to Close Recent Close Auto Arm F aile
101. the next custom word number to be substituted or enter 00 to quit RF Serial Number Clear Mode 25 32 This mode may be used in the event that an undesired transmitter has been enrolled during sequential enrolling causing each subsequent serial number to be assigned to an incorrect zone Performing this operation will delete all RF serial numbers leaving all other zone information intact You may then return to Sequential Modeto re enroll wireless transmitters The RF Serial Number Clear Mode will not delete polling loop serial numbers To clear all RF wireless serial numbers do the following l Enter Data Field Programming M ode Installer Code 8000 2 From Data Field Programming Mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 3 Press O NO repeatedly until the CLEAR RF SERIAL 2 prompt appears CLEAR RF SERIAL Enter 1to clear all RF wireless serial numbers The ARE 12YES 0 NO 0 YOU SURE prompt is displayed as follows ARE YOU SURE Enter 1to clear all RF serial numbers Re enter the Sequential 1 2 YES 0 NO 0 Mode to enroll wireless transmitters SECTION 26 Scheduling Options In This Section Introduction to Scheduling TimeWindow Definitions Open Close Definitions Scheduling Menu Mode Scheduling Menu Structure Time Windows Daily Open Close Schedules Holiday Schedules Time Driven Events Limitation of Access Schedules Temporary Schedules User Schedule Menu M
102. the serial number is A123 4567 Once A123 4567 3 enrolled the upper left hand button of the program tool can be pressed to ready the system for enrolling a device into the system The serial number for the program tool will only remain in the system until the Programming Mode is exited Entering 97 will not delete the tool Press to continue or press the key to back the system up to the PROGRAM TOOL prompt TECHNOLOGY TYPE Enter the type of device s to be enrolled as follows WIRELESS 0 0 Wireless Default Default T 1 Polling Loop 2 Both Press to continue ENTER ZN NO Enter the first zone number to be enrolled e g zone 010 000 QUIT 010 Press to continue Zone Number Entered T The system will starting with this zone number search for the first device which has all of the following attributes pre programmed in Zone Programmi ng a An input type of RF UR BR or SL if serial polling loop devices enabled programmed b Aloop number programmed c Noserial number programmed If the first zone number entered does not have all of the above attributes the system will search its database for the first zone that does and will display it on the next screen 010 INPUT S N This prompt is displayed when the system has found the next oo zone which needs to be enrolled The system will respond to the first serial number transmitted A serial number may be enrolled by one of two methods a E
103. to START the device therefore a RESTORE ZONE LIST would normally only be used when a ZONE LIST is used to start the device ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION ZT Instead of using a RESTORE ZONE LIST a specific zone response type or system operation action can be selected to de activate the device If a specific ZONE TYPE is chosen any zone of that response type that restores from a previous alarm trouble or fault condition will cause the device to de acti vate If a SYSTEM OPERATION is chosen that operation will cause the device to de activate The different choices for ZONE TYPE and SYSTEM OPERATION arelisted in Programming Relays later in this section and in the Programming F orm PARTITION No P The device s Stop Zone T ype System Operation may be limited to an occurrence on one partition 1 8 or on any partition 0 The ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION option functions independently of the EVENT ZONE LIST combination Section 25 93 Menu Mode Programming Relay Output Devices Programming From Data Field Programming M ode press 493 to display the ZONE PROG prompt Press 0 NO to each menu option until the RELAY PROG prompt appears Press 1 M YES While in this mode press to advance to next screen Press to backup to the previous screen ENTER RELAY NO 00 QUIT 01 02 A EV ZL ZT P STTO 0 0 00 02 A ZL ZT P STP 0 0 00 02 RELAY ACTION NO RESPONSE 02 START EVEN
104. to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable Must be 00 00 for UL burglary Installations 1 28 CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO 00 001 Enter the second pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period of each other to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable Must be 00 00 for UL burglary Installations 1 24 CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE 100 001 1 25 Enter the third pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period of each other to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable Must be 00 00 for UL burglary Installations CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR 00 001 Enter the fourth pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period of each other to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable Must be 00 00 for UL burglary Installations 1 26 PANIC BUTTON OR SPEEDKEY 00 00 00 00 Bi 1 A B C D For each lettered key A C enter 00 to assign that key s respective panic function or enter a speedkey macro number 01 32 to assign a particular macro to that key For the D key enter 00 to use the D key to select a macro to execute when key is pressed or enter a macro number 01 32 to execute a particular macro with the D key nstead of the 32 macros the A B and C keys can be programmed for any of 3 other functions Choice 33 fire sounder silence The key when pressed will silence fire alarms Choice 34 display next fire alarm The key when pressed will displ
105. try reversing the wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the 4285 4286 If the phone plug is disconnected from the control the premise s phones will not operate 10 3 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons 10 4 SECTION 11 Audio Alarm Verification AAV Unit In This Section General Information AAV Module Operation Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options U L The Audio Alarm Verification AAV feature is not UL Listed General Information An Audio Alarm Verification AAV Module also known as two way voice such as the Eagle 1241 is an add on accessory that permits voice dialog between an operator at a central station and a person at the alarm installation for the purpose of alarm verification This feature is supported only if Alarm reports are programmed to be sent to the primary phone number Make connections from Eagle 1241 Module terminals 7 and 8 to the control s zone 5 terminals 22 and 23 The purpose of this connection is to silence and restore the sounders at the premises It is also used to postpone noncritical dialer reports while the AAV session is in progress Note that zone 5 is then no longer available as a protection zone When using the AAV zone 5 must be assigned a zone response type e g response type 10 and option 1 60 must be enabled to silence sounders on the premises AAV Module Operation After all messages have been
106. used if preferred Y ou can bring wires out from the side or back a round breakout is also available on the back When you complete the module s mounting and wiring you should install the module s cover with label affixed as indicated next 3 Affix the 4285 4286 connections label supplied separately to the inside of the VIP M odule s cover if the cover is used Otherwise affix the label to the inside of the control cabinet s door Wiring the VIP Module The 4285 4286 is wired between the control panel and the premises handset s see Figure 10 1 It listens for touch tones on the phone line and reports them to the control panel During on premises phone access it powers the premises phones during off premises phone access it seizes the line from the premises phones and any answering machines 1 Make 12V and and data in and data out connections from the VI P Module to the control using the connector cable supplied with the VIP Module These are the same connections as for remote keypads 2 Insert the keyed connector at the other end into the mating header on the VI P Module Connect terminals 1 through 7 on the VIP Module as shown Terminal Block Connections 4285 4286 Terminal 1 Phone In Tip green wire of direct connect cord 2 Phone In Ring red wire of direct connect cord 5 No Connection Supported by the 4286 only Use an RJ 31X J ack with the phone cable supplied with the control Use an addi
107. you confirm the programming of every device before proceeding to the next zone 010 CONFIRMED SL 1 When the system sees activity on the appropriate input it will beep three times and display the confirmation message Press or the upper left hand button of the program tool when you are ready to enroll the next serial number device At any time during this step you may press on the keypad or the upper left hand button of the program tool if you are satisfied with the serial and loop number combination that has been enrolled regardless of whether or not the enrolled input has been confirmed This will ready the system to enroll the next serial number device If the incorrect device has been enrolled press on the keypad or the upper right hand button of the program tool to delete the serial number and return to the UEARN S N prompt A single long beep will be heard from the keypad to verify pressing of the upper right hand button Then press 1 Yes or press the upper left hand button of the program tool a single short beep will verify the system is ready for enrolling and re activate the proper device or device loop input The system will search for the next zone that does not have a serial number associated with it If one is found the system will return to the INPUT S N prompt for the remaining zones After all zones have been displayed whether enrolled or not the ENTER ZN NO prompt will appear Enter 000 to exit
108. 00 QUIT 000 zone list Press after each zone number is entered When all zones have been entered enter 000 Press to continue 001 Del Zn LIST Enter Oto save the zone list entered Enter 1to delete that 0 No i Yes zone list 001 Delete Zone Enter 1 to delete one or more zones in that zone list Enter O if O No 1 Yes no changes are necessary If 1is entered the following screen will appear otherwise the Enter Zone LIST prompt will reappear 001 Zn to Delete Enter each zone number to be deleted from the zone list 000 QUIT 000 pressing after each number View Zn LIST This will appear if O0 is pressed at the Enter ZoneLIST 00 QUIT 00 prompt Enter the zone list number that you wish to view Press to continue XXX Assigned Zone Press to scroll through all zones in that list Enter 000 H 000 QUIT 000 to quit Press 99 to exit Program M ode Relay Voice Descriptors 25 30 If using the 4285 4286 VIP Module voice descri ptors can be programmed for each of the 32 relays used in the system These descriptors will be announced by the voice module when accessing the relays via the 70 Relay Access Mode via telephone E ach voice descriptor can consist of up to 3 words selected from the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list later in this section The index numbers from this vocabulary list are to be used for relay voice descriptors only For normal system voice annunciation e g alarms troubles
109. 03 12 02AM on J anuary 1 After the last event in the selected category has been displayed using either the 1 or 3 keys the following will appear for a few seconds END OF EVENT LOG TYPE CCC UUU Section 18 Event Log Options CLEAR EVENT LOG Press 1 if Event Log Clear function is to be performed 0 NO 1 YES Clearing the event log does not erase any events from the system memory All events in the log will still be displayed if the COMPLETE option is selected Only those events occurring from the time of the CLEAR command will be displayed if RECENT display option is selected Press 0 if event log is not to be cleared at this time If 1 is pressed the following will appear ARE YOU SURE Press 1 if it is desired to clear the event log Press 0 if event 0 NO 1 YES log is not to be cleared SCREEN DEFINITIONS RECENT E vents since last CLEAR COMPLETE Displays all events TYPE T ype of event burg fire etc CCC Zone contact number UU 18 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 18 6 SECTION 19 4100APG Pager Interface In This Section General Information Mounting the 4100APG Wiring the 4100APG Programming the Control for the Pager 4100APG LED Indications General Information Whenever an event occurs on the VISTA 128FB a message can be sent toa pager This is accomplished by using the 4100APG Pager Interface The 4100APG will dial and send the information to a pagin
110. 1 9 A F if Open Close reporting is enabled 27 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions The status channel might have one of the following conditions 1 DURESS For Duress Plus Channels 9 15 Only 2 OPENING 3 BYPASS For Channels 1 8 Only 4 CLOSING 5 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE For Channels 1 8 Only 6 SYSTEM STATUS e AC LOSS in Channel 1 LOW BATTERY in Channel 2 e TIME SET in Channel 3 e LOG CLEAR in Channel 3 e LOG 50 FULL in Channel 3 e LOG 90 FULL in Channel 3 LOG OVERFLOW in Channel 3 e POWER ON RESET in Channel 4 WALK TEST START END in Channel 8 7 NORMAL ALARM STATUS Channels 1 8 Only 9 TEST REPORT Explanation of Channels 9 15 If thereis a 1 in the status channel and lin the 1st location Duress lin Channels 9 15 Zone alarm on those channels 3 in Channels 9 15 Restore on those channels 6 in Channels 9 15 Previously reported alarm not restored A typical high speed report may look like this 1234 5115 5555 7 Acct 1234 with alarms on channels 2 and 3 1234 5555 1555 1 Acct 1234 with alarm on channel 12 LIMITATIONS 1 When using ADEMCO High Speed remember there are only 15 channels available plus a duress channel If more than 15 zones are being used they will have to share channels 2 With ADEMCO High Speed reporting channels 9 15 cannot report troubles or bypasses Use these channels for zones that will not report these conditions 3 Only user numbers 1 15 can be uniquely re
111. 1 YES to complete the delete sequence This process deletes the serial number only not the loop number The assumption is that the proper loop number was programmed but the wrong serial number was enrolled LOOP 1 5802 5802CP ENROLL AS BR 5801 ENROLL AS UR OR RF YOU MUST 5802MN ENROLL AS UR OR RF 5804 ENROLL AS BR LOOP2 5806 5807 5808 5806 SHOWN SET ENROLL AS RF 5804BD ENROLL AS BR LOOP 1 LOOP 1 TERMINALS TERMINALS 5816 5816MN ENROLL AS RF EM ENROLLAS RF LOOP 5818 ENROLL AS RF 5817 5827 SET HOUSE CODE pe pl LOOP 1 A TERMINALS 5827BD BS SET HOUSE CODE SISISTSI E 5819 LO P3 ENROLL AS RF TERMINALS a LOOP LOOP MOTION MOTION 5849 5890 ENROLL AS RF ENROLL AS RF Figure25 1 RF Transmitter Loop Designations 25 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 25 8 010 LEARN S N If the device s serial number has not been previously enrolled 1 YES 0 NO 1 you may enter the enrollment mode now by either entering 1 Y ES or by pressing the upper left hand button of the program tool If using the program tool move to the physical location of the device to be enrolled before pressing the button A single short beep will verify that the button has been pressed The system will respond tothe first serial number transmitted after the 1 key on the keypad or the button of the program tool i
112. 10 feet from each other as well as from the control panel and remote keypads B Each receiver must be set to a different device address The receiver set to the lower address is considered the 1 RF receiver for supervisory purposes C TheHouselDs must be the same D Usingtworeceivers does not increase the number of transmitters the system can support 63 zones using 4281H 128 zones using the 5881H plus a wireless keypad Installation and Setup of the 4281 5881 RF Receivers 1 Mountthereceiver Receivers must be mounted externally to the control and can detect signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 200 feet Takethis into consideration when determining mounting location 2 Connect the receiver s wire harness to the Keypad 1 terminals 11 12 13 14 Plug the connector at the other end of the harness into the receiver 3 Refer to the Installation Instructions provided with the receiver for further installation procedures regarding antenna mounting etc L ANTENNAS INSERT IN RIGHT HAND TERMINALS KEYPAD CONNECTION POINTS EACH RECEIVER MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL YELLOW TO CONTROL S REMOTE HOME RUN CIRCUIT WIRING BOARD T hs OPENING e INTERFERENCE DIP SWITCH KNOCKOUT INDICATOR AREA FOR LED _ _ gt 6 SURFACE WIRING ON gt OFF EN RIC 4 NOTE DIPSWITCH POSITION 5 PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH SWITCH POSITION ON SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCI
113. 1FAULT e ON ifthe main dialer lineis faulted Correct problem and then enter User Code OFF toturn off OFF if normal DIALER 2 FAULT e ON ifthe backup dialer lineis faulted Correct problem and then enter User Code OFF toturn off e OFF if normal If used program field 3 20 must be set to 2 and the 5140LED Module must be connected 10 2 OUT 1 3 4 5 as shown in the diagram below It is designed to be mounted into a standard single gang electrical box and installed as follows 1 Pull wires from the panel s J 2 connector through an opening in the single gang box and splice these wires to the module s flying leads Solderless splices may be used Mount the module s PC board onto one side of the PC board retainer bracket supplied Slide the PC board retainer bracket into the box and fasten with screws supplied Mount the stainless steel decorative cover supplied onto the box J2 CONNECTOR lt 4142TR CABLE WIRES COLORS 5140LED MODULE AC POWER BROWN Q AC POWER DIALER 2 FAULT GREEN G nt COMM FAILURE ORANGE Q DIALER 1 FAULT Q DIALER 2 FAULT Q FUTURE USE TO AUX PWR 1 OUTPUT TO TERM 5140LED MODULE WIRES COLORS Figure 12 4 5140LED Indicator Module 12 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment 12 6 The 2 connector can be used to provide triggers for the following conditions Firealarm Burglary audible panic alarm
114. 2 Manager arm disarm bypass add or modify lower level users 3 Operator Level A arm disarm bypass 4 Operator L evel B arm disarm 5 Operator Level C arm disarm only if system armed with this code 6 Duress arm disarm trigger silent panic alarm K eypad will then prompt for Open Close reporting option for this user Press O NO or 1 YES depending on whether or not arming disarming by this user will trigger Opening and Closing reports This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used to add a user f access schedules have been programmed this prompt appears Enter the user s access group number 1 8 if this user should have limited access to the system Enter O if no access group should be assigned If a 5800 Series button transmitter has been enabled for arming disarming functions and is not assigned to a user this prompt will appear Press 0 NO or 1 YES f yes was given as the answer to the RF button question the zone number for the button will be requested Enter any one of the zone numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY STAY or DISARM The system will then assign all buttons of the transmitter to this user number Press O NO if the user is to have access to this partition only Press 1 YES if the user is to have access to more than one partition If NO the program exits this mode If YES the keypad prompts for the Global Arm option for this user 30 5
115. 3 Transmitter Universal Transmitter DIP switch selectable for fast response and open or closed sensor usage 5715WH Has a tamper protected cover 5716 Door Window 5716WM Transmitter Can be used with any open or closed circuit sensor Features a built in reed switch 5716WM includes magnet For use in unoccupied areas to detect the sound of shattering glass when a window is broken Detects the sound and shock Requires the presence of both to initiate an alarm condition transmission 5775 PIR Detector 32 47 Dual element passive infrared detector with built in selectable pulse count 5742 Audio Discriminator 5 43 Dual Technology Glassbreak Note There is a 3 minute lockout between fault transmissions to conserve battery life Wireless K eypad HouselD Can be used to turn the burglary protection on and off Features the same built in panic functions as wired keypads I dentified as zone 000 on wired keypads when it transmits with a low battery 5727 8 7 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters Model Product Zone Num Description 5827BD Wireless Keypad House D Requires use of 5800TM Module Assigned to a partition in 1 48 Operates the system similarly to wired keypads Can indicate system status via its 3 LEDs and sounder Includes 3 panic keys HouselD must be set U The 5711 5715 and 5716 do not supervise their l
116. 4 Output Relay Modules 4285 4286 VI P Module and VGM Device address Devicetype Keypad options includes partition assignment e RF HouselD RELAY PROG For defining output relay functions 0 No 1 Yes RLY VOICE DESCR For entering voice descriptors for relays to be used with the 0 No 1 Yes 4285 4286 VIP Module 25 2 Section 25 493 Menu Mode Programming CUSTOM INDEX For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module O No 1 Yes annunciation CLEAR RF SERIAL For deleting all RF serial numbers presently enrolled in the 1 Yes 0 No system Press O NO or 1 YES in response to the displayed menu selection Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence Refer to the Zone Programming part of this section for instructions on how to program zone characteristics the Devi ce Programming part if this section for instructions on how to program addressable devices and the Al pha Programming part of this section for programming alpha descriptors Thefollowing is a list of commands used while in the Menu M ode 93 Menu Mode Key Commands 0 00 Escapes from M enu Mode back into Data Field Programming M ode if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option Enter Programming Mode Installer Code 8000 The following fields should be programmed before beginning 2 00 Number of Partitions e 1 32 RF Receiver Type Also before programming wireless zones the RF receiver must be enabled in Device
117. 4204 Relay Outputs enter the specific relay number on that module 1 4 For 4204CF outputs enter only module relay number 1 Output A or relay number 3 Output B These arethe only two programmable relays on the 4204CF Module Press to continue The keypad will display the Start and Stop summary screens again Press to continue When all relays have been programmed enter 00 at the ENTER RELAY NO prompt If defining a zone list continue to the next section If not enter 00 at the next two prompts You will then be asked Quit Menu Mode Enter 1 for Yes 0 for No Then enter 99 to exit programming completely If supervision of the 4204CF Relay Output is desired enter a response type for that output s corresponding supervisory zone This is equal to 600 Relay ID No For example if you are programming Relay ID No 1 therelay s supervisory zone would be 601 Program this zone for response type 19 24 Hr Trouble in Zone Programming 25 29 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Zone List Programming After all relays have been programmed upon entering 00 at the ENTER RELAY NO prompt you will be asked to enter a zone list If a zone list number was used to start or stop a relay you must define the zones belonging to that list as follows Enter Zone LIST Enter the zone list number 01 08 Enter 00 to quit 00 QUIT 00 001 Enter Zn Num Using 3 digit entries enter each zone to be included in this 0
118. 5mA inactive 5140DLM actually draws 55mA when active However since VISTA 128F B PCB current includes built in main dialer current and since main dialer is inactive when 5140DLM is active 5140DLM imposes only 15mA added current on power supply 7 Enter the calculated TOTAL CONTROL PANEL LOAD Total Current combi ned current then add to total PCB 2tenony JI current Combined aux power bell and polling loop total 7 7 0 0 TmiRBamm 1 When not using the PS24 the total control panel standby load must be limited to 1 274 for 24 hour standby time or to 510mA for 60 hour standby time using a 12V 34 3AH battery connected to the control 2 When using the PS24 skip the worksheet shown below and fill out the worksheets found in the PS24 s instructions instead The total control panel standby load must be limited to 919mA for 24 hour standby time or 345mA for 60 hour standby time using two 12V 17 2AH batteries connected to the PS24 Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet For burglary installations requiring 4 hour standby time followed by 15 minute alarm time use a 12AH battery to support all loads up to and including the maximum system load i e 1 3A standby 2 8A alarm total control panel load For fireinstallations requiring 24 hour or 60 hour standby time use the worksheet below to calculate the required battery capacity 8 Usingthetotal Capacity Formula Calc Value calcula
119. 8 and 29 Y ou can wire from device to device or have multiple branches connected directly to the control panel in a star configuration as shown in Figure 7 1 Although each polling loop device is wired in parallel each device has its own unique zone number or group of zones if it is a zone expansion device On some devices this is determined by the setting of DIP switches Other devices have a built in unique serial number which must be enrolled into the control as the zone number desired Set up the polling loop as follows 1 Run wires to each device on the polling loop No individual wire run may exceed the lengths given in the table to follow In addition no more than 64mA may be drawn on any individual wire run When a star configuration is used the total length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed 4000 ft 2000 ft if using unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire Twisted pair is recommended for all normal wire runs Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs 22 gauge 650 feet 20 gauge 950 feet 18 gauge 1500 feet 16 gauge 2400 feet When running polling loop wires they must not be run within 6 of AC power telephone or intercom wiring Since the polling loop is carrying data between the control panel and the devices interference on this loop can cause an interruption of this communication The polling loop can also cause outgoing interference on the intercom or phone lines If this spacing cannot be achieved shielded wi
120. AL FIRE EL 5 PRESENT ON APPLICATIONS SEE THE RECEIVER S INSTRUCTIONS 2 5881EH ONLY OFF USE IN NON COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS EN Figure 8 1 5881 RF Receiver cover removed 8 3 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons 4 Setthereceiver s DIP switches for an address 01 07 which is not being used by another device i e keypads relay modules etc Take note of the address you select for the RF receiver as this address must be enabled in the system s Device Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section Installing the 5800TM Module Installation of this module is necessary only if you are using one or more 5827BD Wireless Bi directional keypads The 5800TM must be located next to the 4281 or 5881 Receiver between one and two feet from the receiver s antennas The 5800TM must not be installed within the control cabinet Mount the unit using its accompanying mounting bracket 5800TM Wiring Connections Connect the 5800TM to the control panel s keypad connection terminals using the supplied connector with flying leads as follows WIRE TERMINAL ON CONTROL RED 12VDC Terminal 11 BLACK Ground Terminal 12 GREEN Data to Control Terminal 13 YELLOW Data from Control Terminal 14 BLUE Not Used Cut the red jumper for Address Setting 28 cut the white jumper for Address 29 cut both jumpers for Address 30 This address must be enabled in the control s Device Program
121. AY FOR TYPES 17 amp 18 0 This option allows the delay programmed in field 3 16 for Waterflow amp fire Supervisory zones to be extended by 4 times Enter 1to multiply delay by 4 Enter 0 to use delay programmed in field 3 16 Waterflow alarm total maximum allowable time delay device and panel is 90 seconds supervisory signal total maximum allowable time delay device and panel is 200 seconds AUXILIARY INPUT ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE 0 n Enter 1to enable pins 5 amp 9 as printer RXD amp DTR Enter Oif pins are to function as selected in 3 20 TRIGGER OUTPUTS FUNCTION SELECTION 0 Enter 0 for Long Range Radio outputs and Remote Keypad Sounder Enter 1 for limited LORRA outputs amp Keyswitch LEDs Enter 2for LORRA Fire output only and 5140LED connection MAX st OF DIALER ATTEMPTS 8 NN Enter the maximum number of attempts to each telephone number 1 8 Must be 3 4 or 5 for NFPA72 compliant systems if a secondary number is programmed DIALER SELECTION 1 0 Main Backup Enter 1to enable each dialer that exists in the system BACKUP DIALER TOUCHTONE ROTARY 0 Enter the dialing method for the system s backup dialer Enter 1for TouchTone 0 for Rotary ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES FOR ZONE TYPES 16 18 16 17 18 Enter 1for each zone type to send a Restore message to the central station Default is 000 Must be 1for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations RES
122. Access Levels 28 3 Operator Level Codes 30 3 Output Device Control 3 0 C 2 OUtDUEHeldyS os 1 5 25 22 PABX ACCESS CODE 24 eee ee 24 4 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR ALARMS 24 8 Index 4 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR BYPASSES 24 9 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR OPENS CLOSES 24 9 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SYSTEM 24 9 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TEST 24 9 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TROUBLES 24 8 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR ALARMS 24 8 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR BYPASSES 24 8 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR OPENS CLOSES 24 9 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SYSTEM 24 9 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TEST 24 9 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TROUBLES 24 8 PANIC BUTTON OR SPEEDKEY 24 12 ANIC cuc 0 0 31 5 Partition DESCTrIptors ii 25 19 PARTITION No 11 0 01 25 26 2 311559 1 3 14 1 31 3 Perimeter Type 0 000 22 2 Peripheral DeviC8S uiis etuer estet e tione tst doas 1 4 PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY
123. BACKLIGHTING 24 13 Phone Access User s GUIdEe n 10 1 Planning a Partitioned System 2 1 PLI OUEOL 033333353387015 0 01 13 3 POLLING LOOP CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET 20 3 Polling Eoop Expaltslol s iei tese tome iens 1 1 7 1 Polling Loop Supervision eessssseesss 7 5 Polling Loop Wire 2222 7 2 Power Tr GUUS leale 32 6 Power 333 13 3 POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE 24 3 Power Up 900 1 1 1111 1 20 1 PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS 24 5 PRIMARY FORMAT 7 7 tai 24 6 PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER 24 4 PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT s sess 24 4 ei 24 15 Printer Configurations i 18 2 PROGRAM 25 3 Programming Audio Alarm Verification 11 2 Programming Commands 24 3 C 2 Programming for 4100APG cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 19 3 Programming Partition Specific Data Fields 21 4 Programming Scheduling Options 26 6 Programming System Wide Data Fields
124. Bypass 611 612 621 E vent Log Reset 622 624 625 631 632 4 4 z 4 4 4 577 576 602 607 608 623 45 46 47 48 49 50 45 46 47 48 49 50 45 46 47 48 49 50 45 46 47 48 49 50 Section 27 System Communications COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for LOW SPEED FORMAT 94 80 Primary Format o ADEMCO Low Speed Low Speed Format Prim o ADEMCO Low Speed Secondary Format o ADEMCO Low Speed o ADEMCO Low Speed o ol Primary Low Speed Format Sec Checksum Verification No checksum Secondary Sescoa Radionics Selection o Radionics 0 no 52 Standard E xpanded Reporting For Primary lo o o o o o Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opr Cls Low Bat 53 Standard E xpanded Reporting For Secondary lo o o o o o Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat 51 Dual Reporting standard standard COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO EXPRESS FORMAT 94 81 Primary Format ADEMCO Express Low Speed F ormat Prim o ADEMCO Express Secondary Format ADEMCO Express Low Speed Format Sec o ADEMCO Express o 0 Primary Checksum Verification No checksum Secondary Sescoa Radionics Selection o Radionics 0 no 52 Standard E xpanded Reporting For Primary lo o o o o o Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat 53 Standard E xpanded Reporting For Secondary lo o o
125. CO PassPoint system for a fully integrated access control system U L The access control function is not Listed for use with the VISTA 128FB Control Panel in a UL commercial installation Optional 24 Volt Power Supply Compatible with the PS24 Power Supply Module which supplies two 24VF W 1 7A full wave rectified unfiltered outputs The module is used to supply power to e Alarm notification appliances sirens strobes etc e Auxiliary devices which can operate using full wave rectified unfiltered voltage Optional Backup Dialer Supports use of 5140DLM Backup Dialer for connecting to a second supervised telephone line Optional Keyswitch Supports the ADEM CO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system s 8 partitions If used zone 7 is nolonger available as a protection zone Voltage Triggers Provides a trigger connector whose pins change state for different conditions Used with LRR Long Range Radio equipment or other devices such as a remote keypad sounder keyswitch ARMED and READY LEDs or a printer to print the system s event log Event Log K eeps a log of different event types enabled in programming The event log has the following characteristics e Stores up to 224 events e Can be viewed at the keypad or through the use of V LINK or Compass software e Can be printed on a serial printer using a 4100SM Module including zone alpha descriptors e Can store PassPoint events e Printed events can be sent to an alpha numer
126. CTOR Figure 6 2 4 Wire Smoke Detector Connections Zones 1 8 2 Connect detectors including heat detectors if used across terminals of the zone selected See Figure 6 2 All detectors must be wired in parallel Remove the 2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals You must connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector Compatible 4 Wire Smoke Detectors Use any UL Listed 4 wire smoke detector which is rated for 10 14VDC operation and which has alarm reset time not exceeding 6 seconds Some compatible 4 wire smoke detectors are listed below Photoelectric direct wire System Sensor 2412 Photoelectric w heat sensor direct wire System Sensor 2412TH lonization direct wire System Sensor 1412 Fire Alarm Verification for Smoke Detectors This feature applies to any hardwired or polling loop fire zone set to zone type 16 For 4 wire smoke detectors the power must be interrupted by the system s auxiliary relay field 3 61 2 Thecontrol panel will verify any alarm by resetting the smoke detectors after the first alarm trigger and then waiting 90 seconds for a second alarm trigger If the smoke detector or thermostat does not trigger again the control will disregard the first trigger and no alarm signal will occur This feature eliminates false alarms due to electrical or physical transients Zone 6 Tamper Configuration Zone 6 may be used as a tamper loop for the VISTA 128FB Cab
127. Code Use a green wire nut supplied to secure the wire to the ground post Run a 16AWG wire from this post to the panel s earth ground terminal terminal 30 Use a second green nut supplied to secure this wire to the ground post This method of connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the 1451 and panel are connected to different earth ground systems The panel requires this connection in order for its lightning transient protection devices and earth ground supervision to function properly Backup Power Calculations 20 2 In the event of an AC power loss the VISTA 128F B control and PS24 Power Supply M odule if used must be supported by a backup rechargeable lead acid gel cell type battery When used without a PS24 a 12VDC 12AH min 34 4AH max battery must be connected to the VISTA 128F B control When used with the PS24 two 12V 7AH min 17 2AH max batteries must be connected to the PS24 The PS24 configures these batteries to provide 24V backup power to its outputs and 12V backup power to the control The battery s capacity must be sized to provide 24 hours UL central station fire or 60 hours UL remote station fire of standby time followed by 5 minutes fire only or 15 minutes fire burglary of alarm time This can be determined as follows 1 If using the polling loop fill out the Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet shown on next page to determine the total current drawn from the polling loop
128. D number if possi ble If a different 4 digit customer account number is used in the radio than is programmed into the alarm control the radio will transmit radio specific messages power on reset AC fail etc using the radio customer number and alarm messages using the control panel s customer number If these numbers are different you will be billed for two AlarmNet radio accounts ODD Y N Enter Y for odd system flag N for even system flag N Alarmnet Y N Enter Y if an AlarmNet installation Enter N for private Y system users skip to Question 7 CS ID Enter the primary central station s system ID number 1 7F will not be displayed for private system users CN BAT PRESENT Y N E nter Y if optional battery will be used Must be Y for UL N installations a battery must be installed USE RADIO Y N If Y is selected the Radiol D number will replace the panel N Subscriber ID in panel generated messages with the Radio ID number If N is selected the radio will send panel generated messages with the panel Subscriber ID number 2 CS ID This must be programmed with a value even if it is the 12 same as the primary central station The alarm panel has the option to send a selected message to the second central station REVIEW Y N Enter Y to review the programming options and to ensure that N the correct responses have been made Parameters can be changed during review Enter N to e
129. Dialer Test FireDrill Test One Man Fire Walk T est Burglary Walk T est Armed Burglary System T est Trouble Conditions Turning the System Over to the User Tothelnstaller Battery Test Dialer Test When AC power is present the VISTA 128F B will run a brief battery test every 60 seconds to determine if there is a battery connected and will run an extended battery test every 24 hours to check on the battery s condition If the VISTA 128FB finds that the battery voltage is low less than approximately 11 5V during one of these tests it initiates a keypad SY STEM LOBAT display and a rapid console beeping sound It also sends a Low Battery report to the central station if the dialer feature is used The console can be cleared by entering any security code OF F and a Restore report will be sent to the central station after a subsequent test indicates that the problem disconnected or low battery has been corrected If used the PS24 will also run a brief battery test every 60 seconds to check that a battery is connected and will run an extended battery test every 17 hours to check the actual battery condition If the PS24 finds the battery voltage low less than approximately 23V it will open circuit its LOW BATTERY output Besureto wire this output to one of the VISTA 128F B s EOLR supervised zones zones 3 8 program for 24 hour trouble response zone type 19 so that the VISTA 128FB will init
130. Division of Pittway Corporation and its divisions subsidiaries and affiliates Seller 165 Eileen Way Syosset New York 11791 warrants its products to be in conformance with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product or for products not having an ADEMCO date stamp for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period in which case the shorter period shall apply Seller s obligation shall be limited to repairing or replacing at its option free of charge for materials or labor any product which is proved not in compliance with Seller s specifications or proves defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than ADEMCO factory service For warranty service return product transportation prepaid to ADEMCO Factory Service 170 Michael Drive Syosset New York 11791 THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR U
131. E SONIC SONS SOUTH SPRINKLER STAMP STATION STEREO STORE STORAGE STORY STRESS STRIKE SUMP SUPERVISED SUPERVISION SWIMMING SWITCH TAMPER TAPE TELCO TELEPHONE TELLER TEMPERATURE 4 J 23 I 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 274 THERMOSTAT TOOL TRANSMITTER TRAP TRIGGERS ULTRA UP UPPER UPSTAIRS UTILITY VALVE VAULT VIBRATION VOLTAGE WALL WAREHOUSE WASH WEST WINDOW WINE WING WORK XMITTER YARD ZN 1 ZONE 0 1 1ST 2 2ND 3 3RD 4 4TH 5 5TH 6 6TH 7 7TH 8 8TH 9 9TH Custom Word 1 to Custom Word 20 82 R 83 S 84 T 85 86 V 87 W 88 X Y Z Section 25 493 Menu Mode Programming Notes This factory provided vocabulary of words is subject to change Bulleted words in bold face type are those that are also available for use by the 4285 4286 VIP Module If using a VIP Module and words other than these are selected for alpha descriptors the Voice Module will not provide annunciation of those words Device Programming This menu is used to program keypads receivers and relay modules From Data Field Programming M ode press 93 to display ZONE PROG Press 0 repeatedly to display DEVICE PROG DEVICE PROG Press 1
132. E CODE NOW 00 QUIT 01 Enter the 2 digit number of the relay to be activated nn DEVICE IS OFF Voice VOICE DESCRIPTOR DEVICE NN ON OFF FOR HIT O OFF 1 ON VOICE DESCRIPTOR ON ENTER 1 FOR VOICE _ p DESCRIPTOR OFF ENTER 0 Press Oor Ltoturn the device off or on respectively NN represents the 2 digit relay number and VOICE DESCRIPTOR is the relay voice descriptor programmed by the installer see Re ay Voice Descriptors in the 93 Menu Mode 31 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions nn DEVICE IS OFF Voice VOICE DESCRIPTOR DEVICE NN ON OFF TO EXIT ENTER 00 NOW HIT THE KEY 31 8 From a keypad press to continue The ENTER DEVICE NO prompt will appear From a telephone keypad enter 00 to exit or enter the next relay number to be programmed The current on off state of that relay will be annunciated as described above Alternatively if 6 seconds elapses with no key depression the voice module will annunciate the ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW message A relay that has been designated as a fire relay is automatically restricted to prevent inadvertent activation deactivation by users Only the Installer Code can override this restriction If theinstaller attempts to access a fire relay the message RESTRICTED USE OVERRIDE will be displayed The relay can then be tested for manual operation SECTION 32 Testing The System In This Section Battery T est
133. EGISTRATION NO attestato naotoneg D 1 FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION FCC STATEMENT 6 A 4 FIRE ALARM SILENCED 77 77 15 3 Fire Alarm Verification 6 4 9 553 56 4 25 29 1 eite 24 18 Pine DATES PC 32 2 Fire Supervisory Type 18 22 3 Fire Walk Test 1 0 1 7 Fire Waterflow Type 17 22 3 Fire With Verification Type 16 22 3 First Communication 7 28 2 FIRS TEST REPORT TIME os kk 24 10 3 3 3 1 26 2 Frwd Power LOSS ect ria 13 3 9000 0 D 1 General 3 311 1 1 1 Getting On Line with a Control Panel 28 2 Global 1509 30 7 2 2 4 31 3 Go No Go Test Mode 1 8 11 GOTO Commands sella las 31 4 Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing 4 2 Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing 4 3 Grade A Service 7 90 A 2 Grade AA 2 1135 3 A 2 A 3 11 10 27 1 1 158 8 5 0 0 28 1 Holiday Schedule Programming 26 11 Holiday Schedule Worksheet
134. ELETE 003 The system will prompt to confirm that you want to delete this 0 NO 12 YES user Press O NO or 1 YES f yes that user s code will be removed from all partitions to which it was assigned and all authorization levels and other information about that user will be deleted Note that a user can only be deleted by a user with a higher authority level A user cannot delete himself A user code can only be deleted from the partition through which it was entered If trying to delete from another partition the message User XXX Not Deleted will be displayed To EXIT the User Edit Mode Press either or or don t press any key for 10 seconds 30 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 30 8 SECTION 31 Keypad Functions In This Section General Information Arming Functions Global Arming Access Control Deaying Closing Time Partition Go To Command Viewing Capabilities of a User Viewing Zone Descriptors Viewing Downloaded Messages Using the Built in User s Guide Panic Keys Speed Key D Macros Manual Relay Activation Mode 70 M ode General Information The keypad allows the user to arm and disarm the system and perform other system functions such as bypassing zones viewing messages from the central station and displaying zone descriptors Zone and system conditions alarm trouble bypass are shown in the display window When an alarm occu
135. ET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 1 oj Enter 0 and thefirst OFF sequence Security Code OFF after a fire alarm to de activate sounders and or strobe lights connected to Bell 1 output Enter 1 and the second OFF sequence Security Code OFF after a fire alarm to de activate sounders and or strobe lights connected to Bell 1 output 3 56 Section 24 Data Field Descriptions RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 2 0 Enter 0 and the first OFF sequence Security Code OFF after a fire alarm to de activate sounders and or strobe lights connected to Bell 2 output Enter 1 and the second OFF sequence Security Code OFF after a fire alarm to de activate sounders and or strobe lights connected to Bell 2 output 3 57 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY oo 3 59 3 60 Enter 1to enable 1 2 second external alarm sounding ding at the end of exit delay or after kissoff from the central station if sending Closing reports Otherwise enter O Must be 1 for UL ENABLE BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY CHIME ANNUNCIATION 0 0 Enter 1to enable the chime function on Bell Output 2 and the aux relay Otherwise enter O BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY TIMEOUT 00 00 Defines the length of time Bell Output 2 and the aux relay will sound for all audible alarms multiply entry 01 15 by 2 minutes for actual duration Minimum 16 minutes for UL burglary installations 3 61 AUX RELAY FUNCTION SELECTION m Select t
136. FPA 72 applications use either a LORRA alone the main dialer with the LORRA or use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer For Listed fire remote station UL864 NFPA72 applications use the main dialer with the 5140DLM backup dialer Telephone line supervision is required for UL commercial fire alarm systems when a dual line dialer is used for fire signal transmission Telephone Line Supervision The supervision circuits on both dialer outputs will indicate a fault when thetip ring voltage falls below approximately 25 volts 13 volts for the main dialer when the main PCB blue jumper is cut 13 volts for the backup dialer when its blue jumper is cut and when handset current is less than approximately 10 mA Faults on the phone lines are displayed as zones 974 main dialer and 975 backup dialer 17 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions DO NOT connect both outputs to the same telephone company line l To prevent the risk of shock disconnect phone lines at telco jack before servicing the panel 2 If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX be sure the PABX has a backup power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours central station usage or 60 hours remote station usage Many PABXs are not power backed up and connection to such a PABX will result in a communication failure if power is lost Dialer Operation 17 2 When only the main dialer is enabled 1 0 in field 3 30 the
137. Features Q E D programming for quick enrollment of devices VISTA 128FB Commercial Fire amp Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling Installation and Setup Guide ADEMCO N8988 5 98 Recommendations for Proper Protection The Following Recommendations For The Location Of Fire And Burglary Detection Devices Help Provide Proper Coverage For The Protected Premises Recommendations For Smoke And Heat Detectors With regard to the number and placement of smoke heat detectors we subscribe to the recommendations contained in the National Fire Protection Association s NFPA Standard 72 noted below Early warning fire detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment in all rooms and areas of the household as follows For minimum protection a smoke detector should be installed outside of each separate sleeping area and on each additional floor of a multi floor family living unit including basements The installation of smoke detectors in kitchens attics finished or unfinished or in garages is not normally recommended For additional protection the NF PA recommends that you install heat or smoke detectors in the living room dining room bedroom s kitchen hallway s attic furnace room utility and storage rooms basements and attached garages addition we recommend the following nstall a smoke detector inside every bedroom where a smoker sleeps Install a smoke
138. Functions 31 2 C 1 Arming 7 0 31 2 Arming 330 8 nnne 31 2 7 7 7 7 7 7 77 0 31 2 Arms Lobby 3 8007 0 2 2 24 11 77 80 22 3 Audio Alarm Verification eee 1 7 11 1 Authority Levels and Modification Rules 30 4 3 3 500 26 2 Auto Disarming 1771 4 145 26 2 Auto Arm Delay 1 0 24 16 26 2 Auto Arm ii 24 16 26 2 AUTO DISARM DELAY i 24 17 Aux Standby PWf iii D 1 Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment 12 7 AUXILIARY INPUT ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE24 19 Auxiliary Relay 4 Wire Smoke Detector Reset 16 2 Auxiliary Relay Alarm Activation 16 1 Auxiliary Relay Battery Saver sss 16 3 Auxiliary Relay Trouble Supervisory Activation 16 2 Auxiliary 5 1 5 16 1 24 20 Backup 511 6 700 D 1 BACKUP DIALER TOUCHTONE ROTARY 24 20 Backup 1 1 0 1 6 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Backup Power Calculations 20 2 20 7 Basic Hardwired Zones enn 1 1 6 1 BATTERY SELECTION TABLE eese 20 8 siue d chwc T 32 1 Baten CNET D T
139. IGGERS FOR PARTITION partition specific m SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LRR 00000 ira F B P S T sed for supervised connection to 7920SE Enter 1to enable pulses for each type of LRR trigger Fire Burglary silent Panic Supervisory Trouble This option causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the J 2radiotriggers These pulses are used by the 7920SE to determine that its connection to the control is still intact Enter O if not desired Must be 1 for commercial fire and UL 2 22 2 23 2 24 3 00 3 01 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 Section 24 Data Field Descriptions DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS partition specific 0 Enter 1to allow fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this partition s keypad s Otherwise enter O DISPLAY BURG amp PANIC ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS 0 Enter 1 to allow burglary and panic alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this partition s keypad s Otherwise enter O DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS 0 Enter 1to allow troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this partition s keypad s Otherwise enter O CHECK OR TRBL DISPLAY 0 Enter 1 to display the letters TRBL instead of CHECK when a zone or system trouble occurs Enter O to display CHECK FIRE DISPLAY LOCK 0 Enter Oto scroll all alarms Enter 1 to lock display of first fire alarm
140. ING CONNECTIONS ARMED READY TO OUT 1 J2 PIN 7 TO GND J2 PIN 8 TO OUT 5 J2 PIN 6 TO ZONE 8 TERM 27 TO ZONE 7 ZONE 8 TERM 26 4 TO ZONE 7 TERM 25 TT 4146 KEYSWITCH Figure 12 3 Remote Keyswitch Wiring Keyswitch Operation TheVISTA 128FB allows 2 modes of keyswitch operation When field 15 is set to a partition 1 8 the keyswitch operates as follows With System Disarmed and No Alarms Present A momentary short across zone 7 will arm the partition in the AWAY mode and a short held for more than 10 seconds will arm the partition in the STAY mode A subsequent short will disarm the partition The keyswitch LEDs will indicate that the partition has armed see table below 12 3 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions UL Faulted zones must either be corrected or bypassed before the system will arm In commercial fire installations mount the keyswitch next to a keypad The keypad will display the UL required FIRE BELL SILENCED indication when the keyswitch is used to silence a fire alarm With Alarms Present A momentary short across Zone 7 will silence alarm bell and keypad sounds and will disarm the partition if it was armed The keyswitch LEDs provide a memory of alarm indication see table below A subsequent short across Zone 7 will dear the alarm memory indication and reset 2 wire smoke and glassbreak detectors if used When field 15 is set to 9 the keysw
141. IRE ALARM 1 m I 3 SILENT PANIC ALARM Cm BRE SE 88 PANIC ALARM OIC GK 3 Ciz Ys FIRE SUPERVISORY 4 O e TROUBLE OZ OU 5 o 0 6 sa 32 NOTES y 1 The 7920SE cabinet is at circuit ground 8 D potential and must be isolated from earth 9 5 D ground to avoid earth ground faults N Enable trigger supervision pulses 2 21 when 7920SE mounted more than 3 feet from control Run wires from control to 7920SE in conduit and use PVC conduit or equivalent means to isolate cabinets of each unit Figure 12 5c Connections to 7920SE Long Range Radio Event Log Printer Connections The VISTA 128F B s event log can be printed on a local serial printer If used program field 3 19 must be set to 1 This setting overrides the functions selected for INPUT 1 and OUT 2 made in field 3 20 Connect a UL EDP Listed serial printer to the J 2 connector using an ADE MCO 4100SM Interface module Refer to the Event Log Options section for wiring connections printer confi guration and a description of the keypad commands which initiate event log printing If earth ground fault sensing is enabled l You may get an earth ground fault indication when the 4100SM Module is clipped directly onto a side wall of the VISTA 128F B cabinet If this occurs use an insulator to insulate the 4100SM s clip on bracket from the VI STA 128F B cabinet side wall Later production versions of the 4100SM have the dip on bracket isolated from the circuit
142. Information Event Log Printer Connections Programming E vent Log Options Event Logging Procedures General Information This system has the ability to record up to 224 events of various types in a history log Each event is recorded in one of six categories with the time and date of its occurrence if real time dock is set These categories are Alarm Supervisory check Bypass Open close System conditions Test The log may be viewed Display Mode on an alpha keypad or can be printed Print Mode on a serial printer connected to the system via a 4100SM Serial Interface Module Event Log Printer Connections The VISTA 128F B s event log can be printed on a local serial printer If used program field 3 19 must be set to 1 This setting overrides the functions selected for INPUT 1 and OUT 2 made in field 3 20 Connect a UL EDP Listed serial printer to the 2 connector using an ADEM CO 4100SM nterface Module as shown in Figure 18 1 18 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 18 2 4100SM 0 PWR NOTE IF EARTH GROUND FAULT SENSING IS ENABLED YOU MAY GET AN EARTH GROUND FAULT INDICATION IF YOU USE A PRINTER OR PC WHICH HAS A 3 PRONG GROUNDED POWER RED BLUE WHITE CORD IF THIS OCCURS FIRST VERIFY THAT PIN 1 CHASSIS eines GROUND IS ISOLATED FROM PIN 7 SIGNAL GROUND ON THE 4100SM JUMPERS WITH 4100SM IF 4100SM S RS 232 CONNECTOR EARLY PRODUCTION VERSIONS OF CUT TO SET RES
143. Instructions 01 ACTION Enter the action code for this timed event number from the list at the left This could be an output command an arming command or any other time driven event none 00 Press to accept the entry The prompt for the action specifier will display Action Codes Action Specifier 01 Relay On Actions 01 05 01 RELAY E M f actions 01 05 were selected the 00 03 Relay Close for 2 seconds prompt at the right will be 04 Relay Close XX minut i dur da dd M cR displayed Enter the relay number 05 Relay Close Y Y seconds l Press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears 1 90 Actions 06 10 01 RELAY GRP 4 07 Relay Group Off e ds If actions 06 10 were selected the 00 un i prompt at the right will be 09 Relay Group Close XX minutes displayed Enter the rel ay group 10 Relay Group Close YY seconds number Press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears Action Codes Actions 21 24 and 40 41 PART 12345678 21 Arm AWAY di If actions 21 24 or 40 41 were HITO 8 XX 22 Disarm selected the prompt at the right will be displayed Enter the partition to which the action applies Enter Oto select all partitions Enter a partition number again to deselect it 23 orce Arm STAY 24 orce Arm AWAY 40 E nable Open Window by part 41 nable Close Window by part Press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears 30 Auto bypass
144. K OUT CLIP ON DOOR TAMPER SWITCH CABINET MOUNTING HOLE 4 PLACES PLUG THIS PLUG THIS KNOCK OUT KNOCK OUT TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN DISC PLUGS DIMPLES IN DISC PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE KNOCK OUT OBENINE KNOCK OUT OPENING PLUG THIS RUN ALL REMAINING KNOCK OUT WIRES THRU HERE CARRIAGE BOLT HEX NUT AND OKAAN CABINET SIDEWALL OUTSIDE Figure 4 2 Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations 4 2 Section 4 Installing The Control Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Follow the instructions given above for Mercantile Premises listing Mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No 5402 to the control s backbox Follow the manufacturer s instructions for proper sensor mounting This sensor must also be wired to zone 6 For safe and vault applications a UL Listed contact must be used inside the cabinet through one of the knockouts for pry off tamper purposes This sensor must also be wired to zone 6 Installing the Control s Circuit Board Refer to Figure 4 3 when mounting the PC board Hang the three mounting dips on the raised cabinet tabs Make surethe dip orientation is exactly as shown in the diagram to avoid damage to the dip when the mounting screws are tightened This will also avoid problems with insertion and removal of the PC board Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the t
145. LOW SPEED EXPRESS HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID lst 2nd lst 2nd lst 2nd lst 2nd 003 00 s 00 03 95 Tw ho 94 oa 00 TT 00 10 02 00 05 00 596 os 00 10 06 02 00 06 n 007 00 07 00 07 po 0 fo 09 jo 0 fo 00 _ 010 00 10 00 10 012 03 00 o 02 o 0 1 0 014 00 04 00 14 017 00 Ol 02 00 019 00 04 021 03 00 02 06 024 03 00 09 00 026 00 11 028 03 00 02 08 00 13 00 031 03 00 o 01 00 033 00 E 00 1 03 035 03 00 03 05 05 00 o5 00 038 00 10 042 05 00 12 o oas o8 00 ma os os oo 13 00 wa 103 0 IM 0 j 0 p4 00 045 00 15 546 ow or oe Jos eo To TO 047 00 02 04 27 8 Section 27 System Communications COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES cont d ZONE LOW SPEED EXPRESS HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 053 00 00 08 055 01 00 05 E 01 00 10 00 057 00 07 00 12 060 00 10 00 15 062 02 00 06 02 09 00 02 00 064 00 04 04 s H3 0 06 06 p4 00 06 00 067 00 06 07 00 069 00 09 071 03 00 07 11 00 074 03 00 04 14 076 00 06 00 01 078 03 00 07 08 15 00 03 00 081 03 00 08 01 13 00 06 00 083 00 s 00 08 085 03 00 08 d 13 00 10 088 00 090 00 03 00 15 092 00 09 02 13 00 02 00 093 03 0 fo 04 H3 o f 0 095 00 E 00 05 toe 195 00 s ie 3 00 pe 00_ 097 00 07 00 07 099 09 09 27 9 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONE S cont d ZONE LOW SPEED EXPRESS HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 103
146. M 4 4 BELL 1 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING 24 2 5 ra 24 2 Bell 1 and Bell 2 outputs 15 1 BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY CONFIRMATION OF ARMING 1 24 20 BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY TIMEOUT 24 20 Bell Circuit Supervision 15 2 Bell Outputs Programming 15 3 DellOUIDUIS s 131 00 1 5 Built in User s ManUAal i 1 7 BURG ALARM COMM DELAY 24 10 BURG TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8 24 9 Burglary Walk TESt 32 3 7 77 7 19 8 8 Bypass COommands aaiala lea 26 13 BVPASSING ZONES 0 31 2 California State Fire Marshal A 3 Call Waiting Defeat 3 3 24 13 CALLBACK REQUESTED mi 28 3 callback qe TI 28 2 CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS A 5 CHARACTER ASCII CHART eta trato tous 25 20 Characteristics of Polling LOOp 7 1 Characteristics of Wireless Zones 8 1 Check Messa ona 707 7 51 32 4 CHECK OR TRBL DISPLAY n 7 5 24 18 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 7 24 7 chimeMode 7 6 60 800 31 2 110 24 14 Choices For Start Stop System Operation 25 28 Choices For Start Stop
147. MOdSiccmrstintsae mento ea tec Prschv tla dir 5 7 111 1111 30 7 SECTION 31 Keypad FuncUons 2 31 1 General ex 15151313 1 11 90100 31 1 11 31 2 SI ARMIN SIS 31 3 ECE ON OF a A TM 31 3 111 11 15111111 31 4 Tableof Contents 3 3 333 311111111111 0 0 31 4 Veving Gale DEN OF a US ction 31 4 VIENING ZONSDEScr DEOS st 31 5 Viewing Downloaded M essages 2 31 5 UsingtheBulltin Uses Maal
148. Master Manager or Operator Code ToAdd an RF Key to an Existing User ToDeetea Master Manager or Operator Code TOExit theUser Edit Mode General Information This system allows a total of 150 security access codes to be allocated each identified by a user ID number Regardless of the number of partitions each code has access to it occupies only one user slot in the system If a particular code is not used in all partitions that user ID number cannot be used again The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed partition specific program field 29 which allows the key to be pressed instead of entering the security code when arming the system The security code must always be entered to disarm the system A user code other than the installer code must be programmed for the Quick Arm feature to function User Codes amp Levels of Authority E ach user of the system can be assigned a level of authority which tells the system what system functions that user is authorized to do A user can have different levels of authority within different partitions In general users can perform most system functions including Test and Chime M odes but certain authority levels restrict disarming bypassing or the assigning of other user codes These restrictions are noted in the descriptions below Usethe View Capabilities keypad function to view the partitions and authority levels for which a particular user is authorized These levels are
149. NIS VV IVC Mme 26 8 Dally Opani Close Schedul di 26 9 FLOUR 6 2 on 511111115111 51550 26 10 eho 26 11 Litmitatron or Accs UN CS bot ub 2 e 2 33 3111111 0 26 16 dub ope 1 1 1111111111 0 26 17 User Schegauling MenoXU M OU 0 rur vate 117 11515 11311111 1 111 0 26 19 SECTION 27 System Communicati on ED 27 1 PS uccessrul ASIII 111111 1111 111 1 27 1 qai ci TU DUREE ES 27 1 I oading communtcalon Defaults sicco 33311111111 1 0 201 27 4 SECTION 28 Downloading Primer III 28 1 General anie dace RE Nt ani 28 1 Getting On LineWIth a 07 111 1 28 2 On Line 0 1 111 8700 28 3 PROCESS rr 28 3 Connecting 4100SM Module for 6
150. NUMBER FOR TEST This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Test reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE TYPES 1 8 HODOCIDDIC Enter 1 to enable Restore reporting for individual zone types Enter 0 if no Restore report is desired for a zone type Default is 00000000 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9 10 EIN 9 10 Enter 1 to enable restore reporting for individual zone types Enter O if norestore report is desired for a zonetype Default is 00 FIRST TEST REPORT TIME 00 12 00 EA Enter the day 00 07 and time 00 23 hours 00 59 min that the first test report shall be transmitted Enter OO in all locations if the test report is to be sent immediately upon exiting Enter 00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next occurrence of the time that is set Note that day 01 M onday See Report Code Programming System Group 1 in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section for assigning the Test Report Code SWINGER SUPPRESSION partition specific 03 This option limits the number of messages alarms or troubles sent for specific channel in an armed period Swinger Suppression Enter 01 15 f 00 is selected all alarm or trouble codes are reported Must be 00 disabled for commercial fire and UL installations ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS amp DURESS 0000
151. O firealarm initiating devices zone types 9 17 or N O sprinkler system supervisory devices zone type 18 Y ou may use as many 4 wire smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel s Auxiliary Power 1 output without exceeding the output s rating see the Final Power U p Procedure section for auxiliary power ratings Auxiliary power to 4 wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm and therefore must be momentarily interrupted using the built in auxiliary relay as described below This allows the detectors to be reset via the second entry of a User Code OFF sequence Field 3 61 Aux Relay Function must be programmed as a 2 l Connect 12 volt power for the detectors as follows Wire the side of Auxiliary Power Terminal 10 to the N C contact of the Aux Relay Terminal 9 Wire the Pole of the Aux Relay Terminal 8 to the Power side of the smoke detector Connect the side of the smoke detector to Aux Power Terminal 12 Observe proper polarity when connecting detectors see Figure 6 2 U L Power to 4 wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device use a System Sensor A77 716B EOL Relay Module connected as shown in Figure 6 2 6 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions EOL POWER SUPERVISION RELAY 4 WIRE SMOKE V MODULE A77 716B CONTROL PANEL gt N SHOWN POWERED RELAY OPENS WHEN POWER IS LOST 20000 Sant EOLR TERMINALS 15 27 HEAT DETE
152. P UP i3 uP UP 14 UP UP 1 16 up Up up UP 17 up up up 18 up up up 19 UP uP 2 5 us 2 UP DIP SWITCH POSITION 6 7 8 UP VIV UU VIV UO Ulu Ulu U c c c c c c c iC c iC c c c Cc Cc E U U U U U U U U U U U U U rU U CICIO C CICICIC CICICIC CICICIo UU UU v U U U U u EH 32 UP UP UP UP UP Sra 63 I BIT BIT VALUE 32 16 4 2 1 VALUE 32 For 5700 series transmitters not shown in this table refer to the instructions accompanying each transmi 1 UP UP UP UP UP si per ra i Eal E fsi Eee EE a er Appendix B 4 APPENDIX C Summary of System Commands Event Logging Commands Wireless System Commands User Code Commands Arming Functions E vent Log Display 2 Code 60 Installer or Master Only Event Log Print Code 61 Installer or Master Only Clear Event Log Code 62 Installer or Master Only House ID Sniffer Mode Code 2 Installer Only Transmitter ID Test Code 3 Installer Only Go No Go Test Code 5 Test K ey Add A User Code User Code 8 New User Number New User s Code Change a Code User Code
153. PECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING PRINTER HAS DB25 Ni THE 4100SM ADT HAVE AN UNMARKED 3 8 LONG BARE WIRE COLOR FUNCTION PIN MALE CONNECTOR JUMPER LYING NEAR THE PIN 1 SIDE OF THE RS232 CONNECTOR RED D 8 TIT WHICH MUST BE CUT TO ISOLATE THESE PINS THEN VERIFY BLUE CTS 5 ii THAT THESE PINS ARE ISOLATED ON YOUR PRINTER S RS232 SERIAL PRINTER SET FOR 8 DATA BITS PARITY 1 STOP BIT 300 1200 BAUD HARDWARE HANDSHAKE USING DTR SIGNAL WHITE DSR 6 CONNECTOR FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED WITH YOUR PRINTER TO ISOLATE THESE PINS IF REQUIRED Figure 18 1 Event Log Printer Connections The printer must be configured as follows e 7 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 3000r 1200 baud 1200 required if alpha numeric pager interface is installed Hardware handshaking using DTR signal The 4100SM Moduleis supplied with a 10 foot RS232 cable A longer cable or an extension cable can be used if the VISTA 128FB and serial printer are separated by more than 10 feet but the total cable length should be less than 50 feet The 4100SM Module must be connected to the panel using the distance of the trigger cable The wires cannot be lengthened to mount the module in a remote location Most printers either ignore the CTS DSR and CD signals or require them to be high i e 3 15VDC as measured on RS232 DB25 Connector Pins 5 6 amp 8 respectively with respect to Ground Pin 7 The 4100SM Module sets these pins high If the print
154. PON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER EVEN IF THE LOSS OR DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented that the products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary robbery fire or otherwise or that the products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection Customer understands that a properly installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary robbery fire or other events occurring without providing an alarm but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result CONSEQUENTLY SELLER SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING HOWEVER IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN SELLER S MAXIMUM LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT WHICH SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER This warranty replaces any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product No increase or alteration written or verbal of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized WARNING OWNER S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED REFER
155. PPENDIX A Regulatory Agency Statements UL Installation Requirements The following requirements apply to both UL residential and UL commercial burglary installations l All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person s 2 All partitions must be part of one building at one street address 3 Theaudible alarm device s must be placed where it they can be heard by all partitions 4 Thecontrol cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access This can be done by installing a tamper switch on the cabinet door supplied with VISTA 128F B or by installing a UL Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access Wire the selected device to any EOLR supervised zone Zone 1 8 Program this zone for day trouble night alarm type 05 or 24 hour audible alarm type 07 response The 24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems Remote downloading and auto disarming are not UL Listed features UL864 NFPA Local Fire Configure at least one bell output for supervision and wire polarized fire alarm indicators to it Program this bell for temporal sounding UL864 NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire 1 Size the backup battery for 24 hour standby central station or 60 hour standby remote station time F or central station service you Mmay use the 7720ULF or 7920SE LORRAS alone the main dialer with a LORRA or the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module For remo
156. PPLEMENTARY COMMUNICATOR POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL STRIP IN O AUX AUX DATA DATA S O F OUT S V IMPORTANT R gt A m Q z Z m z 77 DIRECTLY TO SCREW TERMINALS AS SHOWN IMPORTANT Make connections directly to screw terminals Make no connection to the keypad blue wire if present TO KEYPAD RED WIRE TOS TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE ES TO KEYPAD RED WIRE TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE Figure 5 2 Using a Supplementary Power Supply for Keypads Mounting the Keypads Mount the keypads at a height that is convenient for the user Refer to the instructions provided with the keypad for mounting procedure You can either surface mount or flush mount keypads using the 6139TRK Trim Ring Kit Refer to the mounting instructions and template included with the keypad and or trim ring kit for specific information Addressing the Keypads Preliminary Checkout Procedure If you want to check that the system is working before connecting field wiring from zones and devices do the following 1 Temporarily connect a 2000 ohm end of line resistor across each of the basic hardwire Zones 1 8 as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram Without actual zone wiring or EOL resistors connected the keypads will not display the READY message 2 Power up the system temporarily The keypads will not operate until they are physically address
157. Programming see later in this section Then press 93 to display ZONE PROG ZONE PROG Press 1 to enter Zone Programming The following screens will 1 Yes 0 No appear Press to display the next screen Press to display a previous screen Zone Programming If the system has been set up to use 5800 Series RF and a program tool has not been programmed the following PROGRAM TOOL prompt will be displayed If the system has not been set up to use 5800 Series RF or a program tool has already been programmed the system will advance to the ENTER ZN NO prompt PROGRAM TOOL If a program tool is being used enter 1 If not using a tool 0 NO 1 YES 0 enter 0 When 0 is entered the system will advance tothe ENTER ZN NO prompt 25 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 25 4 000 INPUT S N L AXXX XXXX 000 PROG AS BR 3 A123 4567 3 ENTER ZN NO 000 QUIT 010 Zone 010 entered T 010 ZT P RC B INL DU e Mm If 1 is entered the system will prompt for the unit s serial number Enter the program tool s serial number using one of the following methods a Enter the 7 digit serial number for thetransmitter Or b Press any button on the transmitter The keypad should beep three times and display the serial number of the tool In this example the serial number is A123 4567 Once enrolled the upper left hand button of the program tool can be pressed to ready the system for enrolli
158. Range Radio l LRR Battery The battery connected to the radio is low 2 PLL out of Lock Theradio has an internal fault and cannot transmit any messages 3 Early Power Detect RF power is detected without a valid transmission 13 2 Section 13 7820 Long RangeRadio 4 Power Unattained Full RF power was never attained 5 Frwd Power Loss RF power was not sustained throughout the transmission 6 Antenna Fault A problem with the antenna has been detected 7 LRR CRC is bad The radio s EEPROM is corrupt the internal CRC is bad tems 2 and 3 require factory service tems 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low battery tem 6 check the antenna connection and cable otherwise this requires factory service NOTE All these messages will be displayed in conjunction with the CHECK 8xx message which indicates a trouble on the address to which the LRR unit is programmed in the control AII of the above events except Antenna F ault will be sent to the event log and reported to the central station using Contact ID Event Code 333 expansion device trouble Antenna Fault will use Event Code 357 If the tamper is tripped on the LRR it will use Event Code 341 expansion device tamper 13 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 13 4 SECTION 14 Access Control In This Section General Information Access Control of an Entry Exit Point Using the VISTA 128F B Without the VGM and PassPoint ACS A
159. Silent panic duress alarm e Firesupervisory Trouble e Opening dosing arming disarming These triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as ADEM CO s 7 20 7720ULF and 7920SE Long Range Radios Note that not all of these triggers are available for all settings of field 3 20 See Figure 12 1 J 2 Pin Assignments and Functions shown earlier for configuration of 2 triggers The open close fire alarm fire supervisory burglary audible panic alarm silent panic duress alarm and trouble triggers are common to all partitions and must be enabled for each partition data field 2 20 The open close trigger is LOW when all enabled partitions are armed and HIGH when any enabled partition is disarmed The remaining triggers are normally LOW and go HIGH when the corresponding condition occurs in at least one enabled partition The fire and burglary audible panic alarm triggers remain HIGH until a User Code OFF is entered in all enabled partition s which display these conditions The silent panic duress trigger works the same way except that it is momentary when initiated by duress Thefire supervisory and troubletriggers remain HIGH until the underlying faults are corrected and the User Code OFF is entered in all enabled partition s which display these conditions Figures 12 5a b and c show how to make connections to the 7720 7720ULF and 7920SE Long Range Radios Section 12 J 2 Trigger Output
160. Supervisory Zones 6 2 digit Relay Number e g Relay Number 03 if supervised is zone 603 8 2 digit Device Address e g Device Address 01 if supervised is zone 801 The 4285 4286 VIP Module is zone 804 since its Device Address must be set to 4 Bell Output 1 Bell Output 2 Earth Ground J 21nput 1 LRR Dialer 1 Dialer 2 Auxiliary Relay J 2 LRR Trigger Outputs 2nd Wireless Receiver not receiving signals lst Wireless Receiver not receiving signals Polling Loop short circuit 1 panic A key 3 panic C key panic B key 23 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Response types for zones are enabled in Zone Programming in the 493 Menu Mode section Supervisory zones should be given a response type of either 19 24 Hr Trouble or 05 Trouble by Day Alarm by Night Zone 976 is assigned to the built in auxiliary relay output for the purpose of allowing the operation of the relay to be bypassed Zone 977 is assigned to the J2 LRR Output Triggers for the purpose of allowing the operation of the outputs to be bypassed Zone Type Defaults 23 2 Following are the zone type defaults for zones on the VISTA 128FB Zone Zone Type Zone Zone Type 004 0 006 m 0 0 SECTION 24 Data Field Descriptions The following is a description of all data fields provided by this control If you have followed earlier instructions during the installation of the various devices man
161. T NOTICE The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution User should not attempt to make such connec
162. T EXTERIOR FACTORY FAILURE FAMILY FATHERS FENCE FILE FIRE FLOOR FLOW FOIL FOYER FREEZER FRONT FUR FURNACE GALLERY GARAGE GAS GATE GLASS GROUND GUEST GUN HALL HEAT HIGH HOLDUP 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 135 136 137 138 139 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 HOUSE INFRARED INSIDE INTERIOR INTRUSION JEWELRY KITCHEN LAUNDRY LEFT LEVEL LIBRARY LIGHT LINE LIQUOR LIVING LOADING LOCK LOOP LORRA LOW LOWER MACHINE MAGNETIC MAIDS MAIN MASTER MAT MEDICAL MEDICINE MICROWAVE MONEY MONITOR MOTHERS MOTION MOTOR MUD NORTH NURSERY OFFICE OIL OPEN OPENING OUTSIDE OVERFLOW OVERHEAD PAINTING PANIC PASSIVE PATIO PERIMETER 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 CHARACTER ASCII CHART For Adding Custom Words 4 5 6 7 8 9 Qmmuogoon rgzuwv PHONE PHOTO POINT POLICE POOL POWER QUAD RADIO REAR RECREATION REFRIG REFRIGERATION RELAY 1 RF RIGHT ROOM ROOF SAFE SCREEN SENSOR SERVICE SHED SHOCK SHOP SHORT SHOW SIDE SKYLIGHT SLIDING SMOK
163. T NOT USED 02 START ZN LIST NO LIST 02 START ZN TYPE Enter the relay output device identification number 01 16 This is a reference number only used for identification purposes The actual module address and relay number on the module are programmed in the last two prompts Press to continue Press to continue The keypad will display a summary STOP screen Press to continue The Relay Action is the way in which the relay will respond when activated by the start event Enter the desired action for this relay as follows O not used 1 close for 2 secs 2 stay closed 3 pulse on off 4 toggle on and off alternately A relay may be activated either by an Event used in conjunction with a Zone List and or by a Zone Type System Operation If using an Event Zone List combination enter the event code as follows O not used 1 alarm 2 fault 3 trouble If not using a Zone List to activate the relay enter O Press to continue A Zone List is a set of zones that can be used to initiate the start or stop relay action If a zone list is being used to start this relay action enter the Zone List number 1 8 If a zone list is not being used enter O Press to continue A Zone Type System Operation can be used instead of or in addition to an Event Zone List combination to start the relay action If a Zone Type System Operation is being used enter the 2 digit code as listed below Press to continu
164. TA 128FB Installation Instructions 26 18 Temporary Schedules Programming Enter User Code 81 to enter this mode Note that only users with authority level of manager or higher can program temporary schedules A temporary schedule only affects the partition from which it is entered Temporary schedules can also be reused at later dates simply by scrolling pressing to the DAY S prompt described below and activating the appropriate days This should be considered when defining daily time windows Mon DISARM WIND 00 00AM 00 00AM Mon ARM WINDOW 00 00AM 00 00AM Tue DISARM WIND 00 00AM 00 00AM This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the disarm opening window for Monday U pon entry of this mode the cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm window Enter the desired hour Press to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner Press to move to the AM PM position Pressing any key in the 0 9 range will toggle the AM PM indication Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry Press to store the entries and move to the arming dosing window for Monday Pressing will scroll you through the prompts without making any changes This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm dosing window for Monday The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the arm window
165. TER BOX INNER LINER r i I i i I I I i I i i I I I L Figure 15 1 External Sounder Connections Programming the Bell Outputs 1 Enter Data Field Program Mode Installer Code 8000 2 Program the following data fields 08 515 16 1 47 3 57 3 59 3 15 3 60 Temporal Siren Pulse Select Timeout for Bell 1 Confirmation of Arming Ding for Bell 1 Enable Chime for Bell 1 Confirmation of Arming Ding for Bell 2 Enable Chime for Bell 2 Select either Steady or Pulsing for each bell circuit output Select Timeout for Bell 2 3 Enter Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode to assign zones to bell outputs and or aux relay 4 Exit Program Mode by pressing 99 The bell outputs will not respond if zones are not assigned to them For fire alarms the system will display FIRE ALARM SILENCED This message will also be displayed if the bell output is not supervised 15 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 15 4 SECTION 16 Auxiliary Relay In This Section Relay Functions Relay Functions TheVISTA 128FB provides a built in Form C relay with contacts rated at 28 VAC VDC 2 8 amps max This relay may be programmed for one of the functions below determined by program field 3 61 Alarm Activation e rouble Supervisory Activation 4 Wire Smoke Detector Reset e Battery Saver These options are described below Alarm Activation 3 61 1 or 4 Steady activation in response to
166. TION oj 1 70 1 71 1 72 1 73 1 74 1 75 Enter Lif 2 way audio AAV is being used Enter Oif AAV is not being used Must be 0 for commercial fire and UL EVENT LOG TYPES Alm Chck Byps O C Systm Test Enter 1for each type of event for which event logging is desired Otherwise enter 0 Default is 100010 Note E vents will also belogged into the PassPoint system if installed 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT 0 Select the type of time stamping desired O standard 12 hour 1 24 hour format EVENT LOG PRINTER ON LINE MODE oj Enter 1to have the printer print events as they occur Enter Oto enable the printer such that thelogs are printed only upon request PRINTER BAUD RATE oj Enter O if printer is set for 1200 baud preferred Enter Lif printer is set for 300 baud Note Must be 1200 if using the alpha numeric pager interface RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES 000 Enter the relay time out 000 127 in multiples of 2 minutes desired for 80 Menu Mode time driven event relay command numbers 04 09 and Rday Programming output command 56 refer to 93 Menu Mode Programming and Scheduling Options sections RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS 000 Enter the relay time out 000 127 seconds desired for 80 Menu Mode time driven event relay command numbers 05 10 and Rel ay Programming output command 57 refer to 93 Menu Mode Programming and Scheduling Options sections UL 1
167. Trouble Messages General Information The control can support the 7820 Long Range Radio LRR All messages programmed to be sent via the phone lines may also be enabled to be sent via the LRR These messages will be transmitted in Contact I D format regardless of the format programmed for the control in fields 45 and 47 It is recommended that if possible you use Contact ID format for the main dialer If Contact ID is not used certain types of reports such as Listen To Follow 606 will not be sent at all Supervision of the LRR The data lines between the control and the LRR can be supervised as well as certain functions in the radio If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs both the LRR and the control s dialer to the central station can be programmed to send a Trouble message Note For complete information see the Installation Instructions that accompany the radio Operation of the LRR TheLRR reporting options are defined by selecting categories of events for each subscriber ID in fields 58 and 59 Thereporting categories are Alarms Troubles Bypasses Openings Closing System E vents and Test n addition within an enabled category the specific event must be enabled for dialer reporting If for instance zone 10 is enabled to report but zone 11 is not zone 10 will report via the L RR but zone 11 will not The priority of events from most to least important transmitted from the VI STA 128F B to the LRR
168. U U U U U U U U U U U VIV Dj Po yoyo poy poy 9 ult yup yup VI poy 9 purty Up ty uy port yoy poy pol lU 55 UPS 56 UP UP 57 UP 58 UP UP UP 59 UP UP UP _ JUP X c c U U Appendix B 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR 5700 RF SYSTEM WIRELESS DEVICES HOUSE ID 5701 PANIC TRANSMITTER 5706 5707 SMOKE 5775 PIR SWITCH SETTING FOR ALL DETECTORTRANSMITTER DETECTOR TRANSMITTER DEVICES EXCEPT 5716 HOUSE ID 1 SHOWN MIRROR ret DEVICE 1 2 3 4 5 6 cer DF DN VIEW UP CICIC CICIC VIV UU VIV VIV VIV VIV U u U POS 6 UP XMTR ID 62 DN XMTR ID x HOUSE ID 1 SHOWN PRA RE XMTR ID 9 27 KEYPAD 123458678 32 SHOWN UP PULSE COUNT INST MODE XMTR DIP SWITCH POSITION si t 34 UP UP UP 48 SHOWN Fue Tue UP UP HOUSE ID 1 SHOWN UP OUSE ID 1 SHOWN XMTR ID i UP UP TPT up ESA a U U c U c U a rU rU C ICI ICI I ICI IC U u rU pr U c c U c U n U rU U n n n me n U U U pe n c U m FIXED AT 12345 00 UP BUB el Gee Dee DN rase a ET ii C rU s rU em BIT VALUE Ala lalala
169. UL listed commercial fire and burglary control panel that supports up to 128 zones using basic hardwired polling loop and wireless zones It also includes zones for supervision of bells phone lines keypads RF receivers and relays n addition the control offers scheduling capabilities and allows certain operations to be automated by pressing a single button The system has the capability to interface with an alpha numeric paging device and also an ECP long range radio unit that can send Contact ID messages The control can be connected to the ADEM CO PassPoint system via the Vista Gateway Module to provide a fully integrated security and access control system Basic Hardwired Zones Provides 8 style B hardwire zones with the following characteristics EOLR supervision optional for zones 3 8 supporting N O or N C sensors EOLR supervision required for fire and UL burglary installations e Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions e Upto 16 2 wire smoke detectors each on zones 1 and 2 32 total 4 wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1 8 power to 4 wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device e Upto50 2 wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8 e Individually assignable to bell outputs and or aux relay Optional Expansion Zones Polling Loop Expansion Supports up to 120 additional hardwire zones using a built in polling multiplex loop interface Current draw can total up to 128mA Pollingloop zo
170. ULARY For entering alpha descriptors To select a word press followed by the word s 3 digit number NOTE This vocabulary is not to be used for relay voice descriptors See the Relay Voice Descriptors section when programming relay voice descriptors 000 e 001 e 002 003 004 005 006 e 007 e 008 009 e 010 011 012 013 e 014 e 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 e 025 e 026 027 028 029 e 030 031 032 e 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 e 041 042 043 e 044 045 046 047 048 049 e 050 051 e 052 053 Word Space AIR ALARM ALCOVE ALLEY AMBUSH ANTENNA AREA APARTMENT ART ATTIC AUDIO AUX AUXILIARY BABY BACK BAR BARN BASEMENT BATHROOM BED BEDROOM BELL BELL 1 BELL 2 BLOWER BOILER BOTTOM BOX BREAK BUILDING BURNER CABINET CALL CAMERA CAR CASE CASH CCTV CEILING CELLAR CENTRAL CIRCUIT CLIP CLOSED COIN COLD COATROOM COLLECTION COMBUSTION COMPUTER CONTACT DAUGHTERS DELAYED 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 e 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 101 102 e 103 105 106 WNPO DEN DESK DETECTOR DIALER 1 DIALER 2 DINING DISCRIMINATOR DISPLAY DOCK DOOR DORMER DOWN DOWNSTAIRS DRAWER DRIVE WAY DRUG DUCT EARTH EAST ELECTRIC EMERGENCY ENTRY EQUIPMENT EXECUTIVE EXI
171. VISTA 128FB will attempt to route all calls over the main output When both main and backup dialers are enabled 1 1 in field 3 30 the VISTA 128FB will attempt to route all calls over the main output until a fault is detected at which time it will attempt to use the backup output Line faults will result in a Zone 974 DIALER 1 FAULT or a Zone 975 DIALER 2 FAULT display The communicator will make up to 8 attempts to transmit a report to one or both telephone numbers depending upon the report routing option programmed After the eighth attempt the communicator will hang up and a COMM FAIL will be displayed at the keypad The number of dialer attempts are programmed in field 3 21 default 8 must be restricted to 3 4 or 5 attempts if a secondary phone number is programmed The system will not switch to the backup dialer unless it detects a fault low voltage and low current on the main telephone line This means that if a report does not go through on the main phone line due to a programming error the backup dialer will not be activated TheVISTA 128FB will transmit reports in the following order Alarms fire medical panic burglary Fire Supervisories and Troubles remaining types of messages See the System Communi cati on section for a description of communication formats the types of messages transmitted by the panel and for the dialer programming defaults SECTION 18 Event Log Options In This Section General
172. X to resume premises phone operation 11 3 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons 11 4 SECTION 12 J2 Trigger Outputs In This Section General Information Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and Wiring Remote Keyswitch Operation and Wiring 5140LED Indicator Module Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment Event Log Printer Connections Direct Wire Downloading General Information TheJ 2 connector located in the upper right hand corner of the main PCB provides 1 input labeled INPUT 1 and seven trigger outputs labeled OUT 1 OUT 7 that can be used to interface to the following Remote keypad sounder UL Listed keyswitch 5140LED Indicator Module Auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as an ADEMCO Long Range Subscriber Radio Event logging serial printer via the 4100SM Interface Module PC computer used to direct wire download the panel s programming information via the 4100SM Interface M odule The trigger output ratings are listed below Note that all outputs are power li mited Outputs 1 5 7 LOW 2K to ground HIGH 10 14 VDC 920 mA max Remaining Outputs LOW 16 lt to ground HIGH 10 14 VDC through 5K The pin assignments for the 2 connector are shown in Figure 12 1 Use a 4142TR 9 wire trigger cable 1 supplied to interface with this connector The panel does not supervise field wiring connected to this connector Program fields 3 19 and 3 20 are used to select the functio
173. Zone Types 25 28 Glass B SUPENISIONA Lella 15 1 CLEAR RF SERIALI ser 25 3 6 9 14 2 2 qi eM 1 0 14 2 Code 75 access point function 14 2 Code 76 access point script 14 2 Code 77 access point 14 2 Code tir 3 eae 32 2 eoe 3 3 ll 32 2 Gode TEST lisce 7 32 3 COMM FAILURE cc eo hd 17 6 32 5 COMM SPLIT REPORT SELECTION 24 13 COMMON OD DY somit epe i esee beso cha hates 2 2 Communication Defaults s 21 1 27 5 Communications Formats 1 7 Compass Downloading Software 12 11 28 1 28 4 Compatible 2 Wire Smoke Detectors 6 3 Compatible 4 Wire Smoke Detectors 6 4 Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters 8 6 Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters 8 8 Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices 15 2 Compatible Glass Break Detectors 6 5 Compatible Polling Loop Devices 7 6 Confirm Serial NUMDEL ccccceeceseeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeees 25 8 Connecting the Backup Battery
174. Zone list Actions 30 31 01 ZONE LIST If actions 30 31 were selected the ENTER 1 8 1 prompt at the right will be displayed Enter the zone list number that contains the zones to be bypassed or unbypassed Press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears 42 E nable Access Window for Action 42 GROUP 12345678 Access group s f action 42 was selected the HITO 8 X prompt at the right will be displayed Enter the group number to which the time window will apply Press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears 26 14 Section 26 Scheduling Options 50 Off normal Reminder Action 50 No action specifier is required for this action since the conditions that this will occur for are system wide 01 Time Window Enter the time window number 01 20 for which this timed 00 00 00 00 01 event is to occur As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the time window number will be displayed Press to accept entry 01 Active time Enter the activation time from 1 4 listed below Asthe number is keyed in the activation time will be displayed The choices are l Trigger at the start of the window 2 Trigger at the end of the window 3 Take effect only for the duration of the window 4 Trigger at both the start and the end of the window Example coffee break buzzer Press to accept entry Days MTWTFSSH The system will then ask for which day
175. abet and actual words in descending alphabetical order 2 Adds or removes an s or s to a vocabulary word 6 Switches between alphabet and actual word list used to accept entries 8 Saves the zone description in the system s memory 25 2 plus zone number displays the description for that zone 2 Enter the zone number to which you want to assign a descriptor For example key 001 to begin entering the description for Zone 1 key 002 for Zone 2 003 for Zone 3 etc The following will be displayed ZN 001 A Note that the first letter of the alphabet appears after the zone number and that the zone number is automatically included with the description 3 Enter the descriptor for that zone Use one of two methods as follows Assume for example that the desired description for Zonelis BACK DOOR a Press 75 followed by the 3 digit number of the first word from the fixed dictionary shown later in this section e g O 1 3 for BACK Press 6 in order to accept the word and proceed or press 8 to store the complete descriptor and exit Or b Select the first letter of the desired description note that A is already displayed Usethe 3 key to advance through the alphabet and the 1 key to go backward Press 3 key repeatedly until B appears press 1to go backwards if you happen to pass it then press 6 to display the first available word beginning with B Press 3 repeatedly to advance through the ava
176. able if using a 4285 4286 VI P Module and or if station initiated downloading will be used Enter 00 to disable ring detection Enter O1 14 for ring counts of 1 14 Enter 15 to select Answering Machine Defeat Mode which allows the system to receive calls even when a telephone answering machine is connected to the same phone line In the Answering Machine Mode the caller should let the phone ring once then hang up and call again within 30 seconds The system upon hearing one ring followed by nothing will not answer the first call but will ready itself to pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is received within 30 seconds i e the downloader calling again Must be 00 for commercial fire amp UL commercial burglary installations Note Do not enter 00 if a 4285 4286 is installed PRIMARY FORMAT oj This field selects the reporting format for use on the primary telephone number Enter the appropriate number for the primary format as follows 02L ow Speed l Contac D 22ADEMCO High Speed 32ADEM CO Express LOW SPEED FORMAT PRIMARY Enter the appropriate value O ADEM CO Low Speed 1 Sescoa R adi oni cs SECONDARY FORMAT 0 This field selects the reporting format for the secondary telephone number Enter the appropriate number for the secondary format as follows 0 2 ow Speed l Contac D 22ADEMCO High Speed 32ADEM CO Express LOW SPEED FORMAT SECONDARY oj Enter the appropriate value O ADEM CO Low Spe
177. activate and de activate as desired Each 4204CF Module adds two additional style Y supervised bell outputs to the system If 4204CF Modules are used only relays 1 and 3 on each module can be programmed The other 2 relays relays 2 and 4 on each module are used for supervision purposes This section is used to program relays to activate in response to a programmed condition i e an alarm fault of a zone etc The system can also be programmed to activate relays at specific times of day by using the 80 Scheduling Menu Mode Time Driven Events function Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules 1 Set the 4204 or 4204CF s DIP switches for a device address between 01 and 15 that is not being used by another device keypads RF receivers etc The relay module will not operate until the device address you have chosen is enabled in the control s Device Programming in the Z93 Menu Mode Programming section 2 Mount the 4204 and 4204CF Modules as per the instructions provided with these modules Connect the 4204 4204CF M odule s to the control s Keypad 1 terminals 11 14 when mounted remotely from the control they may be wired to Port 2 when mounted on or within the control s cabinet Use the flying lead cable or the screw terminals provided with each relay module to make connections 9 1 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons 3 When mounted remotely homerun each module back to the control The table below shows the maxi mu
178. actual uploading or downloading sessions Section 28 Downloading Primer On Line Control Functions The following functions can be performed while on line with a control panel Arm the system in the AWAY Mode disarm the system Bypass a zone Force the system to accept a new program download Shut down communication dialer functions non payment of monitoring fees in an owned system Shut down all security system functions non payment for a leased system Inhibit local keypad programming prevents takeover of your accounts a message for customer Command the system to upload a copy of its resident program to the office Read arming status AC power status list of faulted zones list of bypassed zones 224 event log list of zones currently in alarm list of zones currently in trouble and ECP equi pment list Set the real ti me clock Access Security Accessing the control from a remote location is protected against compromise by the use of 4 levels of protection l Seaurity code handshake The subscriber s account number as well as an 8 digit ID number known only to the office must be matched between the control and computer 2 Hang up and Call back The control panel will hang up and call the computer back at the pre programmed number only if the security codes match 3 Data encryption All data that is exchanged between the computer and control is encrypted to reduce the possibility of anyone tapp
179. age of fields 1 01 1 77 press 94 to move to 3rd page press 99 to move back to 2nd page third page of fields 2 00 2 24 press 94 to move to 4th page press 99 to move back to 3rd page fourth page of fields 3 00 3 85 Viewing Data Fields To view the contents of a data field press 7 plus the 2 digit field address The field s entries will be displayed but no changes can be made 21 2 Section 21 The Mechanics of Programming Entry Errors e faninvalid address is entered the keypad will display FC e fa program entry is improperly entered for example a larger number than that which is permitted the entry position of the keypad display will go blank e In either of the above cases simply re enter the correct field number and enter the correct data SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING COMMANDS 91 Select partition for programming partition specifi c fields 92 Will display the software revision level of the control panel 93 94 99 Go back to previous page of fields or exit Programming Mode with no Installer Code lockout Enters Menu Mode Programming Go to next page of fields 98 Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout Programming System Wide Data Fields Values for some programming fields are system wide global and some can be different for each partition partition specific Note that the partition specific programming fields are automatically skipped when
180. al opening and closing schedules can be programmed using the Time Driven E vent Programming For example a schedule for normal store openings closings can be programmed with a daily open close schedule and another open close schedule for a lunch hour can be programmed using the ti me driven event schedule programming e Refer to Time Driven Events later in this section for detailed information Open Close Reports by Exception Thesystem can help reduce communication traffic to the central station by using the Open Close Reports by Exception feature heOpen Close by Exception option suppresses these reports from being sent to the central station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected time window Reports are only sent if the arm or disarm occurs outside the assigned time window e The system keeps a record of all openings closings in its event log e fa disarming occurs during a closing window a person who arms the system forgets something and has to reenter the Opening report although outside of the opening window will not be sent as long as that disarming occurs within the closing window This option is programmed in partition specific program field 2 09 The following chart gives an example of how the Open Close by Exception reporting works Example of Open Close Exception Reporting amp Scheduling 6 01PM 5 59AM 6AM 9AM 9 01AM 3 59PM 4PM 6PM 6 01PM 5 59AM Early Opening reports will Auto disarm delay
181. amming Mode sss 21 2 ENTRY DELAY 2 23 3330 24 1 ENTRY DELAY lai opns desi tds 24 1 mA 78 21 3 ENTRXWARNING nh licei 24 10 Entry Exit 1 Type 01 sees 22 1 ENFVEXE 2 VDO DB a 7 7 9 22 2 7 0 25 25 78010 09 18 5 Event LOG c siis eres uro tss 1 6 12 10 18 1 Event Log Printer Connections 12 10 18 1 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON LINE 24 15 Event Log Programming dn 18 3 EVENT LOG FPES cete 3 33 3 0 24 15 Event Logging COmMands C 1 Event Logging Procedures n 18 3 Exception REPONS s ue 3 Pee sedet occid 26 3 4 00 013 24 1 1 24 1 Exit Delay Re Se t 1 3 2 24 11 EXIT DELAY SOUNDING iiec ae 24 14 EXIT ETFOL bc ti aaa 1 7 3 1 24 11 EXTENDED DELAY FOR TYPES 17 amp 18 24 19 Extending Closing Time 26 2 31 4 Extemal SOUndersi Laure rea Ron o MS ede RIS 15 1 False Alarm Reduction 3 1 PCG PART 68 NOTICE 2 A 4 PCC R
182. and displays an output descriptor of None Output devices are programmed via 93 Menu Mode 26 19 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 06 ON TIME The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the 07 00 PM ON time Enter the desired hour Press to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner The AM PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the 0 9 range while the cursor is under the AM PM position Press to continue 06 OFF TIME The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the 11 45 PM OFF Enter the desired hour Press to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner The AM PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the 0 9 range while the cursor is under the AM PM position Press to continue 06 DAYS MTWTFSS Toselect the days which are to be activated enter 1 7 HITO 7 x x Monday 1 An x will appear under that day indicating the output for that day is active Entering a day s number again will deactivate that day Pressing O will toggle all days on off The outputs will only bein effect for the days which have the letter x under them As the week progresses the selected days are reset to the inactive state unless the permanent option is selected next screen prompt When completed press to continue 06 Permanent Selecting Permanent 1 means that this schedule will be in 0 NO1 YESO effec
183. arate enclosure which has a tamper supervised cover he 4190WH right loop must not be used and the left loop must be EOLR supervised U L he 4278 Auxiliary Sensor Loop cannot be used he 4194 is not UL Listed e The 4297 must be powered from the VISTA 128FB Auxiliary Power Output or from a UL Listed supplementary power supply e For commercial fire installations only the first 6 zones which utilize 4 7k resistors on a 4208 Zone Expander may be used The last two zones may not be used Compatible Polling Loop Devices 8 Zone Expander Accommodates up to 8 zones via the polling loop DIP switch programmable Thefirst two zones can be either normal or fast response DIP switch selectable All zones are EOLR supervised first six zones 4 7k ohms last two zones 30k ohms provided with the 4208 2 Zone Expander Accommodates up to 2 zones via the polling loop DIP switch programmable The left zone can be EOL R supervi sed required in UL installations can accept either open or closed circuit sensors and can be set for fast response Theright zoneis unsupervised and can accept closed circuit sensors only cannot be used in UL installations Quad PIR Quad element PIR with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable Includes mirrors for both wide angle and curtain long range applications Features an auxiliary sensor loop that is nonsupervised and can accept
184. artition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby The lobby must be included as a partition to be armed disarmed and must be scheduled as the last partition armed If using auto arming make sure that the Auto Arm Delay and Auto Arm Warning periods fields 2 05 and 2 06 combined arelonger than that of any other partition that affects the lobby This will cause the lobby to arm last Master Keypad Setup and Operation Although this system has eight actual partitions it provides an extra partition strictly for the purpose of assigning keypads as master keypads for the system Any keypad assigned to Partition 9 in the Device Programming M ode in 93 M enu Mode will make that keypad a master keypad A master keypad reflects the status of the entire system Partitions 1 8 on its display at one time This is useful because it eliminates the need for a building security officer to log on to various partitions from one partition s keypad to find out where an alarm has occurred Thefollowing is a typical display SYSTEM 12345678 STATUS RRNNA B Possible status indications include A Armed Away M Armed Maximum S Armed Stay Armed Instant R Ready N Not Ready B Bypassed Ready Alarm M emory T rouble present To obtain more information regarding a particular partition enter Partition No i e 4 This will allow viewing only of that partition In order to affect that partition the user must use a code that
185. as follows 10VDC 14VDC 1 7 amps max power limited Note that the total alarm current drawn from the Aux Power 1 Aux Power 2 polling loop Bell 1 and Bell 2 outputs cannot exceed 2 3 amps for battery independent operation Each output has the following options Class B supervision style Y or no supervision Selectable to activate by individual zone assignments Selectable for Confirmation of Arming Ding 1 2 sec sounding to confirm system has armed Selectable to chime when entry exit or perimeter zones are faulted Selectable for steady or pulsing output Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2 30 minutes If you purchased a kit containing the P8524 Power Supply Module you may use this module to convert one or both VISTA 128FB 12VDC 1 7A style Y supervised bell outputs to 24VFW 1 7A style Y supervised bell outputs U L l Burglary bell circuits must be programmed for a timeout of 16 minutes or longer 2 Commercial fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be supervised 15 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Bell Circuit Supervision To supervise bell circuits do the following e Install a 2K EOL resistor Model 610 7 supplied across the last notification appliance on each bell output to be supervised Program Zones 970 Bell 1 and 971 Bell 2 for 24 Hr Trouble response zone type 19 see Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section Tounsupervise bell circuits do the
186. ay the next fire alarm present in the system Choice 35 display previous fire alarm The key when pressed will display the previous fire alarm present in the system Note Choices 34 and 35 should be used in conjunction with field 3 01 Fire Display Lock 1 28 RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND 0 Enter 0 if audible beep and display upon RF transmitter low battery condition is desired only in disarmed state Enter 1 if audible beep and display is desired in both armed and disarmed states Must be 1 for UL 1 29 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORTING 0 Enter Lif a Trouble message for RF transmitter low battery condition is to be sent to the central station Enter O if noreport for transmitter low battery is desired Note that a Trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure independent of this selection Must be 1 for UL 24 11 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 12 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK IN INTERVAL 02 Enter the check in monitoring interval in 2 hour increments Enter 02 15 ti mes 2 hours 4 30 hours Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered will result in acti vation of the response type programmed for zone 990 for the first receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and their related communication reports Enter 00 to disable receiver supervision Max 2 4 hr for UL RF TRANSMITTER CHECK IN INTERVAL 02
187. ayed if Contact ID report format has been selected Section 32 Testing TheSystem C S TRANSMIT Enter 1 YES to havethe results of the test sent to the 0 NO 1 YES central station This report will consist of a list of points that have been tested followed by a list of points that have not been tested Enter O NO if you do not want to report the results A Walk Test Start and Walk Test End report will be sent in either case if programmed When the Test Mode is activated the system will sound fire bells or any bell having a non zero response type programmed in the 93 M enu Mode for 3 seconds The system will also send a Start of Walk Test message to the central station and will light all keypad indicators and display window segments to verify that they are working properly The keypads will then display Fire Walk Test in Progress and will sound a single beep every 15 seconds while this test is active The system will build a list of all the fire zones response types 9 16 17 18 that need to be tested These points will be scrolled on the display For each point the keypad will display UNTST XXX where XXX is the point number followed by an alpha descriptor for the point If the auto test option has been selected the control panel will attempt to automatically test all of the polling loop points that have a zone response type of 9 or 16 For points that must be manually tested fault and reset each fire alarm sensor in tur
188. bal arming when it is defined see the User Access Codes section the keypad will ask Arm all or Disarm all whenever the user tries to arm or disarm the partitions he has access to from an alpha keypad This allows the user to choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed and so eliminates the automatic operation of the lobby Keep in mind however that if attempting to arm all and another affecting partition is disarmed the user will not be able to arm the lobby and the message UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION will be displayed Codes with Non Global Arming If arming with a non global code the lobby partition operation will be automatic as described by fields 1 18 and 1 19 Section 2 Planning a Partitioned System Other Methods of Arming Disarming Lobby logic remains active when or disarming a partition that affects and or arms the common lobby in one of the following manners Quick Arm Keyswitch e Wireless Button e Wireless Keypad Arming Disarming Remote y If arming or disarming remotely through V LINK or Compass downloading software the lobby will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby The lobby must be armed separately after arming all affecting partitions first Auto Arming Disarming f scheduling is used to automatically arm and or disarm partitions the common lobby partition will not automatically follow another p
189. battery standby calculations and battery selection table Panel Earth Ground Connections 4 4 l Connect the earth ground post inside the 1451 enclosure to a good earth ground use grounding methods specified in the National Electric Code 2 Usea green nut supplied to secure the wire to the ground post The earth ground wire should be the only wire under this nut 3 Run a 16AWG wire from this post to the panel s earth ground terminal terminal 30 Use a second green nut supplied to secure this wire to the ground post This method of connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the 1451 and panel are connected to different earth ground systems The panel requires this connection in order for its lightning transient protection devices and earth ground supervision to function properly SECTION 5 installing The Keypads In This Section Keypads That May Be Used Wiring to theKeypads Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads Mounting the Keypads Addressing the K eypads Preliminary Checkout Procedure Keypads That May Be Used 2 line alpha display 6139 gray or 6139R red check with local AHJ for approval of keypad color Up to 16 addressable keypads may be used in the system independent of auxiliary power considerations you may need to use an auxiliary power supply if the 1 amp aux output is exceeded Wiring to the Keypads l Determine wire gauge by referring
190. be assigned to a user number in order to function See the User Access Codes section for the procedure Wireless Keypads Wireless keypads 5827 amp 5827BD can provide another way of entering or exiting the premises They function the same as alpha keypads except when the code 73 is entered This entry will allow momentary access to ALL access points in the partition to which the keypad is assigned Programming the Wireless Keypad Enter the partition the keypad is assigned to in field 1 48 Using ACS Relays and Triggers The control can be programmed to use the PassPoint ACS s relays and triggers Programming to Control ACS Relays and Triggers Enter Relay Programming in the 93 M enu M ode Enter all the information for the relay action zone list etc For therelay type enter 3 Enter the VGM ECP address Select whether this relay is an ACS relay 0 or trigger 1 OY Mr 4o I L Enter the ACS relay or trigger number that maps to the PassPoint ACS s identification of this relay See Relay Programming in 93 Menu M ode Programming section for a detailed explanation Using ACS Zone Inputs If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones these may be used by the VISTA 128FB as hardwired zones Programming the ACS Zone Inputs 1 Enter Zone Programming in 93 Menu Mode 2 Program this zone as any other zone Indicate the input type as ACS 10 3 Enter the PassPoint ACS s zonelD 00 31 See Zone Programming in 93 Men
191. beeps and bell dings in response to fire zone faults zone type 9 16 amp 17 for the purpose of allowing proper zone operation to be checked without triggering alarms Note that the system will not be operational as an alarm system i e cannot sense alarms while this test is active The test can only be activated by the installer by entering the nstaller s Code and pressing 68 while the burglary portion of the system is disarmed This test should be conducted at periodic intervals as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction When this test is first activated the system will display USE BELL DING Enter 1 YES to havethe fire bells associated with each 0 2 NO 1 YES point sound for 3 seconds when a point is faulted Enter 0 NO if only keypad sounders are desired The next prompt will be displayed AUTO TEST DET Enter 1 YES to havethe system automatically test all 0 NO 1 YES polling loop points with a fire response type 9 or 16 Other fire zones will have to be tested manually Enter O NO totest every point manually The next prompt will be displayed For true detector sensitivity tests and for compliance with fire codes you must enter O NO tothis question LOG RESULTS Enter 1 YES to have the system log each point as it is 02 NO 1 YES tested A list of untested points will also be logged Enter O NO if you do not want the system to keep track of the results The next prompt will only be displ
192. begins Auto arm delay begins be 0 system is i Auto disarm occurs after delay Auto arm warning begins manually disarmed before No reports sent if if auto disarm is enabled No reports sent if opening window begins system disarmed system is armed Early and Late Opening during this time sent if manual disarming has not SMS SHITO nd Closing reports are window irati window 3 EF A occurred at expiration of Missed Closing reports will programmable options in t an arming occurs a opening window or disarmed if user g rep the Report Code Closing report is sent Openi A needs to re enter li if 0 programming section to the central station Se RETTU TERORS SDS premises aS M MM Te EE They are not dependent regardless of how the sent if disarm occurs after the expiration of closing Auto arm occurs after warning expires if auto arm is enabled Missed Opening reports will be on the programming of Exception Reporting opening window expires window the Exception Reporting option is set Early Closing reports will be Late Closing reports will be option sent if manual arming occurs sent if system is manually before the closing window armed after the closing begins window expires Missed Opening Closing type reports are programmed in the Report Code programming section The Exception Reporting option must be set for these to be sent 26 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Scheduling
193. ble panic alarms zone type 7 will trigger Pin 3 INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING 0 Enter Lif no test report is to be sent if any other type of report was sent since the last test report Enter 0 if test reports are to be sent at the set intervals regardless of whether or not other reports have been sent Must be O for UL applications TEST REPORT INTERVAL 024 Enter the test reporting interval in hours 001 999 Enter 000 if notest reporting is desired If a test report is desired enter a test code in Report Code Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section Set first test report time in field 83 M ax 024 for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE 1 Enter 1 if upon power up after a prolonged power loss which caused the system s battery to discharge the system will assume the system status prior to the power loss Enter O if the system is always to power up in a disarmed state When the system powers up armed an alarm will occur 3 minutes after arming if a zone is faulted When so armed the system reports closing as User 40 if Open Close reporting for installer was enabled in field 39 Notethat if the previous state was armed AWAY or STAY the system may not respond to sensor changes for a small period of time 1 3 min which allows sensors such as PIRs to stabilize Note Must be 1for UL applications Note that authority levels 0 or 5 cannot be used to
194. ccess Control Dialer E vents Vista Gateway ModuleWiring and Programming General Information TheVISTA 128FB is capable of interacting with the ADEM CO PassPoint Access Control System PassPoint ACS The VISTA 128FB processes fire burglary arm disarm and other information The PassPoint ACS processes card reader information and controls the locking and unlocking of doors The sharing of information between the two systems is provided by the Vista Gateway Module VGM The VGM is connected between the ECP bus keypad terminals of the control and the network bus of the PassPoint ACS see Figure 14 1 The control sends the VGM its status information event log entries and entry exit requests the inputs are programmed with response type access point from keypads hardwired zones and rf transmitters The VGM then reformats and retransmits this information to the Main Logic Board MLB on the PassPoint ACS network bus TheVISTA 128FB is ableto control the following on the PassPoint ACS Uncommitted relays e Triggers The PassPoint ACS is able to control the following on the VISTA 128F B e Relays Arming disarming schedules e Macros e Keypad display e Time date synchronization of the two systems See the documentation that accompanies the PassPoint ACS for details The PassPoint ACS can dedicate some of its inputs for use as regular VISTA 128FB hardwired zones the zone responsetype is ACS The PassPoint ACS can also ut
195. ce to the right 4 Moves the cursor one space to the left 7 Inserts a space at the cursor location erasing any character at that location 8 Saves the new word in the system s memory Returns to Description Entry Mode Enter the custom word number 01 20 you want to create For example if you are creating the first word or word string enter 01 when creating the second word enter 02 and so on A cursor will now appear at the beginning of the second line Type the word using one of two methods as follows a Press followed by the 2 digit entry for the first letter you would like to display e g 6 5 for A When the desired character appears press 6 to select it The cursor will then move to the right in position for the next character Press 7 plus the 2 digit entry for the next letter of the word Or b Press 3to advance through the list of symbols numbers and letters Press 1to move back through the list When you have reached the desired character press 6 to select it The cursor will then move tothe right in position for the next character Repeat step 3 to create the desired custom word or words Press 4 to move the cursor tothe left if necessary Press 7 to enter a blank or to erase an existing character E ach word or word string cannot exceed 10 characters Save the word by pressing 8 This will return you to the CUSTOM WORD display The custom word or string of words will be a
196. cedure In This Section Connecting the AC Transformer Earth Ground Connections Backup Power Calculations Connecting the Backup Battery to the Control Total Control Pane Load Worksheets Connecting the AC Transformer Use the ADEMCO 1451 Transformer with enclosure Supplied with the VISTA 128F B control when the PS24 Power Supply will not be used This transformer provides 18 VAC 72 VA secondary winding for powering the control Use the 1451 24 Transformer to power the VISTA 128F B Control and the PS24 Power Supply module when the PS24 is being used This transformer provides an 18VAC 72VA secondary winding for powering the control and a 30VAC 188VA secondary winding for powering the PS24 The control panel kit that you purchased will come with the appropriate transformer Both transformers have a manually resettable circuit breaker mounted inside a protective metal enclosure Follow the instructions below for mounting the enclosure and for wiring the 18VAC winding of either transformer Follow the instructions provided with the PS24 for wiring the 30VAC winding of the 1451 24 Transformer Before connecting the AC transformer connect all zone polling loop keypad auxiliary device and bell circuit wiring Mount and wire the 1451 transformer as follows 1 Remove the front cover of the enclosure 2 Mount the enclosure to the wall near the VISTA 128F B panel The enclosure has 4 mounting holes on its back surface for thi
197. certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communications ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur mat riel aux prises d abonn s sauf dans les cas precis pr vus par les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations du mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es pas un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le fournisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise en terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques de r seau de conduites d eau s il y en a soient raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales Avertissement L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir recours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou un lectricien selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign chaque dispositif terminal pour viter toute surcharge indique le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord un circuit t l phonique boucl utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit boucl peut tre constitu e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble
198. cesserat 1 111 0 31 5 601111111111 010903 31 5 9 9 LETT 31 6 Manual Relay Activation Mode F O 6 31 7 SECTION 32 Testing the System ali 32 1 UE I ee 32 1 32 1 Fire Drill Test Code FA 469 177 11 1 1 1 1 1 0 32 2 One Man Fire Walk Test Code 68 iii 32 2 Code 7 111111110 32 3 3 3311 1111111 1 111 1 0 32 4 T FOUDICCORAHONS c Um T Um 32 4 2 tothe USE 1 1 32 6 CF n scio ped aar 7 1 1 3 31 1 32
199. code 73 code 74 10 PassPoint ACS input Right loops refer to the use of the right loop on a 4190WH Zone E xpander Module and or 4278 PIR which allow hardwired devices to be monitored by the polling loop If programming hardwired DIP switch polling loop or 5700 Series devices the summary display appears after completing this entry Press to continue If input type 09 was selected this prompt will be displayed Enter the ECP address of the keypad that is being used for entry exit for this access point 01 31 If input type 10 was selected this prompt will be displayed Enter the PassPoint ACS zone ID that this VISTA zone maps to 00 31 If input type selected was a serial number type this prompt will be displayed Enter 1 for devices that monitor maintenance signals e g 4192SDM 4192SDTM 4192CPM 5808 Otherwise enter 0 Press to continue Section 25 493 Menu Mode Programming 010 LOOP The cursor should now be flashing on the loop number The 1 default is 1 To accept this press If a different loop number is being used on this device enter the loop number 1 4 and press to continue Theloop designations for various RF transmitters are shown in Figure 25 1 The loop number must be entered here whether using Zone Programming or Sequential Mode to enroll serial numbers f you want to delete the serial number enter 0 and press The system will then prompt DELETE S N Press
200. control is not reaching the keypad Please check your wiring 5 4 In This Section SECTION 6 Basic Hardwired Zones 001 008 Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1 8 Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1 8 Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2 Compatible 2 Wire Smoke Detectors Wiring 4 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 8 Compatible 4 Wire Smoke Detectors FireAlarm Verification for Smoke Detectors Zone 6 Tamper Configuration Wiring 2 Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 Compatible Glassbreak Detectors Checkout Procedure for H ardwired Zones Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1 8 EOLR supervision optional for zones 3 8 supporting N O or N C sensors EOLR supervision required for fire and UL Burglary installations Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions U p to 16 2 wire smoke detectors each on zones 1 and 2 32 total 4 wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1 8 power to 4 wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device Up to 50 2 wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8 Individually assignable to bell outputs and or aux relay Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1 8 Connect sensors contacts to the hardwire zone terminals 15 through 27 Connect N C devices in series with the high side of the loop The 2K EOL resistor must be connected in series with the devices following the last device Conne
201. cs must be programmed for Partition 1 SECTION 3 False Alarm Reduction Features In This Section General Information Exit Error Logic and Related Reports Recent Close Report Exit Delay Reset Cross Zoning Call Waiting Defeat Logic General Information This control supports features that help minimize false alarms Most false alarms occur upon exiting the premises either due to environmental factors or because the zone s resistance to the control may be on the edge of acceptability We call this condition a swinger Features which prevent false alarms due to these circumstances are e Exit Error Logic and related reports e Exit Delay Reset e Cross Zoning Exit Error Logic and Related Reports UL This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation This feature is intended to reduce the incidence of false alarms due to exit doors that are left open after the exit delay has expired If this feature is enabled in program field 1 20 the following will occur At the end of the exit delay if a door is left open or an interior zone is faulted the system will start the entry delay period and will sound the bell s siren s and keypad sounders for the duration of entry delay This gives the user timeto re enter the premises and disarm the system before exit error occurs If the user does not re enter the premises and disarm the system the system will bypass the faulted ent
202. ct N O devices in parallel across theloop The2K EOL resistor must be connected across the loop wires at the last device The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for zones 1 2 and 8 and 300 ohms for all other zones excluding the 2K EOL resistor 6 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2 6 2 Zones 1 and 2 have the added capability of supporting 2 wire smoke detectors E ach zone provides enough standby current 2 mA to power up to sixteen of the smoke detectors listed below Each zone provides only enough alarm current 20 mA to power one smoke detector in the alarmed state When assigned zone type 9 or 16 the second entry of a User Code OFF sequence at a keypad will interrupt power to these zones to allow detectors to be reset following an alarm 1 Connect 2 wire smoke detectors across zone 1 and or zone 2 terminals 15 through 18 as shown in Figure 6 1 Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors 2 If EOL resistors are presently connected across zone 1 and zone 2 terminals remove them The EOL resistors must be connected across the loop wires of each zone at the last detector 2K EOLR resistors must be used on fire zones standard discrete 2K EOLR resistors may be used on burglary and panic zones and must be connected across the loop wires of each zone at the last detector The alarm current provided by zones 1 and 2 will support only one smoke detector
203. d In field 71 enter the phone number of the paging service for Open Close reports Up to 17 digits may be entered field 72 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Open Close reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered In field 73 enter the phone number of the paging service for System reports Up to 17 digits may be entered In field 74 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for System reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered In field 75 enter the phone number of the paging service for Test reports Up to 17 digits may be entered In field 76 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Test reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered In field 1 70 enable the events for the event log In field 1 72 enable the Printer On Line option This must be turned on to allow events to be sent to the pager interface when they occur Field 3 19 MUST be programmed with a 1 in order for the printer and pager to operate properly 4100APG LED Indications Below is a table outlining the LED indications 19 4 Steady Blinking om Pulse x GnBattery BN Norowe namuo mUe Calinrges PageRetry ide TaephoneBusy NoDialTne OK 7333 CC rer OK 0 Nebwa 0 TT notata ow SECTION 20 Final Power Up Pro
204. d Schedule Change The programming sequence that follows assumes that you will be entering all reports for the system at one time n actuality you may skip from one main menu option to another by pressing O N at each main menu option Main menu options are highlighted in bold text Toenter report codes do the following Enter Program M ode Installer Code 8000 Then press 93 Enter 0 N at each main menu option until the REPORT CODE PROG prompt is displayed REPORT CODE PROG Press 1 Y to enter to Report Code Programming 1 YES 0 NO 0 Zone Alarm Reports ALARM ID DIGIT 1 YES 0 NO 0 ENTER ZONE NO 000 QUIT 001 001 REPORT CODE 1st 00 2nd 00 000 ENTER ZONE NO 000 QUIT 001 QUIT REPORT MENU 1 YES 0 NO 0 Restore Supervisory Codes RESTR SUPV CODE 1 YES 0 NO 0 ENTER ZN FOR GRP 000 QUIT 001 ALARM RESTORE GRP 001 016 TROUBLE GRP 001 016 000 000 TROUBLE RESTORE GRP 001 016 BYPASS GRP 001 016 000 000 Section 25 93 Menu ModeProgramming Press 1 Y to enter Alarm Report Codes for zones Press 0 N to skip to the next main menu option Enter the zone number for which you are entering the report code Press to continue Enter the first digit of the Alarm report code double digit entry and press Enter the 2nd digit of the Alarm Report code Press to continue Enter the zone number for which you are entering the report code Wh
205. d transmitters should be periodically tested by the installer for battery life i e 5701 e After replacing a low or dead battery activate the transmitter and enter the User Code OFF to clear its memory of the low battery signal Installing the Transmitters A variety of RF system transmitters can be used to make up the wireless zones These include window door units smoke detectors PI Rs and panic buttons Zone number assignments can be from 1 to 63 1 Set the DIP switches on each 5700 Series transmitter to the appropriate zone number and House ID Refer to the Compatible Transmitters T able for zone numbers and programming information for each particular transmitter 2 Install each transmitter in accordance with the instructions provided with the transmitter Before permanently mounting the transmitters make sure reception of each transmitter s signal at the proposed mounting location is adequate To do this perform a Go No Go Test which is described later in this section 3 Program the transmitters using the Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode 8 5 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons Wireless Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters E ach RF zone can be assigned any zone response type such as entry exit interior perimeter etc see the Zone Types Definitions section for explanations of each zone type For 5700 Series transmitters each response type uses a certain range of zone numbers Each range
206. des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 Appendix A 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Appendix A 6 APPENDIX B DIP Switch Tables Appendix B 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR ADDRESSABLE POLLING LOOP DEVICES 4208 ZONE EXPANDER 00000000 SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 A 1 2 3 4 5 UP DN Ni POS 1 LOOPS 1 amp 2 RESPONSE TIME W TABLE FAST SLOW A UP DN B DN UP SIDE VIEW UP THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD DN DN B 2 3 4 5 THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD UP DN Appendix B 2 4192D 4192SDT 4192CP SMOKE DETECTORS SIDE VIEW UP APPLIES TO TABLE A ONLY SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 1il2345 6 78 SIDE VIEW DN POS 1 MUST BE DOWN d THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD DN DN 4190WH ZONE EXPANDER APPLIES TO TABLE A amp B ONLY SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 A 23456 78 UP DN Me A SIDE VIEW WITH TABLE A B DN POS 1MUSTBE DN UP THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD UP DN DEVICE ID DIP SW TCH POS TION N 3 7 8 UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP
207. des the system wil prompt QUIT REPORT MENU If you have completely finished entering report codes press 1 1 YES 0 NO 0 Y to quit Report Code Programming If you wish to enter other system report codes enter 0 N Press to continue 25 15 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions System Group 4 Codes SYSTEM GROUP 4 To enter System Group 8 codes press 1 Y 1 YES 0 NO 0 WALK TEST START Enter the first digit of the Fire Test Start Report Code Press ist 00 2nd 00 Enter the second digit of the report code Press to continue Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner Other codes in System Group 2 are Walk Test End Off N ormal Once you have entered these report codes the system will prompt QUIT REPORT MENU If you have completely finished entering report codes press 1 12 YES 0 NO 0 Y to quit Report Code Programming QUIT MENU MODE Enter 1to exit back to normal programming mode Enter O to 1 YES 0 NO 0 stay in Menu Mode Alpha Descriptors Programming General Information Y ou can program a user friendly English language description location for all protection zones relays keypad panics polling loop short and RF receiver supervision troubles E ach description can be composed of a combination of words up to 3 that are selected from a vocabulary of 244 words stored in memory and any word can have an s or s added to it NOTE Due to the use of 3 digit zone numbers the first w
208. detector inside every bedroom where someone sleeps with the door partly or completely closed Smoke could be blocked by the closed door Also an alarm in the hallway outside may not wake up the sleeper if the door is closed Install a smoke detector inside bedrooms where electrical appliances such as portable heaters air conditioners or humidifiers are used Install a smoke detector at both ends of a hallway if the hallway is more than 40 feet 12 meters long Install smoke detectors in any room where an alarm control is located or in any room where alarm control connections to an AC source or phone lines are made If detectors are not so located a fire within the room could prevent the control from reporting a fire or an intrusion A KITCHEN DINING BDRM E LIVING ROOM BDRM E Bl Smoke Detectors for Minimum Protection Smoke Detectors for Additional Protectior Heat Activated Detectors _ A GARAGE TV ROOM BEDROOM o UL This control complies with NFPA requirements for temporal pulse sounding of fire notification devices B BEDROOM De TO BEDROOM BEDROOM LVNG RM CLOSED DOOR BASEMENT Recommendations For Proper Intrusion Protection For proper intrusion coverage sensors should be located at every possible point of entry to a home or commercial premises This would include any skylights that may be present and the upper windows in a multi leve
209. disarmed faulted E E zone s and or interior zones will be bypassed and the system will arm Generates an Exit Error report by user and by zone so the central station knows it was an exit alarm and who caused it Enhanced Fire Walk Test Mode Provides the installer the ability to test fire zones more quickly and reliably Thefollowing features apply Automatic test of all integrated RPM polling loop devices that have the automatic test feature Dynamic display of all fire zones that remain untested while test is in progress Ability to log results all fire zones tested and untested in system s event log Ability to report results all fire zones tested and untested to the central station Built in User s Manual and Descriptor Review For end user convenience the Vista 128F B contains a built in User s Manual By depressing any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds a brief explanation of that function scrolls across the alpha numeric display In addition all programmed zone descriptors can be displayed one at a time by pressing the READY key for 5 seconds This serves as a check for installers to be sure all descriptors are entered properly Section 1 General Descri pti on Improved Downloading Features Uploads and downloads at 300 baud making upload download speed faster e Ability to upload ECP devices their physical addresses programmed addresses and firmware revision levels from the control Agency Listings
210. e 25 27 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Choices for Start Stop Zone Types 00 No Response Not Used 01 Entry Exit 1 02 Entry exit 2 03 Perimeter 04 I nterior Follower 05 Trouble Day Alarm Night 06 24 Hr Silent 07 24 Hr Audible 08 24 Hr Auxiliary 09 FireAlarm or Trouble 10 I nterior W Delay 16 Fire With Verification 17 Fire Waterflow 23 NoAlarm Response for output relay activation such as for access control purposes 27 Access Point allows more than one relay to be controlled by activation if access point request 02 START ACS PT 00 31 00 02 START PART 02 STOP ZN LIST NO LIST 02 STOP ZN TYP 02 STOP ACS PT 00 31 02 STOP PART 25 28 00 18 Fire Supervisory 19 24 Hr Trouble 20 Arming STAY 21 Arming AWAY 22 Disarming Code Off 30 On Second Off 31 Endof Exit Time 32 Start of Entry Time 33 Any Burglary Alarm 34 Code 71 Key Entry 35 Code 72 Key Entry 36 At Bell Timeout 37 2 Times Bell Timeout 38 Chime 39 Fire Alarm 40 Bypassing 41 AC Power Fail 42 System Battery Low 43 Communication failure 44 RF Low Battery Choices for Start Stop System Operation 45 Polling Loop Failure 51 RF Receiver Failure 52 Kissoff 54 Fire Zone Reset 55 Disarm 1 Minute 56 XX Minutes enter XX in field 1 74 stop condition only 57 YY Seconds enter YY in field 1 75 stop condition
211. e As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press to continue Hol A1 Window 2 Enter the second time window number for holidays for this 00 00 00 00 00 access schedule As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press to continue Quit Enter O at the Quit prompt to return to the main menu 12 YES 0 NO 0 choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling M enu M ode Temporary Schedules E ach partition can be assigned a temporary schedule which will override the regular open close schedule and the holiday schedule This schedule takes effect as soon as it is programmed and remains active for up to one week Temporary Schedule Worksheet Partition Windows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1 pisamwindw 1 I stantime himm 1 1111 himm S Arm Window stantime himm 11111 himm 0 11111 2 Disarm Window Jo o stantime himm himm Arm Window stantime m S o o jSerme 3 8 Disarm window 11 stantime himm 111 o jSerme himm stantime himm mw 1 I 26 17 VIS
212. e It must also be set in order to execute scheduling programs time driven events Use a 6139 alpha keypad to set the real time clock or set the clock via the downloader software Only users with Installer or Master authority level can set the real time clock Setting the Time and Date 1 Enter installer or Master Code 63 Typical display shows TIME DATE THU 12 01 AM 01 01 90 2 Theday of the week is automatically calculated based on the date entered Time and date entries are made by simply entering the appropriate hour minute month day and year e Press to accept the entered value The cursor then moves to the right e Press to move the cursor to the left of the display to the previous position e Enter the correct hour Then press to move to the minutes field and make the correct entry e Press again then press any key 0 9 to set AM PM Press any key again to change AM to PM or PM to AM e Press to move cursor to the month field position and enter the correct month using a 2 digit entry e Press and enter the correct date e Press and enter the correct year 3 Exit Clock Mode by pressing after the cursor is in the year position 29 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 29 2 SECTION 30 User Access Codes In This Section General Information User Codes amp Leads of Authority To Add a Master Manager or Operator Code To Changea
213. e proceed as follows 1 Select Default Screen Mode 4 The keypad will ask for the partition number for this message Enter the partition number Press to accept entry Thefollowing will appear DISARMED READY TO ARM A cursor will be present at the extreme left of the first line over the first star Press 6 to move the cursor to the right and 4 to move the cursor to the left Press 7 to insert spaces or erase existing characters Create the message For example to replace READY TO ARM with the message SERVICE 424 0177 proceed as follows Press 6 to move the cursor to the right and continue until the cursor is positioned over the first location on the second line Press 3to advance through the alphabet to the first desired character in this case S Press 1to go backward when necessary When the desired character is reached press 6 The cursor will then move to the next position ready for entry of the next character in this example E When the cursor reaches a position over an existing character press 3 or 1 to advance or back up from that character in the alphabet Proceed in this manner until all characters in the message have been entered Save the message Store the new display message in memory by pressing 8 The system will ask for a new partition number Enter Oto quit or 1 8 for a new partition number 25 19 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions ALPHA DESCRIPTOR VOCAB
214. e 1st digit and enter 11 for the 2nd digit of the code disable code 00 11 Must be disabled for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations KEYPAD PANIC ENABLES partition specific 001 995 996 999 Enter 1to enable the appropriate keypad panics used in this partition Otherwise enter O 23 24 25 26 27 28 Section 24 Data Fidd Descriptions MULTIPLE ALARMS partition specific m Determines whether or not more than one alarm can be sounded in a given zone during an armed period Note that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently than allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration This selection applies to local sounding and has no impact on the number of communication messages transmitted Refer to 84 Swinger Suppression for limiting communication messages Enter Lif this feature is desired Enter 0 if not desired Must be 1 for UL installations IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER 0 Enter 1 to disable ignore tamper Enter O if tamper detection is desired Must be 0 for UL installations Note Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or 5800 Series transmitters This option is used to disable tamper detection on these devices BURG TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8 1 Enter 1to allow optional triggering of the voltage output on Pin 3 of the J 2 header to include zone response type 8 24 hr auxiliary Enter O if only burglary and audi
215. e Code 1st Digit A Alarm Code 1st digit User Number 1st amp 2nd digits Z Typically Zone Number 2nd digit Gg Test Code 1st amp 2nd digits Tt Trouble Code 1st 2nd digits R Restore Code Alarm 1st amp 2nd digits Bb Bypass Code 1st 2nd digits RTt Restore Code Trbl 1st amp 2nd digits EAc AC Loss Code 1st amp 2nd digits Rgb Restore Code Byps 1st amp 2nd digits LLg Low Battery Code 1st amp 2nd digits RAA C Restore Code AC 1st amp 2nd digits 0 Open Code 1st Digit R Lpg Restore Code Bat Ist amp 2nd digits Zone numbers for IX or B 2999 3 or C 996 1 or A 2995 Duress 992 ADE MCO Contact ID Reporting takes the following format CCCC QEEE GG ZZZ where CCCC Customer subscriber ID 0 Event qualifier where E new event and R restore EEE Event code 3 hexadecimal digits GG Partition number system messages show 00 ZZZ Zone contact D number reporting the alarm or user number for Open Close reports System status messages AC L oss Walk Test etc contain zeroes in the ZZZ location ADEMCO High Speed Reporting events by channel Channels 1 through 8 could have one of the following conditions 1 NEW EVENT 2 OPENING Status Channel Always 2 3 RESTORE 4 CLOSING Status Channel Always 4 5 NORMAL NO EVENT TO REPORT 6 PREVIOUSLY REPORTED NOT YET RESTORED NOTE Channel 1 will contain the user ID
216. e Q for UL 1 52 SEND CANCEL IF ALARM OFF partition specific 0 1 53 Enter lif Cancel reports are to be sent when the system is disarmed after an alarm regardless of how much time has gone by Enter O if Cancel reports are to be sent within bell timeout period only DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK 0 Enter 1 10 disable the callback requirement for downloading Enter Oto require a callback Must be O for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations 1 56 AC 60Hz or 50Hz 0 Enter 1 for 50 Hz Standard or 0 for 60 Hz Standard Must be set to O for U S installations this is the default 24 13 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 14 1 57 1 58 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM 0 Enter 1tohavethe system arm disarm in accordance with the button s user s global arming settings Enter O if the button is not to be used to global arm the system however home partition arming will still occur ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM 0 Enter 1to allow the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones when the system When attempting to arm the system the keypad will beep once after pressing the button if any faulted zones are present If this feature is enabled the user should then press the button again within 4 seconds to force bypass those zones and arm the system Enter O if RF button force bypass is not desired 1 60 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICA
217. e polling loop worksheet Enter total calculated subtotals of all listed outputs then add to get the combined current Section 20 Final Power U p Procedure BELL 1 OUTPUT Total Current Device Model Device Current X of Units Standby Alarm OO D Lo pee DT Po UL pex DT Po DT eee DT pe DT eee 6 17 200006 BELL 2 OUTPUT Total Current Device Model Device Current X of Units Standby Alarm I Lo Pr DT Po DT DD P00 O17ampmax ORK POLLING LOOP Total Current Standby Alarm Enter worksheet total both standby amp alarm columns Polling Loop Subtotal COMBINED AUX POWER BELL AND Total Current POLLING LOOP Standby Alarm Aux Power 1 Output Subtotal Aux Power 2 Output Subtotal Bell 1 Output Subtotal EMEN Bell 2 Output Subtotal MEN LE Polling Loop Subtotal Add all subtotals Cannot exceed 1 0 amp max standby 2 3 amp max alarm 20 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions These values are fixed VISTA 128FB PCB CURRENT Total Current Includes 2 wire smoke detector loading on zones 1 amp 2 and trigger output currents 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module 5mA 1
218. each in the alarmed state 2 WIRE SMOKE DETECTOR 10 SINHO 000 Figure 6 1 2 Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1 can also be connected to Zone 2 terminals 17 and 18 Section 6 Basic Hardwired Zones 001 008 Compatible 2 Wire Smoke Detectors Y ou may use up to 16 2 wire smoke detectors each on zones 1 and 2 listed in the table below DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL Photoelectric direct wire System Sensor 2400 Photoelectric duct detect System Sensor 2451 w DH400 base Photoelectric w heat System Sensor lonization duct detector System Sensor sensor direct wire 2400TH w DH 400 base 1451DH Photoelectric w B401B System Sensor 2451 lonization direct wire System Sensor 1100 base Photoelectric w heat System Sensor lonization w B110LP base System Sensor 1151 sensor and B401B base 2451TH onization direct wire System Sensor 1400 Photoelectric direct wire System Sensor 2100 lonization w B401B base System Sensor 1451 Photoelectric w heat sensor System Sensor 2100T direct wire Photoelectric duct detect System Sensor 2451 Photoelectric w B110LP base System Sensor 2151 w DH 400 base U L These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use with the VISTA 128FB and are the only 2 wire smoke detectors that may be used Wiring 4 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 8 When programmed for fire warning usage all zones can monitor 4 wire smoke detectors zone types 9 16 N
219. ed 1 Sescoa R adi oni cs CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0 Enter 1 for either or both primary secondary formats to send a verification digit to validate the message at the receiver without having to send two message rounds Selection is valid for 3 1 4 1 and 442 reports Enter O if not desired Section 24 Data Field Descriptions 50 SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT oj 51 52 53 56 57 58 59 Enter 0 if Radionics format is to be used with hexadecimal 0 9 B F reporting Enter 1 if Sescoa format is to be used with only numeric reporting 0 9 Note that selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers DUAL REPORTING 0 This field allows all reports to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers Enter 1 11 all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers If used with Split Reporting option 1 1 34 Alarms go to both primary and secondary numbers while all other reports go to secondary only If used with Split Reporting option 2 alarms go to both lines Open Close and Test messages go to secondary only while all other reports go to primary If used with Split Reporting option 3 Fire Alarms and Supervisory reports go to primary all reports go to secondary STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY L LI LI LJ LJ L Alm Hst Byp Trbl Opn Cls Low Batt Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the primary phone number default is 0 Default is 000000
220. ed alarms if programmed by pressing the panic keys and Z 1 and and or 3 and If the system has been programmed for audible emergency the keypad will emit a loud steady alarm sound The word ALARM and a descriptor 999 will be displayed for and If 1and are pressed a 995 will be displayed if 3 and are pressed a 996 will be displayed Silence the alarm by entering the security code and pressing OFF If the system has been programmed for silent panic there will be no audible alarms or displays A report will be sent to the central station however 3 Notify the central station that all tests are finished and verify results with them Trouble Conditions Supervisory Messages e Adisplay of SU PV accompanied by a zone number 001 128 and an alpha descriptor if programmed indicates that a fire supervisory condition exists on that zone This means that the operation of the fire alarm system may be compromised Check or Trouble Messages e Adisplay of CHECK or TRBL as per field 3 00 accompanied by a zone number 001 128 and an alpha descriptor indicates that a problem exists with that zone Zone trouble may be caused by one of the following conditions A hardwired fire zone is open broken wire A Day Night zone zone type 5 is faulted A polling loop zone is not seen by the control panel A polling loop zone has been tampered cover removed on a 4190 A wireless zone has not checked in during
221. ed and enabled in the system s Device Programming in the 93 Menu Mode 3 Set each keypad to an individual address 00 30 according to the keypad s instructions Set an alpha keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher addresses 00 and 01 are enabled in the system s default program Any keypads set for address 02 and above will appear blank until they are enabled in the system s program Each keypad must be set for a different address K eypads set to the Nonaddressable M ode address 31 will interfere with other keypads as well as other devices connected to the keypad terminals 4 After addresses are set the green READY LED should light and the words DISARMED READY TO ARM should be displayed on keypads set to addresses 00 and 01 5 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 5 fthe READY message does not appear on any of the keypads in the system in either of the partitions or a NOT READY message is displayed check the keypad wiring connections Make sure each of the 8 basic hardwired zones has a 2000 ohm resistor connected across its terminals 6 When the proper READY message is displayed on the keypad s addressed at 00 and 01 the system is functioning properly 7 Donot remove the EOL resistors until you are ready to make connections to the hardwired zones to allow for testing described later in the manual If an OC or OPEN CIRCUIT message is present on the keypad data from the
222. ed to Partition 1 e Keypads assignable to one of 8 partitions or to Master partition 9 to view system status e Ability to assign relays to one or all 8 partitions e Ability to display fire and or burglary and panic and or trouble conditions at all other partitions keypads selectable option e Certain system options selectable for each partition such as entry exit delay and subscriber account number User Codes Accommodates 150 user codes all of which can operate any or all partitions Certain characteristics must be assigned to each user code which are as follows e Authority level Master Manager or several other Operator levels Opening Closing central station reporting option e What partitions the code can operate e Global arming capability ability to arm all partitions the code has access to in one command e Useof an RF button to arm and disarm the system RF key must first be enrolled into the system Peripheral Devices Supports up to 31 addressable devices which can be any combination of keypads 6139 6139R RF receivers 4281 5881 relay modules 4204 4204CF and 4285 4286 VIP module Peripheral Devices have the following characteristics e Each device set to an individual address physically according to the device s instructions Each device enabled in the system using the Device Programming M ode covered later in this manual At least one 2 line alpha keypad 6139 6139R must be connected to the
223. el is not successful after its numerous attempts the keypad will display Comm F ailure Reporting Formats Thefollowing chart defines the three sets of handshake kissoff frequencies that the panel supports and the different formats that can be sent for each FORMAT TIME HANDSHAKE TRANSMITS DATA KISSOFF TRANSMIT 1400Hz 1900Hz 10PPS 1400Hz Under 15 secs Standard report Sescoa Rad 2300Hz 1800Hz 20PPS 2300Hz Under 10 secs 3 1 Standard report 4 1 H E Speed 1400 2300Hz DTMF 10 cps 1400Hz Contact ID 1400 2300Hz DTMF 10 cps 1400Hz 27 1 VISTA 128FB Installation I nstructions 27 2 ADVISORY ADEMCO s Contact I D reporting is capable of uniquely reporting all 128 zones of information as well as openings and closings for all 128 users to central stations equipped with the ADEM CO 685 receiver using software level 4 4 or higher Must be level 4 7 or higher to fully support all new VISTA 128FB report codes 685 software levels below 4 4 cannot support Contact ID reporting If you need to update your 685 receiver contact your distributor Thefollowing describes each format in greater detail 3 1 and 4 1 Standard Comprised of a 3 or 4 digit subscriber number and a single Formats digit report code e g Alarm Trouble Restore Open Close etc 3 1 and 4 1 Expanded Comprised of a 3 or 4 digit subscriber number and a two Formats digit report code Thefirst digit is displayed on the first line
224. en pressed will then be displayed 2 lines of text are displayed at a time This function operates in either the armed or the disarmed state Panic Keys There are three panic key pairs shown below that if programmed can be used to manually initiate alarms and send a report to the central station E ach key pair can be individually programmed for 24 Hour Silent Audible or Auxiliary Emergency responses as well as Fire The panic function is activated when the appropriate key pair is pressed at the same time The panicfunctions are identified by the system as follows PANIC Displayed as Zone 1 995 For alpha keypads these panic keys 3 996 can also be programmed with an alpha descriptor 999 For the panic functions to be of practical value the system must be connected to a central station 31 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Speed Key D Macros 31 6 The system supports up to 32 Speed K ey macro commands A Speed K ey command is a series of keystrokes stored in the system memory and activated when a programmed lettered key is pressed Each Speed Key command can include 32 keystrokes Typical Speed K ey functions include Arming sequences that involve first bypassing certain zones before arming Seldom used but repeatable sequences e Relay activation sequences Lettered keys A B C can be assigned a specific Speed Key function by entering a Speed Key number 1 32 in field 1 26 Pr
225. en all zone Alarm Codes have been programmed enter 000 to Quit Press to continue If you have completely finished entering report codes press 1 Y to quit Report Code Programming If you wish to enter other system report codes enter O N Press to continue Press 1 Y to enter Restore and Supervisory Codes for zones Enter one zone for each group of 16 zones 001 016 017 032 etc Enter the first digit of the Alarm Restore Report Code for this group of zones double digit entry The second digit will bethe ID second digit of the Alarm Report Code for each zone if programmed Press to continue Enter the first digit of the Trouble Report Code for this group of zones double digit entry The second digit will bethelD second digit of the Alarm Report Code for each zone if programmed Press to continue Enter the first digit of the trouble restore code single digit entry and press The second digit will be the ID second digit of the alarm report code for each zone if programmed Press to continue Enter the first digit of the Bypass Report Code double digit entry and press The second digit will be the ID second digit of the Alarm Report Code for each zone if programmed Press to continue 25 13 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions QUIT REPORT MENU 1 YES 0 NO 0 BYPASS RESTORE GRP 001 016 000 ENTER ZN FOR GRP 000 QUIT 017 System Group 1 Codes
226. entering 90 NOTE This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is used field 34 This account number can be the same as the primary account number LOBBY PARTITION 0 Enter the Common Lobby Partition 1 8 Enter O if none AFFECTS LOBBY partition specific 0 Enter Lif this partition affects the common lobby The system will not arm the lobby unless this partition is armed already Also will causelobby to disarm when this partition disarms Enter O if it does not ARMS LOBBY partition specific 0 Enter lif arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the common lobby partition automatically Can only arm lobby if all other affecting partitions are armed To enable this field field 1 18 must also be enabled partition specific Enter O if arming this partition will not attempt to arm the common lobby partition EXIT ERROR LOGIC ENABLE 0 Enter 1to enable entry exit doors and interior points will be bypassed if left open Enter O if Exit Error Logicis not desired Must be 0 for UL commercial burglary installations EXIT DELAY RESET oj Enter 1toreset exit delay to 60 seconds after door is closed Enter O if exit delay not to be reset Must be 0 for UL commercial burglary installations Section 24 Data Field Descriptions 1 22 CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE 00 00 Enter the first pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period of each other
227. entify zones To display descriptors the system must be disarmed and ready to arm Press and hold the READY key until the built in instructions for that key appear then release the key The zone descriptors will appear one at a time for about 2 3 seconds each For faster viewing press the READY key to display the next descriptor in numerical order and so on When all descriptors have been displayed the control will exit Display Mode Enter the Security Code and press the OFF key to exit Display Mode before all descriptors have been displayed Viewing Downloaded Messages Users may occasionally receive a message from their installation company displayed on an alpha keypad When this occurs the keypad will display M essage Press O for 5 secs Instruct the user to press and hold the 0 key to display the central station s message Note that the system must be in the READY state to view these messages Using the Built in User s Manual An abbreviated User s Manual is stored in the system s memory and can be particularly useful to the end user if the printed User s Manual is not conveniently accessible when the user needs to perform a seldom used and unfamiliar system procedure The Built in User s Guide is displayed by simply pressing any of the function keys e g OFF AWAY STAY MAXIMUM BYPASS INSTANT CODE TEST READY and CHIME for approximately 5 seconds and then releasing it Abbreviated instructions relative to the key that has be
228. eports to the primary and secondary central stations Wiring the Long Range Radio to the Control Connect the data in out terminals and voltage input terminals of the radio to the control s keypad connection points terminals 11 12 13 and 14 as shown below D BLACK 12 nmm LONG RANGE 13 RADIO YELLOW CONTROL TERMINALS Figure 13 1 Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals Programming the Control for the Long Range Radio The control s subscriber I D s can be passed to the LRR and incorporated into the transmitted data or the LRR can transmit the subscriber D programmed in its own EEPROM see Device Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programmi ng section An option exists to send the reports only via the LRR and bypass the control s dialer completely field 56 Thereis an option to stop transmissions via the LRR if communication via the control s dialer to the central station was successful field 57 TheLRR reporting options are defined by selecting categories of events for each subscriber ID Field 58 is for selecting the events for the primary subscriber s I D field 59 is for selecting the events for the secondary subscriber s ID The reporting categories are Alarms Troubles Bypasses Openings Closings System E vents and Tests The control can be programmed to transmit these reports by partition Trouble Messages Thefollowing messages will be displayed on the 6139 alpha keypad when a problem exists in the Long
229. er being used will not operate with these pins high then dip the blue CTS white DSR or red CD jumpers on the 4100SM Module to set the corresponding signal floating Important pins on the RS232C cable are Pin 3 data out Pin 7 ground and Pin 20 DTR ready The DTR signal as measured at 4100SM TB1 should be high 9 5 14VDC when the printer is powered properly connected on line and ready to print This signal will below 0 1 5VDC when the printer is not powered not properly connected off line or out of paper TheVISTA 128FB will not send printing data to the printer unless the DTR signal is high Section 18 Event Log Options Programming Event Log Options 1 With at least one alpha keypad 6139 6139R wired and set to a proper address temporarily apply power to the system 2 Enter Data Field Programming Mode Installer Code 8000 Program the following data fields 1 70 EVENT LOG TYPES 1 enable O disable for each type 1 71 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT 0 12 hr 1224 hr 1 72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON LINE O disable 1 enable 1 73 PRINTER BAUD RATE 12300 0 1200 4 Enter Report Code Programming in the 93 Menu Mode to program report codes for the event log System Group 74 codes 5 Exit Program Mode by pressing 99 If you need more information about actual programming procedures see The Mechanics of Programming section Event Logging Procedures In order for proper time and date stamping to occur the
230. ertificated burglary service refer to the special requirements and Figure 4 2 Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing The panel door must be supervised Mount the clip on tamper switch supplied to the cabinet s right side wall as shown in the diagram below and wire it to zone 6 Usea bell with a tamper protected housing such as the ADEMCO AB12 The bell housing s tamper switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired to zone 6 Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition Program it for day trouble night alarm zone type 5 when only one burglary partition is used Program it for 24 hr audible alarm zone type 7 when more than one burglary partition is used Enablethe Zone 6 Alternate Tamper Function program field 3 17 e All wiring between the bell and panel must be run in conduit Remaining wires do not need to be run in conduit e All wiring not run in conduit must exit from the knockout openings on the bottom or back of the cabinet e All unused knockouts must be plugged using the disc plugs and carriage bolts supplied as indicated in the diagram below e Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox using the 18 one inch long Phillips head screws supplied after all wiring programming and checkout procedures have been compl eted CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS Shows typical local Grade A listing installation RUN BELL WIRES PLUG THIS IN CONDUIT uice KNOC
231. es 7 4 Section 7 2 WirePolling Loop Expansion Polling Loop Supervision A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on its supervisory zone zone 997 and reports as a trouble condition only As such a polling loop should be assigned either zone type 05 or type 19 if annunciation as a trouble condition is desired If a device on the polling loop fails the panel cannot see that device the partition or partitions that use that device will display a trouble condition for all zones associated with that device If the panel is armed when a device fails the zones associated with that device will cause an alarm on the corresponding partition s A trouble on zone 997 will not prevent a partition from being armed as long as all polling loop zones on that partition are bypassed Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones After installation of all polling loop zones is complete each partition of the security system should be checked as follows 1 Besurethat all devices and sensors connected to the polling loop are not in faulted state Doors and windows with contacts should be closed PIRs should be covered use a cloth to mask them temporarily if necessary 2 With all hardwired and polling loop zones intact the alpha keypads connected to the system should display DISARMED READY TO ARM 3 If the keypad s begins beeping and displays the word CHECK or TRBL along with a zone or zone numbers the system ei
232. eset Battery saving feature disconnects power from noncritical loads 4 hours after AC power loss Optional Output Relays Accommodates the use of 32 relay outputs using ADEM CO s 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules Each 4204 module provides four Form C relays for general purpose use Each 4204CF provides two style Y supervised bell outputs Relay outputs have the following characteristics Can be programmed to activate in response to system events Can be programmed to activate using time intervals Can be used for additional style Y supervised bell outputs 4204CF only Can be activated manually using the 70 Relay Command M ode Can be supervised by control panel zones 601 632 Can each have an alpha descriptor assigned to it Optional Vista Interactive Phone Module Supports the ADEM CO 4285 4286 VIP Module This permits access to the security system to do the following UL 1 4 Obtain system status information Arm and disarm security system Control relays The 4285 4286 VIP Module is not Listed for use with the VISTA 128FB Control Panel in a UL commercial installation Section 1 General Descri pti on Access Control f programmed provides users with a command which activates relays to open access doors e g lobby door to turn on lights etc Each partition can be assigned any number of access control relays up to 32 for the system By using the Vista Gateway Module VGM the control can be connected to the ADEM
233. f two zones must be faulted within a 5 minute period of each other to cause an alarm on either zone This prevents momentary faults from one of the zones causing an alarm condition Y ou can select four sets of cross zones keeping in mind the following e Both must protect the same area Both must bein the same partition e Afirezone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area see warning below Note The four sets of cross zones are programmed in data fields 1 22 1 23 1 24 and 1 25 DO NOT cross zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone and BOTH must be protecting the same physical area no walls or partitions separating them Consult NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements As a guideline we recommend that spacing between fire cross zones be no farther than 30 ft Section 3 FalseAlarm Reduction F eatures Conditions That Affect Cross Zone Operation l In the event of a continuous fault lasting at least 5 minutes on one of the paired zones a fault on the second zone will cause an alarm immediately 2 If oneof the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to O the cross zoning feature will not apply 3 If an entry exit zone is paired with an interior follower zone be sure to enter the entry exit zone as the first zone of the pair This will ensure that the entry delay time is started
234. followed by a second line where the first digit is repeated 3 or 4 times and followed by the second digit This is the expanded digit Comprised of a 4 digit subscriber number and 2 digit report code ADE MCO Contact ID Comprised of a 4 digit subscriber number 1 digit event Reporting F ormat qualifier new or restore 3 digit event code 2 digit partition number and 3 digit zone number user number or system status number ADEMCO High Speed Comprised of 13 digits as follows A 4 digit account number eight channels of zone information 1 8 or duress plus 9 15 one status channel which identifies the type of events being reported in the eight zone locations Report 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 442 Standard Expanded Low Spd or Express Alarm SSS S A SSS S A SSSS AZ AAA A Z Trouble SSS S T SSS S T SSSS Tt TTT T t Bypass SSS S B SSS S B SSSS Bb BBB B b AC Loss SSS S E SSS S E SSSS EAc EEE E Ac Low Batt SSS S L SSS S L SSSS LLp LLL L Lp Open SSS S O SSS S O SSSS OU OOO O U Close SSS S C SSS S C SSSS CU CCC C U Test SSS S G SSS S G SSSS Gg GGG G g Section 27 System Communications Restore SSS S R SSS S R SSSS RZ Alarm RRR R Z AC Restore SSS S RA SSS S RA SSSSRA Ac RARARA RAJAc LoBat Res SSS S R SSS S R SSSS R Lp Ry Ry Ry Ry Lp Trouble Res SSS S RT SSS S RT SSSS RTt RTRTRT RT t Bypass Res SSS S Rp SSS S Rp S555 Rgb RgRpRg Rp b Where SSS or SSSS Subscriber ID C Clos
235. for the partition number desired 21 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 2 Enter a partition specific field number e g 09 to begin programming When the first field s entry is completed the next partition specific field will automatically be displayed When all partition specific fields are programmed the system returns to the global programming fields page 1 fields Toreturn tothe global program fields before finishing all fields enter any global field number 3 Repeat this procedure for each partition in the installation PROGRAMMING PARTITION SPECIFIC FIELDS Press 91 to select a partition i Enter the partition to be programmed l Enter a partition specific field and make entry i After partition specific fields are programmed press 91 to select next partition Enter any global field number to return to the global fields at any time 93 Menu Mode Programming The 93 Menu Mode is a mode through which much of the system s programming is done It offers main menu selections for the following Zone Programming Sequential Mode Programming e Report Code Programming Alpha Programming Device Programming Relay Programming e Relay Voice Descriptors e Custom Index Programming VI P Module substitute words Clear Serial RF Press 0 NO or 1 YES in response to the displayed menu selection Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence The keypad will then prompt you wi
236. form most other commands using the telephone keypad e Allows the user to control relays using the telephone keypad e Provides voice annunciation over the phone to confirm any command that is entered Announces many of the same words that would normally be displayed on an alpha keypad under the same system conditions Refer to the words in bold on the Alpha Vocabulary list found in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section Can be supervised for connection to control panel annunciated and reported as zone 804 Detailed operating instructions for phone access to the security system are provided with the VIP Module In addition a Phone Access User s Guide is supplied with the VIP Module for the user of the system 10 1 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons Mounting the VIP Module The VIP Module may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or if this is not possi ble on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it Pry off the VIP Module s cover prior to wiring 1 When the VIP Module is mounted inside the control cabinet attach it to the cabinet s interior surface with 2 faced adhesive tape Y ou may leave the module s cover off if it is mounted within the cabinet Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board 2 When the module is to be mounted outside the cabinet use the screw holes at the rear to mount horizontally or vertically 2 faced adhesive tape may be
237. g service It will transmit to the pager any message programmed to be sent to the event log printer even if the printer is not being used The types of messages are divided into 6 categories Alarms Troubles B ypasses Opens Closes System and Test The VISTA 128F B can be programmed so each type of message transmits to a different pager E ach type has its own programming field for the pager phone number and pager ID Of course these could be sent to the same pager by programming those fields with the same pager phone number and ID The 4100APG will hang up between each message Multiple messages will be sent in the order received If the 4100APG cannot make contact with the paging service it will retry up to 10 times If theinterfaceloses contact with the VISTA 128FB it will send a message to the paging service to notify the user The pager interface must be wired to a different phone line than the VISTA 128FB itself Otherwise the communication of both will not function properly Mounting the 4100APG The 4100APG may be mounted in the control cabinet if spaceis available or if this is not possible on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it Pry off the pager interface s cover prior to wiring l When the 4100APG is mounted inside the control cabinet attach it to the cabinet s interior surface with 2 faced adhesive tape Y ou may leave the interface s cover off if it is mounted within the cabinet 19 1 VISTA 128FB Installa
238. gram form show the number of entries required for each field When an entry is completed the keypad beeps three ti mes and advances to the next field At this point you can either make the required entry in the new field or press the next field number you want to program There are several question and answer modes which we call M enu modes that can be accessed once Data Field Program Mode has been entered These modes prompt the user for information and for this reason a 2 line alpha keypad 6139 6139R is required System and Communication Defaults Thesystemis shipped with a set of pre programmed default values that are designed to meet the needs of many installations If desired these can be changed by the installer to suit specific needs e There are four sets of pre programmed communication defaults available including Low Speed 442 Express ADEMCO High Speed and ADEMCO Contact ID Loading one of these defaults automatically programs industry standard codes that will suit most of your needs e These defaults can be changed directly from the 6139 R Alpha Keypad or they can be changed by using V LINK or Compass downloading software be sure that the software version used includes the VI STA 128F B Downloading can be performed either remotely from an IBM compatible computer using an approved modem or at the job site direct wire download using the 4100SM Serial Module 21 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instruct
239. ground Terminal 7 and will not havethis problem 2 You may also get an earth ground fault indication if you use a printer or PC which has a 3 prong grounded power cord If this occurs first verify that Pin 1 chassis ground is isolated from Pin 7 signal ground on the 4100SM s RS232 connector Early production versions of the 4100SM have an unmarked 3 8 long bare wire jumper lying near the Pin 1 side of the RS232 connector which must be cut to isolate these pins Then verify that these pins are isolated on your printer s RS232 connector Follow the instructions provided with your printer to isolate these pins if required 12 9 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Direct Wire Downloading 12 10 TheVISTA 128FB can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line but by using a 4100SM Serial Module and V LINK or Compass Downloading Software This method of downloading is referred to as DIRECT WIRE downloading Connect a PC which runs the downloading software to the 4100SM Module as specified in the module s instructions Connect the 4100SM to the panel s J 2 header Refer to the Downloading Primer section for wiring connections Direct wire downloading can be initiated by following the procedures described in the V LINK or Compass manual SECTION 13 7820 Long Range Radio In This Section General Information Wiring the Long RangeRadio to the Control Programming the Control for the Long Range Radio
240. has access to that partition Also in order for a user of any partition to log on to Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions that user must have access to all partitions Otherwise access will be denied VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Thefollowing would be displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 Loading Dock Window on Partition 1 Warehouse when logging on from a keypad on Partition 9 WHSE DISARMED HIT FOR FAULTS Pressing will cause the following display to appear at Partition 1 s keypad s FAULT 002 LOADING DOCK WINDOW Additional zone faults will be displayed one at a time To display a new partition s status press F Partition No The Armed LED on a master keypad will be lit only if all partitions have been armed successfully The Ready LED will belit only if all partitions are ready to arm Neither LED will belit if only some partitions are armed and or only some partitions are ready The sounder on a master keypad will reflect the sound of the most critical condition on all of the partitions The priority of the sounds is as follows a Pulsing fire alarm sounds b Steady burglar alarm sounds c Trouble sounds rapid beeping Pressing any key on the master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition exists silences the sounder A master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1 Master keypad panics are sent to Partition 1 and will activate on Partition 1 Therefore pani
241. he condition that will trigger the auxiliary relay Options are 0 Trouble Supervisory 1 Alarm silenced by Code OFF 2 Smoke detector reset 3 Battery save 4 Alarm silenced by Code 67 3 82 BURG FEATURES ON PARTITION 1 ENABLE mM Enter 1 to enable burglary features on partition 1 Enter Oto disable Arm AWAY STAY INSTANT MAXIMUM Test and Chime functions burglary features are automatically enabled on other partitions 3 85 SYSTEM ZONE BYPASS INHIBIT m Enter Oto prevent bypass of fire and system supervisory zones Enter 1to allow only thelnstaller Code to bypass Enter 2 to allow Installer or Master Code to bypass Note Applies only to fire zone types 9 16 17 and 18 and system zones 970 977 Applies to Partition 1 only 24 19 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 20 SECTION 25 93 Menu Mode Programming In This Section 193 Main Menu Options Zone Programming Sequential Mode Programming Report Code Programming Alpha Descriptors Programming Device Programming Relay Programming ZoneList Programming Relay Voice Descriptors Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation RF Serial Number Clear Mode 93 Main Menu Options The following fields should be programmed before beginning 2 00 Number of Partitions 1 32 HF Receiver Type U L For commercial fire and UL Installations verify that wireless and audio alarm verification features are disabled
242. hen used for keyswitch operation If the keyswitch is used the fire and panic alarm voltage triggers automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for support of the Keyswitch LEDs Reports openings closing by user 0 if reporting is enabled in field 40 BELL 1 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING part specific 0 Enter 1to enable 1 2 second external alarm sounding ding at the end of exit delay or after kissoff from the central station if sending closing reports Otherwise enter O Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations Bell test on arming is required in UL commercial burglary installations AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING 0 Enter 1to enable sounding at the keypad rapid beeping when AC power is lost sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss Enter O if no AC power loss keypad sounding is desired RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT m Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the central station during a community blackout Enter 1torandomize AC loss reporting between 10 and 40 min after an actual AC loss Enter 2 for 6 12 hours after AC loss Enter O for normal AC loss reporting about 2 minutes after actual AC loss VIP MODULE PHONE CODE pot J If a 4285 4286 Voice Module is being used enter the 2 digit phone code used to access the system Enter 01 09 for first digit and enter 11 for or 12 for for second digit To disable the voice module enter 00 for th
243. hich the system responds to faults in that zone In addition there are three keypad activated zones panic keys see note for each partition a polling loop supervision zone and four RF supervisory zones two for each RF receiver installed Zone types are defined below Type 00 Zone Not Used Program a zone with this zone type if the zone is not used Type 01 Entry Exit 1 Burglary This zone type provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted if the control is armed in the inthe INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode no entry delay is provided Exit delay begins whenever the control is armed regardless of the arming mode selected These delays are programmable This zone type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on doors through which primary entry and exit will take place AWAY or STAY Mode When the panel is armed 22 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Type 02 Entry Exit 2 Burglary This zone type provides a secondary entry delay whenever the zone is faulted if the panel is armed in the AWAY and STAY Mode When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode no entry delay is provided Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is armed regardless of the arming mode selected These delays are programmable This zone type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on doors through which more time is needed to get to and from the keypad Delay times for this zone type must be greater than zone type 01 e g
244. iate the required local annunciation and dialer reports TheVISTA 128F B may be programmed to automatically transmit test reports to a central station at intervals ranging from once per hour to once per 999 hours field 27 UL requires that a test report be transmitted at least once every 24 hours The VISTA 128FB can be programmed to send the first report at any time of the day or on any day of the week after power up field 83 32 1 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Fire Drill Test code 7 69 This test causes fire bells or any bell having a non zero response type in the 93 Menu M ode to be activated in either steady or pulsing manner as programmed in field 3 15 for the purpose of conducting a fire drill or a bell test This test can only be activated by the installer or a master user from Partition 1 keypads by entering the corresponding security code and pressing 69 while the burglary portion of the system is disarmed Keypads display FIRE DRILL ACTIVE whilethis test is active Thetest is stopped by entering any security code and pressing OFF Note that the system continues to monitor all 24 hour zones fire panic etc while this test is active and will end the test when an alarm condition is detected This test should be conducted at periodic intervals as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction One Man Fire Walk Test code 7 68 32 2 This test causes the system to sound console
245. ic pager Scheduling Provides the following scheduling capabilities e Open close schedules for control of arming disarming and reporting e Holiday schedules allows different time windows for open close schedules e Timed events for activation of relays auto bypassing and unbypassing auto arming and disarming etc 1 5 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Access schedules for limiting system access to users by time End User Output Programming M ode provides 20 ti mers for relay control Communications Formats Supports the following formats for the primary and secondary central station receivers ADEMCO Low Speed Standard or Expanded Sescoa R adi oni cs ADEMCO Express ADEMCO High Speed ADEM CO Contact ID Long Range Radio interface ECP Audio Alarm Verification Option Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification AAV option which can be used in conjunction with an output relay to permit voice dialog between an operator at the central station and a person at the premises An optional AAV unit such as Eagle model 1250 is required UL The Eagle Model 1250 AAV unit is not UL Listed Cross Zoning Capability Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless its cross zone is also faulted within 5 minutes Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature System can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused by leaving an entry exit door open If not subsequently
246. ific partition RELAY GROUP 01 FIRE BELL 12 YES 0 NO RESTRICTION 1 YES 0 NO RELAY TYPE VGM ECP ADDRESS RLY TRIG SEL ACS RLY TRIG ECP ADDRESS MODULE RELAY Section 25 93 Menu Mode Programming Relays may be grouped for common activation by time driven events commands 06 10 E nter 0 no group or 1 8 for a specific group number Press to continue Ifthis relay is on a supervised 4204CF Module it may be used as an additional fire bell Enter 1 Y if itis enter O if it is not This tells the system which relays are to be activated during a fire drill or Fire Walk Test Press to continue The system may have some devices which are not intended to be under end user control such as relays activating fire doors or machinery Enter 1 11 the end user will be restricted from accessing this relay group If this is a fire bell it will be restricted automatically Press to continue Enter 1for relay modules 4204 4204CF Enter 3 for relays triggers on the PassPoint ACS system If 3 was selected for the relay type this prompt will be displayed Enter the ECP address of the Vista Gateway Module VGM 00 30 Enter Ofor ACS relay Enter 1 for ACS trigger Enter the PassPoint ACS relay number or trigger number 00 31 For relay modules 4204 4204CF enter the actual relay module s address 01 15 as set by its DIP switches Up to 8 modules can be installed in a system For
247. ilable words until the word BACK is displayed To add an s or s if you need to press 2 The first depression adds an s the second depression adds an s the third depression displays no character to erase the character the fourth depression adds an s etc 4 Acceptthe word To accept the word press 6 which switches back to the alphabet list for the next word or press 8to store the complete descriptor and then exit 25 17 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 25 18 5 Select the next word For selection of the next word DOOR repeat step 3a word 057 or 3b but selecting the word DOOR To accept the word press 6 which again switches back to alphabet list 6 Storethe descriptor When all desired words have been entered press 8 to store the description in memory Toreview the zone descriptors key plus zone number e g 001 To edit zone descriptors key plus zone number e g 001 7 Exit Zone Description Mode enter 000 Custom Words U p to 20 installer defined words can be added to the built in vocabulary E ach of the 20 words can actually consist of several words but bear in mind that a maximum of 10 characters can be used for each word string 1 Select CUSTOM WORD Mode The keys perform the following functions 3 Advances through alphabet in ascending order 1 Advances through alphabet in descending order 6 Selects desired letter moves the cursor 1 spa
248. ilize the VISTA s dialer for reports to the central station VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Access Control of an Entry Exit Point The control can send entry and exit requests to the PassPoint ACS utilizing keypads hardwired zones and rf transmitters A zone is programmed with a response type 27 access point and an appropriate input type console hardwired rf Using the Alpha Keypad Five entries can be entered at the keypad to access a door e Code 3 e Code 4 access point These entries allow a user to gain access to an access point in the PassPoint system or to trigger a relay on the control The following entries require the installation of the VGM and the PassPoint ACS e Code 5 access point function The selectable functions are Grant Protect and Bypass Selecting Grant will temporarily unlock a door to force an access Selecting Protect will cause the door to unlock only when a valid access is received Selecting Bypass will cause the door to be permanently unlocked to allow conti nuous access e Code 6 access point script This entry will run a script for the access point selected by the operator on the PassPoint ACS Seethe documentati on that accompanies the PassPoint ACS a detailed explanation of what a script is and how to create one e Code 7 access point function This entry will unbypass a PassPoint ACS zone Programming the keypad l Enter Zone Programming in the
249. inet Door Tamper Switch and for the ADEM CO AB12 Grade A Burglary Bell Box Tamper Switches and Tamper Liner The bell housing s tamper switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired to zone 6 6 4 Section 6 Basic Hardwired Zones 001 008 Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition Program it for day trouble night alarm zone type 5 when only one burglary partition is used Program it for 24 hr audible alarm zone type 7 when more than one burglary partition is used Enable the Zone 6 Alternate Tamper Function program field 3 17 When set in this manner the zone will trigger a trouble when the panel is disarmed and an alarm when the panel is armed when the zone senses either an open or a short or when an earth ground fault caused by drilling through the AB12 housing is detected Seethe External Sounders section for information on AB 12 bell wiring Wiring 2 Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors To Zone 8 U se zone 8 for connection of compatible 2 wire latching type glassbreak detectors Wire as follows 1 Connect all detectors in parallel across zone 8 terminals 26 and 27 See Figure 6 3 Hemove the 2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals You must connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector GLASSBREAK DETECTOR 2000 OHMS EOLR LATCHING TYPE GLASS BREAK DETECTOR LOOP Figure 6 3 Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 After an alarm the first code
250. ing the line and corrupting data 4 Operator access levels Operators may be assigned various levels of access to the downloader each having its own log on code The access levels allow the operators read write capabilities of the customers account information For a detailed explanation of the access levels see the downloading software U ser Manual NOTES E ach time the control panel is accessed successfully a Callback Requested report is sent to the central station if programmed When downloading the keypad displays MODEM COMM After each download or a save an automatic time stamp is done indicating the date and time of thelast download or save and the operator D number A complete hard copy of each individual account can be obtained by connecting a printer to the computer Refer to your computer Owner s Manual or contact your dealer for printer recommendati ons Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading TheVISTA 128FB can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line but by using a 4100SM Serial Module and V LINK or Compass Downloading Software The direct wire downloading connection is to be temporary and is not part of the permanent installation Direct wire downloading is meant as a tool for the installer during the installation process 28 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions The connections between the control and the 4100SM are different than those shown in the 4100SM Installation
251. ion 2 5 SECTION 3 False Alarm Reduction Features 3 1 6 0 OUT 3 1 Exit Error Logic and Related Reports 0 3 1 pa mc 3 11 1 3 2 Sb EERE E EE E ET E T 1111 3 2 SS 1111 11 11371 1 1 1 3 2 Call Wating Daat LOCI 770 07 7787 1 3 3 SECTION 4 Installing the Control 2 4 1 Mounting the Control Cabinet
252. ion to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows a When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed the lobby will also be disarmed b The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed Section 2 Planning a Partitioned System C Arming the partition that is programmed to arm the lobby will cause the system to automatically attempt to arm the lobby If any faults exist in the lobby partition or another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed the lobby cannot be armed and the message UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION will be displayed Y ou cannot select a partition to arm the lobby unless it has first been selected to affect the lobby Enable field 1 18 before enabling field 1 19 Thefollowing chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate if different options are set for another partition in fields 1 18 and 1 19 1 18 1 19 Disarms when Attempts to Can be armed Affects Lobby Arms Lobby partition arm when if other disarms partition partitions arms disarmed ENTRY NOT ALLOWED Example Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup OFFICE 1 OFFICE 2 COMMON LOBBY MAIN ENTRANCE User 1 has access to Office 1 and the Common Lobby User 2 has access to Office and the Common Lobby Office 1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby but not ar
253. ions The factory loaded defaults 97 enable keypad addresses 00 01 only A keypad set to one of these addresses must be used to program the system Entering Data Field Programming Mode Enter Program M ode using either method A or B A Press both the and keys at the same time within 30 seconds after power is applied to the control B Enter the Installer Code 8 0 0 0 The factory installer code can be changed once in the Program M ode field 00 Local keypad programming can be disabled through V LINK or Compass downloading software If this is done programming can only be accomplished via the downloading software Moving from One Page of Programming to Another The data fields are grouped into four levels referred to as pages The first page IS accessed as soon as Programming M ode is entered The second third and fourth pages of data fields are indicated at the keypad by a 1 2 and 3 respectively in front of the 2 digit field address The words ALT PROGRAM MODE is displayed along with 100 200 or 300 depending on which page of program fields is accessed to indicate the higher page of fields l Toaccessthe next level of fields press 94 2 Then press XX where XX the last two digits of the program field and make the desired entry 3 Toreturn to the previous page of fields press 99 press 94 to move to 2nd page press 99 to move back to 1st page second p
254. ired enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR OPENS CLOSES This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Open Close reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR OPENS CLOSES This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Open Close reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SYSTEM This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for System reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number 74 75 76 79 80 83 84 85 Section 24 Data Field Descriptions PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SYSTEM This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for System reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TEST This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Test reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID
255. is Fire Alarms Panic Alarms Burglary Alarms Fire Troubles Non Fire Troubles Bypasses Openings Closings Test messages and all other types of reports The priority here is based on the assumption that multiple events occur at approximately the same time Thereisn t an event priority of messages transmitted via the radio to the central station Messages are transmitted on a First n First out basis There are two subscriber I D s programmed into the LRR primary and secondary These correspond to the two subscriber D s programmed into the control for each partition If a subscriber ID for a partition is not programmed disabling reports to that central station 13 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions phone number for that partition the events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID in the LRR will not be transmitted If the event is to be reported to both phone numbers dual reporting then reporting through the LRR will be done in an alternating sequence The first event in the queue will be transmitted to the primary radio central station Then this event will be transmitted to the secondary radio central station If the event was reported successfully via the control s dialer it will be deleted from the radio s transmission queue The control will then proceed to the next event in the queue If split reporting is selected for the VISTA 128F B then the LRR will follow that option The radio will send the appropriate r
256. it depending on report format primary subscriber account number 00 09 B F 11 15 Each number requires a 2 digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits B F If a 3 digit account number is to be used enter data only in the first 3 locations leaving the last one unfilled by entering a This field is used to enter the primary central station phone number up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause This is the phone number the control will use to transmit Alarm and status messages to the central station Do not fill unused spaces Note Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is entered and no dual split options have been programmed the number of attempts to the primary number before dialing the secondary number is determined by field 3 21 SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER This field is used to enter the secondary phone number up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause The secondary phone number is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful or if split dual reporting is desired Do not fill unused spaces If this field is programmed a secondary subscri ber account number field 90 must also be programmed can be the same as the primary account number 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Section 24 Data Field Descriptions DOWNLOAD PHONE NUMBER This field is applicable only if downloading will be uti
257. itch operates as follows A momentary short across Zone 7 will silence alarm bell sounds i e turn off Bell 1 Bell 2 and the aux relay if programmed for alarms only if a fire alarm is present Outputs will re sound automatically if a new fire alarm condition is detected Burglary alarms will not trigger the bell output until a User Code OFF is entered at the keypad A momentary short has no effect if there are nofire alarms present This mode is used when you want to provide the fire department with keyswitch silence capability without compromising the burglary system s security LED indications are defined as follows GREEN RED MEANING OFF OFF DISARMED amp NOT READY ON OFF DISARMED amp READY OFF ON STEADY ARMED AWAY OFF SLOW FLASH ARMED STAY OFF RAPID FLASH ALARM MEMORY Open Close reporting for the keyswitch is enabled in field 40 and the keyswitch reports as User 0 5140LED Indicator Module 12 4 An optional 5140LED Indicator Module can be used in municipalities which require dedicated indicators for communicator fault status The 5140LED provides the following indicators 1 AC POWER e ON if AC power is present e OFF if AC power is not present Section 12 J 2 Trigger Outputs COMM FAILURE ON if maximum number of attempts were made field 3 21 to transmit a message to the central station Enter User Code OFF following a successful transmission to turn off OFF if normal DIALER
258. itters e Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions ndividually assignable to bell outputs and or aux relay e Individually assignable to access points U Wireless devices may not be used in UL commercial burglary installations UL Listing of the L 5808 Smoke Detector for commercial fire installations is pending Wireless Systems Available TheVISTA 128FB supports wireless zones that may be used exdusively or in addition to hardwire and or polling loop zones The system supports two different wireless systems which have many similarities but notable differences in the programming of the transmitters for each system 8 1 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons Thefollowing receivers may be used with this system Each supports the number of zones shown below 5700 Series Reor Zones 5881EH upto 128 use w U L864 installations In Canada 5800 systems must use 5882 Series receivers 5882L 5882H Information in this manual relative to the 5881 Receivers applies as well to the 5882 Receivers 5881 and 5882 Receivers can all use the same transmitters RF System Operation and Supervision 8 2 Thereceiver responds to status and alarm signals from wireless transmitters at 345MHz in theUSA 315MHz in Canada within a nominal range of 200 feet and relays this information to the control Each supervised transmitter sends a supervisory signal to the receiver every 70 90 minutes If after a programmed inter
259. keypad s assigned to those partitions Assign users to partitions Enable the GOTO feature program field 2 18 for each partition a multiple access user can log on to alpha keypad only 7 Program partition specific fields see the Data Field Descriptions section Common Lobby Logic When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building that shared partition may be assigned as the common lobby partition for the system program field 1 17 An example of this might be in a medical building where there are two doctors offices and a common entrance area see example that follows explanation This option employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby Two programmi ng fields affect the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other partitions They are 1 18 Affects Lobby and 1 19 Arms Lobby 1 18 Affects Lobby must be programmed by partition Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows a When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed the lobby will also be disarmed b The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed C Arming the last partition that affects the lobby will not cause the system to automatically attempt to arm the lobby 1 19 Arms Lobby must be programmed by partition Setting this opt
260. l as large swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation The wireless system can identify a true low battery situation thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that given point within the system Some transmitters e g 5802 5802CP and 5803 contain long life but nonreplaceable batteries At the end of their life the complete unit must be replaced and a new serial number enrolled by the control Button type transmitters e g 5801 5802 5802CP amp 5803 should be periodically tested by the installer for battery life Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until ready to enroll After enrolling batteries need not be removed Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters Wireless Panic Has four pushbuttons each with Transmitter a unique input loop code Programmable responses e g Panic Arm Stay Arm Away Disarm etc For arming disarming functions button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user 8 9 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters cont d Input Type Description 5802 Pendant Personal Emergency Transmitter 5802CP Belt Clip Personal Emergency Transmitter 5802M N Miniature Personal Emergency Transmitter 5804 Wireless K ey Transmitter 5806 5807 Wireless Photoelectric 5808 Smoke Detectors 5816 Door Window Trans
261. l building addition we recommend that radio backup be used in a security system so that alarm signals can still be sent to the alarm monitoring station in the event that the telephone lines are out of order alarm signals are normally sent over the phone lines if connected to an alarm monitoring station Table of Contents RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER PROTECTION rrr iii HOW TO USE THIS MANU AL xi CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL e rero rrr nnn nnn nnn nnn xii SECTION 1 General Description 1 1 6 02 TT 111111111111 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 2 Planning a Partitioned System 2 1 yere T UU UU EA 2 1 Setting Up a Partitioned SYS s mt ei 2 2 ComON LODY LOJ 2 2 Master Keypad Setup and Operat
262. l display all zone numbers of wireless units programmed for that partition 2 Fault each wireless zone causing each device to transmit As the system receives a signal from each of the transmitters the zone number of that transmitter will disappear from the display A transmitter not enrolled 5800 Series or whose DIP switch is not set correctly 5700 Series will not turn off its zone number 3 Toexit the Transmitter Sniffer Mode enter Installer Code 1 Be sure to perform the Transmitter Sniffer Mode Test for every partition that has wireless transmitters programmed Go No Go Test Mode Before mounting transmitters permanently conduct Go No Go Tests to verify adequate signal strength and reorient or relocate transmitters if necessary Make sure that all partitions are disarmed when performing this test Sincethe wireless receiver gain is reduced checking in this mode assists in determining good mounting locations for the transmitters and verifies that the RF transmission has sufficient signal amplitude margin for the installed system 1 Enter Installer Code 5 Note For multi partition systems make sure all partitions are disarmed before entering this mode 2 Oncetransmitters are placed in their desired locations and the approximate length of wire to be run to sensors is connected to the transmitter s screw terminals fault each transmitter Note Do not conduct this test with your hand wrapped around the t
263. l panels installed after une 30 1993 must be provided with a backup battery which has sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its attached peripheral devices for 24 hours in the intended standby condition followed by at least 4 minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition Be sure to size the battery to meet this requirement Appendix A 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION FCC STATEMENT This equipment has been tested to FCC requirements and has been found acceptable for use The FCC requires the following statement for your information This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interference to radio and television reception It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures If using an indoor antenna have a quality outdoor a
264. less Call Waiting is being used Otherwise enter O Section 24 Data Field Descriptions 1 43 PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING partition specific 0 Enter Lif backlighting for the keypad display is to remain on at all times Enter O if the display should remain unlit unless a key is pressed The backlighting then turns off again after a period of keypad inactivity Note that when a key is pressed display backlighting turns on for all keypads in that partition 1 44 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT 0 Enter 1to enable tamper detection on wireless keypad Enter O if tamper detection is not desired If more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid sequence arm disarm etc the control pane will disable the wireless keypad The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired keypad 1 45 EXIT DELAY SOUNDING partition specific 0 Enter lif beeps from the keypads during exit delay are desired Enter 0 for no keypad sound during exit delay 1 47 CHIME ON BELL 1 partition specific 0 Enter 1for chime annunciation using the external alarm sounder If not desired enter O 1 48 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT 0 Enter the partition in which RF keypad is used 1 8 Enter Oif no RF keypad is used 1 49 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND 1 Enter 1 to disable trouble sounding for transmitter check in failure Enter O if audible trouble sounding is desired Must b
265. ling Loop Supervision Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones Compatible Polling Loop Devices Polling Loop Overview Y ou can expand the system from the basic 8 zones to up to 128 zones using the built in 2 wire pollingloop Each device that is connected to the polling loop has the capability to communicate with the panel about its status These devices are called RPM s Remote Point Modules The polling loop provides both power and data to the RPM zones and is constantly monitoring the status of all zones enabled on theloop The maximum current draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more than 128mA unless using a 4297 Polling Loop Extender M odule Refer to the list of compatible devices at the end of this section Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones Polling loop zones have the following characteristics Must use RPM Remote Point Module devices Supervised by control panel Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions Individually assignable to bell outputs and or aux relay Pollingloop smoke detector LED will latch on the first detector to go into alarm Clearing alarm memory clears the latched LED Polling loop smoke detector LED periodically flashes to indicate communication with the control VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Wiring Addressing RPM Devices All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel to the and polling loop terminals of the control panel 2
266. lized Enter the downloading phone number up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces DOWNLOAD ID NUMBER LE JL E dla dla Lui ET JL T jJ Enter eight digits 00 09 A F 10 15 Default is 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Only applicable if downloading will be utilized Make entries as 2 digit numbers as follows 0020 022 04 4 00 6 08 8 10 12 C 14 01 0323 05 5 07 7 09 9 11568 13 D 15 DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES LI i Li LI LJ i4 Li Lj Dialer System Not Remote Remote Remote Upload Download Shutdown Shutdown Used Bypass Disarm Arm Program Program Each of the various remote functions can either be enabled or disabled through the keypad for usage by V LINK or Compass downloading software Disabling a function means that you will not be able to perform that function from the V LINK or Compass Enter 1to enable a function and Oto disable a function See field 1 53 to disable the Download Callback option For commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations all entries must be 0 Default is 11011111 PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS partition specific 000 Entering a zone number 001 128 prevents that zone from being bypassed by the user Enter 000 if this feature is not desired all zones can be bypassed ENABLE OPEN CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE partition specific 1 Enter 1 if Open Close reporting for the installer is desired Otherwise enter 0
267. ll loops combined can 1500 ft not exceed 6400 ft 3200 ft if using unshielded wire in 2400 ft conduit or shielded wire Total length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed 4000 ft 2000 ft if using unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire Input Polling Loop Extension Polling Loop Figure 7 2a Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module Notes Do not use 4197 module with VISTA 128FB Hefer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information The Limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions Do not connect 4297 modules in series Extension Loop 1 Extension Loop 2 ct Extension Loop 8 Input Polling Loop CONTROL PANEL Input Loop Limits Extension Loop Limits Same as figure 7 2a Each individual loop has the same limits as the input loop Up to 8 modules may be connected in parallel Extension loops will be electrically isolated if blue jumper on each 4297 is left in tact Combined Input and Extension Loop Limits No more than 120 devices combined on all loops To calculate the maximum wire run allowed on each extension loop 1 Determine the total wire length of all input loops combined 2 Subtract this number from 6400 ft 3200 ft for shielded cable or unshielded cable in conduit The result is the maximum wire run length for each extension loop Figure 7 2b Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modul
268. ll zones must be configured for EOLR supervision 4120 Wireless sensors may not be used If 4190WH RPMs are used set field 24 to 0 to enable tamper detection 3 Attach a door tamper switch supplied to the VI STA 128F B cabinet backbox For safe and vault installations a shock sensor not supplied must also be attached to the backbox Also see Mounting the Cabine in the Installing the Control section 4 Wire an ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell Box to the bell output Bell wires must be run in conduit Program the bell output for 16 or longer timeout and for confirmation of arming ding Also see the External Sounders section 5 Wirethe VISTA 128F B tamper switch and AB 12 Bell Box tamper switches to any EOLR supervised zone zones 1 8 Program this zone for day trouble night alarm type 05 or 24 hour audible alarm type 07 response The 24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems 6 Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Follow the instructions for UL 609 local installations given above For Grade A Service You may usethe VISTA 128F B dialer alone or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone When using the dialer program it to send Burglary Alarm Low Battery and Communicator Test reports Field 27 must be set to 024 or less sothat test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours e If using the 7720 connec
269. lly isolated from those on Port 1 and will continue to function even if wiring problems prevent the other keypads from working properly BLACK GD RED KEYPADS GREEN YELLOW CONTROL TERMINALS Figure 5 1 Keypad Connections To Keypad Port 1 Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads 5 2 The control provides 1 amp of auxiliary standby power for powering keypads and other devices from the auxiliary power output Aside from this the control can support up to 16 peripheral devices keypads RF receivers relay modules etc The backup battery will supply power to these devices in the event that AC power is lost A 1 amp load requires a 34 4 AH battery see the Final Power U p Procedure section for more information When the control s auxiliary power load for all devices exceeds 1 amp you can power additional keypads from a regulated 12V DC power supply e g Alarm Saf Model AS PS5 BFS 12 UL UseaUL Listed battery backed supply for UL installations Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 5 2 using the keypad wire colors shown Be sureto observe the current ratings for the power supply used 1 Make connections directly to the screw terminals as shown in Figure 5 2 Make no connection to the keypad blue wire if present 2 Be sure to connect the negative terminal on the power supply unit to terminal 12 AUX on the control Section 5 Installing TheKeypads SU
270. ly may only ADD users to a LOWER authority level Auser may assign other users access to only those partitions to which he himself has access e Auser code can only be DELETED or CHANGED from within the partition it was created in User numbers must be entered in 3 digits Single digit user numbers must therefore always be preceded by a 00 e g 003 004 005 etc Make sure the end user understands this requirement Temporary codes are entered as 4 digit numbers 30 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Open Close Reporting Note When adding a user the system will only prompt for Open Close reporting capability if the user is being added by thelnstaller When a Master or Manager adds a new user the new user s Open Close reporting enable will be the same as that of the Master or Manager whois adding the user If Open Close reports are required to be selectable by the Master or Manager the Installer should assign two Master or Manager user codes one with Open Close reporting enabled and one without Note that Open Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled if User 002 is enabled for Open Close reporting and that Quick Arm reports as User 000 In order for Quick Arm reports to be sent for all partitions User 002 must have authority and Open Close must be enabled for all partitions If a code with access to all partitions is not desired it is suggested that user 002 be assigned authority level 5 in all partitions and
271. m it Office 2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions 2 4 the tables below the notations in parentheses indicate the current status of the other partition when the user takes action Sequence 1 Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action User Z1 Disarms Armed Disarms User 2 Disarmed Disarms No Change User l Arms Disarmed No change User 2 Armed Arms Arms Sequence 2 Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action User Armed Disarms Disarms User 1 Disarms Disarmed No change User 2 Disarmed Arms No Change User 1 Arms Armed No Change Notice that in sequence 1 since Office 2 was the last to arm the lobby also armed Office 2 S programmed to affect and arm the lobby In sequence 2 the lobby could not arm when Office 2 armed because Office 1 which affects the lobby was still disarmed When Office 1 armed the lobby still did not arm because Office 1 was not programmed to arm the lobby User 1 would have to arm the lobby manually Therefore you would want to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby if the users of that partition are expected to be the last to leave the building Do not assign Partition 1 as the common lobby All fire zones should be assigned to this partition to ensure that all fire test modes operate correctly How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby Codes with Global Arming If code is given glo
272. m wire run lengths from the control to each 4204 Refer to the instructions provided with the 4204CF for its maximum permissible wire lengths 125 fet 200 fet 300 feet 500 feet SWITCH 4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS means OFF vedi casca I CEI 1 EE 4 DIP SWITCH TYPICAL FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS SHOWN OFF AND ENABLING DISABLING TAMPER COVER TAMPER REED SWITCH 4 PIN CONSOLE PLUG Y EITHER OR BOTH CAN BE USED N Tai 3 14 15 16 O DATA IN FROM CONTROL GROUND DATA OUT TO CONTROL 12V Figure 9 la 4204 Relay Module 9 2 Section 9 Relay Outputs SWITCH 4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS POSITION means OFF 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 SERRE on Ton ow ow 0 ALARM POLARITY SHOWN c DIP SWITCH NOTIFICATION EACH OUTPUT FOR SETTING DEVICE S APPLIANCE B PROVIDES ADDRESS AND SO 2K EOLR STYLE Y ENABLING DISABLING O A 610 7 SUPERVISION TAMPER EACH OUTPUT POLARIZED RATED 1 2A MAX COVER TAMPER REED SWITCH NOTIFICATION USE l APPLIANCE NOTIFICATION 4 PIN CONSOLE PLUG i APPLIANCES Y NOTIFICATION COMPATIBLE N PA APPLIANCEA WITH EITHER OR BOTH O 2K EOLR KE APPLIANCE CAN BE USED jq Kop S lo POWER SUPPLY TB VOLTAGE S
273. ming as a keypad and then assigned to a partition see 93 Menu Mode Programming section For additional information refer to the 5800T M s instructions House ID Sniffer Mode 8 4 This mode applies only to 5700 Series systems or if you are using a wireless keypad 5827 5827BD in a 5800 Series system 5700 Series receivers respond only to transmitters set to the same House ID 01 31 programmed into the control panel This prevents system interference from transmitters in other nearby systems Usethe HouselD Sniffer Mode to make sure you do not choose a House ID that is in use in a nearby system To enter this mode proceed as follows 1 Enter Installer Code 2 2 Thereceiver will now sniff out any HouselDs in the area and display them Keep the receiver in this mode for at least 2 hours to give a good indication of the House IDs being used Use a House ID that is not displayed 3 Toexit the Sniffer Mode simply enter your Installer Code OFF If you need to re program the House ID of the receiver do so before proceeding Section 8 Wireless Zone E xpansion Since Sniffer Mode effectively disables RF point reception Sniffer Mode cannot be entered while any partition is armed 5700 Series Transmitter Setup E ach 5700 Series transmitter has DIP switches to set both the transmitter s zone number Transmitter D and the system House ID TheHouselD will be the same for all transmitters and must match the
274. ming window and the start of auto arm warning time in values of 01 14 times 4 minutes Enter 00 if no delay is desired Enter 15 if auto arming is not desired 2 06 AUTO ARM WARNING PERIOD partition specific 15 NN Enter the time 01 15 in one minute increments during which the user is warned by a keypad sounding and display to exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system Enter 00 to disable the warning period 2 07 AUTO DISARM DELAY partition specific 15 Enter the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto disarming of the system in values of 01 14 times 4 minutes Enter 00 if no delay is desired Enter 15 if auto disarming is not desired 24 15 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 16 2 08 2 09 2 10 2 11 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 FORCE ARM ENABLE FOR AUTO ARM partition specific 0 Enter lif the system should automatically bypass any faulted zones when it attempts to auto arm Otherwise enter 0 OPEN CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION partition specific 0 Enter 1 11 Open Close reports are to be sent only if the openings closings occur outside the arm and disarm windows Open reports will also be suppressed during the closing window in order to prevent false alarms if the user arms the system then reenters the premises to retrieve a forgotten item Note that openings and closings are still recorded in the event log Enter O if exception reporting
275. mitter 5817 Multi Point Universal Transmitter 8 10 BR Only UR or RF BR Only RF RF F Has single pushbutton Usually be programmed for response type of 24 Hr Audible or 24 Hr Silent other zone responses are possible Contains a nonreplaceable battery At the end of the battery s life the entire unit must be replaced If using for arming disarming the button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user Has single pushbutton Usually programmed for a respon If using for arming disarming the button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user Contains a replaceable battery Has four pushbuttons each with a unique input loop code Programmable responses e g Arm Stay Arm Away Disarm etc Contains a replaceable battery If using for arming disarming the button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user One piece smoke detectors with built in transmitter 5806 and 5807 UL Listed for residential fire usage only 5808 UL Listed for commercial fire Has two unique input loop codes one for a wired closed circuit contact loop the other for a built in reed switch used in conjunction with a magnet Has three unique input loop codes one for a Primary contact loop with programmable options the others for two Auxiliary closed circuit contact loops Section 8 Wireless Zone E xpansion Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters cont d
276. mputer and the control panel as follows a The computer calls up the control panel The phone number for each customer is entered into the customer s account file on the computer The control panel answers at the pre programmed ring count and executes a handshake with the computer The computer sends a request for callback to the control unless callback is not required The panel acknowledges the request and hangs up During the next few seconds the control will process the request making sure certain encrypted informati on recei ved from the computer matches its own memory U pon a successful match the control panel will seize the phone line and call the computer back unless callback is not required The phone number to which the computer s modem is connected must be programmed into the control field 35 The computer answers usually by the second ring and executes a handshake with the panel The panel then sends other default information to the computer If this information matches the computer s information a successful link is established This is known as being On line Alarms and Trouble responses and reports are disabled during actual uploading or downloading sessions If you are on line but not actively uploading or downloading all alarms will report immediately All other reports will be delayed until you complete the session The keypads remain active when on line with a control but are inactive during
277. n Each action should cause keypads to beep and fire bells to ding The keypads will display the zone number and the associated al pha descriptor while the zone remains faulted The system automatically issues a smoke detector power reset about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on one of these zones to allow faulted detectors to be reset Toend the test enter any security code and press OFF An End of Walk Test message will be sent to the central station if programmed Note that the test will automatically end if no faults are detected within a 60 minute time period Burglary Walk Test Code TEST 5 This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in response to faults on burglary and non fire related 24 hour zones for the purpose of allowing proper zone operation to be checked without triggering alarms Note that the system will not trigger alarms for burglary and non fire related 24 hour zones but will trigger fire alarms whilethis test is active This test can only be activated by the installer a master user or manager user by entering the corresponding security code and pressing TEST whilethe burglary portion of the system is disarmed UL requires that this test be conducted on a weekly basis When this test is first activated the system will sound burglary bells or any bell having a non zero response type in each bell s supervisory zone for 3 seconds The system will send a Start of Walk Test message to the central station The ke
278. nable User Code 5 Enter Program Mode Installer Code 8000 E xit Program Mode 99 Or 98 nstaller Programmed Schedule Events nstaller Code 80 Temporary Schedule Editing User Code 81 Installer Master Manager Only Extend Closing Window User Code 82 Installer Master Manager Only End User Output Device Programming User Code 83 Activate Output Device as Programmed U ser Code 71 Activate Output Device as Programmed U ser Code 72 Activate Output Device Manually U ser Code 70 Activate Access Relay for Current Partition User Code 0 Request to Enter E xit User Code 73 Request to Enter E xit at Access Point User Code 74 Access Point Number Change Access Point State U ser Code 75 Access Point State Perform Script at Access Point User Code 76 Access Point Script Number APPENDIX D Specifications VISTA 128FB CONTROL Physical Electrical Primary Power Backup Battery Alarm Power Aux Standby Pwr Total Power Standby Time Fusing Main Dialer Line Seize Ringer Equivalence FCC Registration No TLM Threshold Formats Agency Listings Burglary Fire 18 H X 14 1 2 W X 4 3 D From ADEMCO No 1451 Transformer with enclosure rated 18VAC 72VA 12VDC 12AH min to 34 4AH max lead acid battery gel type 12VDC 1 7 amps max for each bell output 12VDC 1 amp max Combined auxiliary sta
279. nd display the Quit prompt Mon P1 OP WIND Enter the time window number 01 20 for the displayed day s 00 00 00 00 00 opening schedule beginning with M onday Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for that window number will be displayed as a programming aid Press to accept the entry Mon P1 CL WIND Enter the time window number for the displayed day s closing 00 00 00 00 00 schedule As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window number will be displayed Press the key to accept the entry Tue P1 OP WIND The keypad will now prompt for Tuesday s open d ose schedule 00 00 00 00 00 etc Follow the procedure for M onday s prompts When thelast day of the week has been programmed the holiday opening and closing window prompts are displayed Hol P1 OP WIND Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time 00 0000 00 00 windows Press the key to accept the entry When the entries are completed the Partition prompt is displayed again Repeat this procedure for each partition in the system 26 9 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Quit Enter O at the Quit prompt to return to the main menu 12 YES 0 NO 0 choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling M enu M ode Holiday Schedules A holiday schedule will override the regular daily open close schedule
280. nd programming session 25 24 Section 25 93 Menu Mode Programming VIP Module and VISTA Gateway Module MODULE PART If device type 5 VIP Module or type 9 VGM is selected this prompt will appear Enter the partition number 1 8 in which the module is located Relay Programming Press to accept entry Press 00 to exit Menu Mode Press 99 to exit Program M ode The system supports up to 32 relay outputs Relays can be used to perform many different functions and actions Each relay must be programmed to begin one of four types of ACTIONS at a designated START event and end that ACTION at a designated STOP event The options used to start and stop these devices are described below followed by the actual screen prompts and available entries Theletter s in parentheses after each function described below such as A after ACTION are those that appear in the various summary displays of programmed data during programmi ng ACTION A The ACTION of the device is how the device will respond when it is activated by the START programming Y ou may want the device to activate momentarily to pulse on and off continuously or to remain activated until some other event occurs to stop it There arefive different choices of actions ACTIVATE for 2 SECONDS and then reset ACTIVATE and REMAIN ACTIVATED until stopped by some other event PULSE ON and OFF until stopped by some other event NO RESPONSE when the device i
281. ndby and alarm currents must not exceed 2 3 amps 24 hours with 1 amp aux standby load or 60 hours with 205ma aux Standby load using 34 4AH battery Battery input auxiliary and bell power outputs are protected using PTC circuit protectors All outputs are power limited Double Pole 0 7B AC398U 68192 AL E Good line when tip to ring voltage greater than approximately 25V 13 when blue jumper cut or when handset current greater than approximately 10ma Bad line when both voltage and current below these levels ADEMCO High Speed ADEMCO 4 2 Express ADEMCO Low Speed ADEMCO Contact ID Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed UL 609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault UL611 UL 1610 Grades A AA Central Station UL 365 Grades A AA Police Connect UL864 NFPA 72 Local Central Station and Remote Station 5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE Physical FCC Registration 2 75 H X 4 X 1 D Mounts on VISTA 128F B main PC board shield using standoffs supplied Connects to VISTA 128F B main PC board J 3 header using ribbon cable supplied AC398U 62668 M O N 5140LED ANNUNCIATOR MODULE Physical Indicators 4 5 H X 2 75 W X 1 5 D Mounts to single gang electrical box AC Power Comm Failure Dialer 1 Fault and Dialer 2 Fault Connect indicator inputs to VISTA 128FB trigger outputs J 2 header Appendix D 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 6139 R Remote Keypads Physical Width Height De
282. ne type gives entry and exit delays using the programmed entry exit ti me if tripped when the panel is armed in the AWAY Mode This zone type is also active during MAXIMUM Mode but no entry delay is provided alarms occur immediately if zone is tripped This zone type is automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the STAY or INSTANT Mode Delay begins whenever sensors in this zone are violated regardless of whether or not an entry exit delay zone was tripped first Type 16 Fire With Verification This zone type is used when smoke alarm verification is desired on hardwire and polling loop zones containing only 2 wire or 4 wire smoke detectors An open will initiate a trouble response and a short will initiate a fire alarm response Initial short detection causes 7 second smoke detector power reset Subsequent short detection within 90 seconds of reset causes fire alarm Type 17 Fire Waterflow An open on this zone causes a trouble response Shorts which remain present longer than the programmed time delay fields 3 16 and 3 18 cause a fire alarm response This zone can either be silenced by pressing Code OFF or when waterflow restores programmed in field 3 14 Type 18 Fire Supervisory This zonetype is assigned to a zone having sensors that monitor fire sprinkler systems i e PIV switches etc A short on this zone causes a supervisory response Opens can be programmed either for a trouble or a supervisory res
283. nes have the following characteristics Must use RPM Remote Point Module devices Supervised by control panel e Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions e Individually assignable to bell outputs and or aux relay VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Wireless Expansion Supports up to 63 wireless zones using 4281 type RF receiver or 128 wireless zones using 5881 type RF receiver fewer if using hardwire and or polling loop zones Wireless zones have the following characteristics Supervised by control panel for check in signals except certain nonsupervised transmitters Tamper protection for 5800 Series supervised transmitters e Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions e Individually assignable to bell outputs and or auxiliary relay U L Wireless devices may not be used in UL commercial burglary installations UL Listing of the 5808 Smoke Detector for commercial fire installations is pending For specific information regarding number of wireless zones supported by each RF receiver see the Wireless Zone Expansion section System Zones Provides zones for supervision of all peripheral devices keypads RF receivers and relay modules and individual relays as well as system zones bells dialers telephone lines earth ground keypad panics etc Zone assignments are as follows Individual Relay Zones 601 632 Peripheral Device Zones 800 831 System Zones 970 999 See the Zone Index
284. ng a device into the system The serial number for the program tool will only remain in the system until the programming mode is exited Entering 97 will not delete the tool Press to continue or press the key to back the system up to the PROGRAM TOOL prompt Enter the 3 digit zone number that you wish to program As an example zone 010 is shown here Press to continue A display will appear showing a summary of that zone s programming ZT Zone Type P Partition RC Report Code B Bell Aux Relay assignment for zone N the input type of device and L he device s loop number to which the sensor is connected Some devices can support more than one zone by means of individual loops for example 5801 5804 5816 5817 etc If the zone is not programmed the display will appear as shown here If checking a zone s programming and it is programmed satisfactorily press to back up one step and enter another zone number if desired Otherwise press to continue Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until ready to enroll After enrolling batteries need not be removed Zone Number 010 ZONE RESPONSE Perimeter 03 Zone T ype 03 entry shown 010 ACCESS POINT 00 31 01 010 ENTRY OR EXIT 0 010 PARTITION 2 010 REPORT CODE 1st 03 2nd 12 3C Section 25 93 Menu Mode Programming E ach zone must be assigned a zone type which defines the way in which the system res
285. nga time window active period only on at beginning of window off at end 4 At both the beginning and end of the time window e g to sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of a coffee break e The system can perform the same actions on a daily basis or can be made to perform an action only once i e turn on the porch light this Wednesday at 8 00 pm e The system also provides up to 20 programmable ti mers available to the end user for the purpose of activating output devices at preset times and on preset days Limitation of Access of Users by Time e A user s access can be limited to a certain time period during which he can perform system functions Outside this time that user s code will be inactive Thesystem provides up to 8 access schedules each consisting of two time windows typically one for opening one for closing for each day of the week and two time windows for holidays e heaccess schedules are programmed in the 80 M enu Mode and enabled for a given user when that user s access code is added to the system e l fausertries to operate the system outside of the schedule the alpha keypad will display Access Denied Time Window Definitions General Scheduled events are based on time windows which are simply periods of time during which an event may take place e Atime window is defined by a Start time and a Stop time 26 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions e The system supports
286. ns of INPUT 1 and OUT 1 7 as indicated in Figure 12 1 12 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions When using J2 for LORRA Input 1 Pin 9 is supervised by Zone 973 which is used for supervision of the LORRA XMIT OKAY signal Assign a 24 hr zone response type 5 or 19 to this zone J2 CONNECTOR FIELD 3 19 0 FIELD 3 19 0 FIELD 3 19 0 FIELD 3 19 1 FIELD 3 20 0 FIELD 3 20 1 FIELD 3 20 2 DEFAULT LORRA LORRA LORRA XMIT OKAY XMIT OKAY XMIT OKAY PRINTER DTR KEYSWITCH 5140LED AS SELECTED OPEN CLOSE ARMED LED AC FAIL LED IN FIELD 3 20 REMOTE KEYSWITCH 5140LED AS SELECTED CONSOLE SOUNDER READY LED DIALER 2 FAIL LED IN FIELD 3 20 SUPERVISORY SUPERVISORY SUPERVISORY IN FIELD 3 20 ALARM ALARM COMM FAIL LED IN FIELD 3 20 IN FIELD 3 20 DIALER 1 FAIL LED IN FIELD 3 20 MAKE CONNECTIONS USING 4142TR 1 SUPPLIED Figure 12 1 J 2 Pin Assignments and Functions Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and Wiring An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be used to duplicate the sounds produced by the keypad s built in sounder The panel will remote all sounds i e alarm trouble chime entry exit etc produced by the keypad s built in sounder except for the short beeps associated with keypad key depression One application of this feature might be to produce chi me sounds at a distant location from the panel s keypads If used program field 3 20 must be set to O factory default to enable the remote sounder op
287. ntact ID 1 60 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION Set for 1 If you need more information about actual programming procedures see The Mechanics of Programming section 4 Zone5 must be programmed for response type 10 and the EOLR must be removed regardless of whether or not EOLR resistors have been enabled in field 41 Zone 5 is nolonger available as a protection zone 5 Program a 4204 Relay to trip on Zone Type Sys Op 60 Audio Alarm Verification see Relay Programming in the 93 Menu M ode Programmi ng section 6 Press 99 to exit Program M ode Section 11 Audio Alarm Verifi cati on INCOMING TELCO LINE tc Notes es CALLER 1 Remove any EOL JACK ID UNIT resistor from control panel terminals 22 amp 23 if any present GRAY ED BROWN 8 CONDUCTOR DOUBLE PLUG CORD SUPPLIED PREMISES CONTROL ANSWERING MACHINE AND PANEL PHONES ANSWERING All switches should ON be off except 3 4 ed a P switch 5 which 123456 should be on REFER TO AAV MODULE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE TO CONTROL ZONE 5 3 00000000 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4204 RELAY MODULE V MODEL EAGLE SECURITY GND RELAY 1 SHOWN OFF Figure 11 1 Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections If the phone plug is disconnected at the control the premise s phones will not operate If a problem exists remove the phone plug at the RJ31
288. ntenna installed Reorient the receiving antenna until interference is reduced or eliminated Move the receiver away from the control communicator Move the antenna leads away from any wire runs to the control communicator Plug the control communicator into a different outlet so that it and the receiver are on different branch circuits If necessary the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions The user or installer may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful Interference Handbook This booklet is available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington DC 20402 The user shall not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless authorized by the Installation Instructions or User s Manual Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS In the event of telephone operational problems disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X CA38A in Canada wall jack We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the system Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel Doing so will result in the loss of your phone lines If the regular phone works correctly after the control panel has been disconnected from the phone lines the control panel has a problem and sho
289. nter the 7 digit serial number printed on the device Or b Activate the device by faulting or restoring the input you wish to use for that zone e g press a button open or close a door etc If you do not wish to enroll the zone displayed press on the keypad or the upper right hand button on the program tool a long beep will be heard to verify The following prompt will appear 25 10 Section 25 493 Menu Mode Programming 010 LEARN S N To enroll now enter 1 YES If 0 NO is entered the following 0 NO 1 YES 0 prompt will appear ENTER ZN NUM Enter the next zone number to be enrolled e g zone 010 The 000 QUIT 010 system will search for that zone and will display the ENTER ZONE Zone Number Entered T EIOS IIO DI If you wish to exit the enrollment mode completely enter 000 and press 010 INPUT S N The system will enroll the first serial number heard display A 022 4064 the serial numbers and cause the keypad to beep twice Serial If the serial and loop number combination is already present in the system the keypad will sound a single long beep and display the word DUPLICATE along with the serial number and the number of the zone containing the serial loop number combination The system will then enter an optional confirmation mode so that the operation of the actual programmed input can be confirmed Activate the loop input or button that corresponds to this zone We recommend that
290. nute increments up to 56 minutes in partition specific program field 2 05 Atthe expiration of this delay the auto arm warning will start Auto Arm Warning heauto arm warning causes the keypad sounder to warn the user of an impending auto arm hewarning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to the arming in partition specific program field 2 06 Duringthis period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds and displays AUTO ARM ALERT During the last 60 seconds the keypads begin to beep every 5 seconds e he panel arms at the conclusion of the auto arm warning period Extend Closing Window Auser can manually delay the arm dosing time window by 1 or 2 hours e Thisis done by entering a keypad command U ser Code 82 which then prompts the user to enter the desired extension time of 1 or 2 e This feature is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than usual Theauto arm delay and warning periods will begin at the end of the extension Force Arm e The force arm option causes the panel to attempt to bypass any faulted zones prior to auto arming panel will perform a force arm This option is set in partition specific program field 2 08 Auto Disarming e The system can automatically disarm a partition at the end of a pre determined opening disarm time window hedisarming time can be delayed by using the auto disarm delay feature Disarm Delay e Auto disarm delay provide
291. ode 30 9 Total Control Panel Load Worksheets 20 5 TOUCH TONE W ROTARY BACKUP 24 13 Transmitter Battery Life 8 4 8 8 Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode 8 11 Transmitter Input lVDOSs aces aidera sitem es cote eden 8 8 Transmitter Supervision 8 4 8 7 TRIGGER OUTPUTS FUNCTION SELECTION 24 19 Trouble by Day Alarm by Night Type 05 22 2 Trouble CopnditlofiS 50 32 4 Trouble MessageS ii 32 4 Turning the System Over to the User 32 6 UL Installation Requirements A 1 UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar 533 1 A 2 UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises Local Mercantile Safe amp Vault A 2 UL611 UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm A 2 UL864 NFPA Central Station and Remote Station FireA 1 ULS6A NFPA Local File 777 1 01 A 1 UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION 2 3 Unsupervised 7 0 8 8 USE LONG RANGE RADIO IF DIALER FAILS 24 8 USE LONG RANGE RADIO ONLY 24 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS 24 17 User Access Codes 1 4 2 1 30 1 User Code 0 22 2 2200 222202220020063666666
292. ode Introduction to Scheduling This section describes the scheduling features provided with this control panel U L 1 You must program Bypass and Auto Arm Fail reports for UL installations 2 Auto disarming is not for usein UL installations General hescheduling features allow certain operations to be automated such as auto arming auto disarmi ng auto bypassing and unbypassing of zones and activating relay outputs using 4204 modules Thesystem uses time windows a programmed period of time with a start and stop time for defining open close schedules holiday schedules user defined temporary schedules and access schedules for users e Scheduled events are programmed by user friendly menu modes of programming 80 81 and 83 modes explained in detail in this section These menus take you step by step through the options 26 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Auto Arming e The system can automatically arm AWAY Mode a partition at the end of a pre determined closing arming time window Autoarming can be delayed three ways by use of the auto arm delay the auto arm warning or by manually extending the closing arming time window with a keypad command e The system can also automatically bypass any open zones when auto arming Auto Arm Delay e Auto arm delay provides a delay grace period before auto arming e t starts at the end of the closing time window hedelay is set in 4 mi
293. of the optical system can reduce their detection ability Passive I nfrared Detectors sense changes in temperature however as the ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90 to 105 F 32 to 40 C the detection performance can decrease Alarm warning devices such as sirens bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed rooms then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms E ven persons who are awake may not hear the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo radio air conditioner or other appliance or by passing traffic Finally alarm warning devices however loud may not warn hearing impaired people Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily out of service Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended however occupants may have insufficient time to protect themselves from the emergency situation In the case of a monitored alarm system authorities may not respond appropriately This equipment like other electrical devices is subject to component failure Even though this equipment is designed to last as long as 20 year
294. of zone numbers is indicated below 48 through 63 through 55 use 5706 24 Hour Panic 48 through 63 silent or audible 62 or 63 use 5701 Day Night Burglary 1 through 47 24 Hour Auxiliary 1 through 47 Note that zones 1 63 can be used but have the following limitations 1 Transmitters set for zones 48 55 will transmit once every 12 seconds while the zone is faulted Transmitters set for zones 56 63 will transmit once every 3 seconds while faulted These two ranges of zone numbers could adversely affect transmitter battery life 2 Transmitters set for an ID of 32 through 47 will have a 3 minute lockout between transmissions Use this last range of zone ID numbers for sensors protecting frequently used doors or windows to conserve battery life Transmitter Ds 48 through 55 have highest signal priority Transmitter Ds 62 and 63 are unsupervised to allow removal of the 5701 off premises signal priority is lower than that of fire but higher than burglary 8 6 Section 8 Wireless Zone E xpansion Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters Product 7 2 Description 5701 Panic Transmitter 62 or 63 Programmable for either silent or audible 24 hour alarm 5 06 5707 Photoelectric Smoke One piece smoke detectors with Detector built in transmitter Built in UL Listed 85 dB piezo electric alarm sounder and audible low battery warning 5711 Slimline Door Window 1 6
295. ogramming Speed Key Sequence To program a macro enter your User Code D The following appears ENTER SPEED KEY 01 32 00 QUIT Enter the 2 digit Speed K ey number 01 32 being defined and press Enter up to 32 keystrokes A Speed K ey sequence can include different commands Press the D key to separate different commands For example you may want to perform the following sequence Desired function Keystrokes GOTO partition 2 Enter 2 Bypass Zones 10 amp 11 Press bypass 6 then the zone numbers 010 amp 011 Arm in Maximum Mode Press maximum 4 key Return to Partition 1 Enter 1 To program that Speed K ey sequence type the following 2 0 eo10011 D 4 D 1 D D Note that the D key is pressed after each command Press D twice to complete the entry and exit When defining Speed Key sequences do not use the key to represent Quick Arming The System uses the code entered in response to the prompt to initiate commands in a Speed Key sequence so the quick arm key is unnecessary The system interprets the use of the 7 key in a Speed Key sequence as its designated function only e g 2 is not interpreted as Arm AWAY but rather as Enter House ID Sniffer Mode Executing Speed Key Sequence To execute a Speed K ey sequence do the following If a lettered key A B C has been assigned as a Speed Key press the appropriate key If a user code is required for any part of the Speed K
296. one list will be bypassed at the beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end of the window Beginning and end of time window e g a Coffee break buzzer In this example if relay pulse is selected the relay will pulse for 2 seconds at the beginning of the window signaling the beginning of the coffee break At the end of the window it will pulse again signaling the end of coffee break Time Driven Event Programming The following schedules can be used to activate outputs bypass zones arm disarm the system etc based on a time schedule U p to 20 events can be programmed for the system Time windows must first be defined in order to be used to trigger events If using time driven events to control relays the following menu items must first be programmed using Relay Programmi ng in the 93 Menu Mode Enter Relay No reference identification number Relay Group if applicable Relay Type 4204 or none ECP Address Relay No if 4204 relays After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press 0 until the Timed E vents prompt appears Timed Events Enter 1to program timed events 1Yes 0 No 0 TIMED EVENT Enter the timed event number to be programmed 01 20 01 20 00 Quit 01 Press The system will then prompt the user to enter the desired action to be taken Enter 00 at the TIMED EVENT prompt to quit the ti med event menus and display the Quit prompt 26 13 VISTA 128FB Installation
297. only 58 Duress 60 Audio Alarm Verification must be selected for both START and STOP operation 61 Code 67 Key Entry 62 Bell 2 Timeout 63 Aux Relay Timeout Or at Disarming whichever occurs earlier If using options 57 and or 58 usually as the STOP Zone Type data fields 1 74 and 1 75 for the respective relay timeouts for minutes and seconds must be programmed If the start zone type selected was 27 access point this prompt will be displayed Enter the access point 00 31 which will start the relay action Press to continue Press to continue Press to continue If the starting event will be limited to occurring on a specific partition enter the partition number 1 8 in which the start event will occur Enter O for any partition If a zone list is being used to stop this relay action enter the zone list number 1 8 The restore of a zone on the zone list will stop the relay If a zone list is not being used enter OQ If a Zone Type System Operation is being used to stop the relay action enter the 2 digit code as listed in the Choices for Start Stop Zone Type System Operation table If the stop zone type selected was 27 access point this prompt will be displayed Enter the access point 00 31 which will stop the relay action number Press to continue This is the partition to which the stop condition will be limited Enter O for any partition Enter 1 8 for spec
298. ons are programmed using the 80 Menu Mode Refer to the Time Driven E vent Programming for procedures Steps To Programming Scheduling Options This section contains examples of the worksheets only For complete worksheets see the Quick Start guide accompanying these Installation Instructions order to use 80 Scheduling Menu Mode do the following Using the worksheets Definetime windows up to 20 Definethe daily open dose schedules one schedule per day per partition Definethe holidays to be used by the system up to 16 Definelimitation of access times up to 8 schedules Definethetime driven events up to 20 Note Temporary schedules are programmed using the 81 Menu M ode Section 26 Scheduling Options Use 80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the following functions Scheduling Menu Structure Program the time windows Program the open close schedules Program the time driven events Program the access schedules This mode can only be entered when all partitions are disarmed There are 5 sections of scheduling menus as shown below Entering 1 at a displayed main menu prompt will select that menu section Prompts for programming that scheduling feature will then appear Enter Oto skip a section and display the next menu option Time Window 1Yes 0 No O C Schedules 1Yes OzNo Holidays 1Yes 0 0 Timed Events 1Yes OzNo Access Sched 1Yes OzNo Quit 1Yes O No
299. oop number combination that has been enrolled regardless of whether or not the enrolled input has been confirmed If the incorrect device has been enrolled press the key on the keypad or upper right hand button on the program tool to delete the serial number and return to the UEARN S N prompt A single long beep will be heard from the keypad to verify pressing of the upper right hand button Then press 1 Yes or press the upper left hand button of the program tool a single short beep will verify the system is ready for enrolling and re activate the proper device loop input Section 25 493 Menu Mode Programming 010 ZT P RC B INL The summary screen for the zone will appear Note that an s a m indicates that a serial number has in fact been enrolled Press s 03 2 3C 0 RFI to accept the zone information If you want to delete the serial number press 7 This will bring you back to the INPUT TYPE prompt Press to change input type loop number and serial number When you have finished programming all zones test each using the system s Test mode Do not use the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode for this as it will only check for transmission of one zone on a particular transmitter NOT the zones assigned to each additional loop and will not verify polling loop type zones Sequential Mode Programming Usually serial numbers are enrolled during Zone Programming If not use 93 Menu Mode to enroll serial numbers f
300. oop wiring Therefore the loop wiring may not L exceed 3 feet 5800 Series Transmitter Setup 5800 Series transmitters have built in serial numbers that must be enrolled by the system using the 93 Menu Mode Programming or input to the control via the downloader 5800 Series transmitters except 5827 described separately do not have DIP switches Each transmitter s zone number is programmed into the system in 93 Menu Mode Some transmitters such as the 5816 and 5817 can support more than one zone referred to as loops or inputs On the 5816 for example the wire connection terminal block is Loop 1 the reed contact is loop 2 Each loop must be assigned a different zone number For button type transmitters wireless keys such as the 5804 5804BD 5803 and 5801 you must assign a unique zone number to each individual button used on the transmitter Each button on the transmitter also has a pre designated loop or input number which is automatically displayed when enrolled Transmitter Supervision Except for some transmitters that may be carried off premises 5802 5802CP 5803 5804 5808BD 5827 and 5827BD each transmitter is supervised by a check in signal that is sent to the receiver at 70 90 minute intervals If at least one check in is not received from each supervised transmitter within a programmed period field 1 31 the missing transmitter number s and CHECK or TRBL will be displayed The supervision for
301. op of the cabinet Make certain that the board rests in the slots as indicated Swing the base of the board into the mounting dips and secure the board to the cabinet with the accompanying screws Make certain that the mounting screws are tight This ensures that there is a good ground connection between the PC board and the cabinet Also dress field wiring away from the microprocessor center section of the PC board Use the 2 loops on the left and right sidewalls of the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie wraps These steps are important to minimize the risk of panel RF interference with television reception DETAIL A SIDE VIEW OF BOARD INSERTED INTO SLOTS DETAIL B SIDE VIEW OF SHORT MOUNTING CLIPS Figure 4 3 Mounting the PC Board 4 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Connecting the AC Transformer and Battery This product uses the 1451 Transformer which must be hardwired into the premises electrical system Therefore we recommend wiring all zones and expansion modules according to each section s instructions before powering up the system for programming and testing Refer tothe Final Power U p Procedure section for specific instructions on how to connect the transformer and backup battery If desired you can wire program and test each section individually by powering up temporarily for programming and testing each section before final power up Refer to the Final Power U p Procedure section for
302. or example if all other programming was done via downloading Use this mode only after all other zone information has been programmed including transmitter loop numbers 1 Enter Data Field Programming M ode Installer Code 8000 2 From Data Field Programming M ode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 3 Press O NO repeatedly until the SEQUENTIAL LEARN prompt appears SEQUENTIAL LEARN Toenroll or delete a device s serial number enter 1 yes Enter 0 1 yes Oto skip tothe next main menu option If the system has been set up to use 5800 Series RF and a program tool has not been programmed the following PROGRAM TOOL prompt will be displayed If the system has not been set up to use 5800 Series RF or a program tool has already been programmed the system will advance to the TECHNOLOGY TYPE prompt PROGRAM TOOL If a program tool is being used enter 1 If not using a tool 0 NO 1 YES 0 enter 0 When a 0 is entered the system will advance to the TECHNOLOGY TYPE prompt 000 INPUT S N L If lis entered the system will prompt for the unit s serial iosa number Enter the program tool s serial number using one of the following methods a Enter the 7 digit serial number for the transmitter Or b Press any button on the transmitter The keypad should beep three times and display the serial number of the tool 25 9 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 000 PROG AS BR 3 In this example
303. or output controls and are the basis of the scheduling system These windows are shared among all 8 partitions Time Windows Worksheet Thefollowing worksheet will help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of this system before programming the time window definitions for this installation Note that time windows can span midnight Time Window Start Time Stop Time Number HH MM HH MM 6 _ O 3 20 O A time window must have a start and a stop time Time Windows Programming Enter Scheduling Mode by entering Installer Code 80 The keypad will display the TimeWindow Programming prompt Time Window Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows 1Yes 0 No 0 Time Window Enter the 2 digit time window number 01 20 to be 01 20 00 Quit 01 programmed Press to accept the entry Enter 00 at the TIME WINDOW 7 prompt to quit time window programming and display the Quit prompt 01 TIME WINDOW If a time window number was entered the cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of window entry Enter the desired start of window hour and press The cursor will move to the minutes Enter the desired minutes and press Toggle the AM PM indication by pressing any key 0 9 whilethe cursor is under the A P position and then press Repeat this to program the stop of window entry When the entry is completed the TIME WINDOW 7 prompt is
304. ord of the descriptor is limited to 6 characters if you want it to fit on the top line of the display z wW N In addition up to 20 installer defined words can be added to those already in memory Thus when an alarm or trouble occurs in a zone an appropriate description for the location of that zone will be displayed at the keypad A custom installer s message can be programmed for each partition which will be displayed when the system is Ready e g THE PETERSON S To program alpha descriptors enter Programming mode then press 93 to display ZONE PROG Press O NO twice to display ALPHA PROG Press 1 to enter Alpha Programming There are 6 sub menu selections that will be displayed one at a time Press 1 to select the mode desired Press Oto display the next mode available The alpha menu selections are ZONE DESCRIP for entering zone descriptors DEFAULT SCREEN for creating custom message displayed when system ready CUSTOM WORD for creating custom words for use in descriptors 25 16 Section 25 93 Menu Mode Programming PART DESCRI P for creating 4 character partition names EXIT EDIT MODE Press 1to exit back to 93 Menu Mode 4 Refer tothe sections that follow for procedures for adding alpha descriptors Zone Descriptors l Select ZONE DESCRIPTOR mode The keypad keys perform the following functions 3 Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in ascending alphabetical order 1 Scrolls both alph
305. otice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved There are no user serviceable components in this product and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs This equipment is hearing aid compatible When programming or making test calls to an emergency number briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Appendix A 4 Appendix A Regulatory Agency Statements CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS DOC STATEMEN
306. partition specific 995 996 999 Duress Enter 1 for each panic duress for which reporting is desired Note To enable Duress reporting a non zero report code must be assigned to Zone 992 duress in Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section 24 9 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 24 10 87 88 89 90 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 21 ENTRY WARNING partition specific 1 Enter 0 for 3 short beeps or 1for slow beeps that continue for the entire entry delay period BURG ALARM COMM DELAY partition specific 0 Enter 0 for no delay on burglary alarm communication Enter 1 for 16 second delay no delay on 24 hour reports Must be O for UL installations RESTORE REPORT TIMING 0 Enter Ofor instant Restore report as zone restores Enter 1 for reporting after bell timeout if zone restored Enter 2 for Restore report when system is subsequently disarmed Must be 2 for commercial fire or UL commercial burglary installation SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT db ar db ar 15 partition specific Enter 00 09 B F 11 15 15 15 15 Enter the 3 or 4 digit number depending on report format for the secondary subscriber account 00 09 B F 11 15 Each number requires a 2 digit entry to allow entry of hexadecimal digits B F If a 3 digit number is to be used enter data only in the first 6 locations leaving the last two unfilled Default 15 15 15 15 Erasethe field by
307. ponds to faults in that zone Refer to the Zone Type Definitions section for detailed definitions of each zonetype Enter the zone type desired or change it if necessary Available zone types are listed below 00 Assign for Unused Zones 17 Fire Waterflow 01 Entry Exit 1 Burglary 18 Fire Supervisory 02 Entry E xit 2 Burglary 19 24 Hour Trouble 03 Perimeter Burglary 20 Arm STAYT 04 Interior Follower Burglary 21 ArmAWAYT 05 Trouble Day Alarm Night 22 Disarmt 06 24 Hr Silent Alarm 23 NoAlarm Response 07 24 Hr Audible Alarm e g relay activation 08 24 Hr Auxiliary 27 Access Point 09 Fire Without Verification 28 MLB Supervision 10 Interior Delay Burglary if VGM installed 16 Fire With Verification T These are special zone types used with 5800 Series Wireless Pushbutton Units which will result in arming the system in the STAY or AWAY mode or disarming of the system depending on the selection made Press to continue If response type 27 was selected this prompt will be displayed Enter the access point to be controlled by the input type 00 31 Select whether the access point is an entry or exit point 0 entry l exit Enter the partition number 1 8 you are assigning this zone to Press to continue Enter the report code The report code consists of 2 hexadecimal digits each in turn consisting of 2 numerical digits For example for a report code of 3C enter 03 for 3
308. ponse based on the entry in data field 3 13 Type 19 24 Hour Trouble An open or short on this zone type causes a trouble response No external alarm sounders are activated Type 20 Arm STAY This is a Special purpose zone type used with 5800 Series wireless transmitters which will result in arming the system in the STAY Mode when the zone is activated Type 21 Arm AWAY This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800 Series wireless transmitters which will result in arming the system in the AWAY Mode when the zone is activated Type 22 Disarm This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800 Series wireless transmitters which will result in disarming the system when the zone is activated Type 23 No Alarm Response This zone type can be used on a zone when an output relay action is desired but with no accompanying alarm e g for lobby door access Section 22 Zone Type Definitions Type 27 Access Point This zone type indicates that an input device hardwired zone wireless zone keypad access control relay etc is controlling an access point entry e g a door The access point entry relay can be assigned to an access control relay controlled by the VISTA 128F B ECP relay 4204 or to the access control system independent of the VISTA 128FB Type 28 Main Logic Board MLB Supervision This zone type assigns a zone to supervise the MLB If communication between the MLB and the Vista Ga
309. ported with Open Close reports in ADEM CO High Speed Loading Communication Defaults To help expedite the installation the system provides 4 different communication defaults Low Speed ADEM CO Express ADEMCO High Speed and ADEM CO s Contact ID Y ou may load communications defaults at any time However it is recommended that the panel be defaulted first 97 only if no other programming has been done If other programming has already been done there is no need to default the panel 27 4 Low Speed 94 80 ADEMCO Express 94 81 ADEMCO High Speed 94 82 ADE MCO s Contact ID 94 83 Section 27 System Communications Toload communication defaults do the following Enter Program Mode Installer Code 8000 Once the Programming Mode is entered first press 94 and then enter one of the following field numbers TABLE OF DEFAULT PROGRAMMING COMMANDS PRESS TO LOAD THIS DEFAULT PROGRAM SET Low Speed communication defaults ADEMCO 4 2 Express communication defaults ADEMCO High Speed communication defaults Contact D communication defaults Loading communication defaults results in the following Selects low speed standard format with no checksum for both phone numbers Assigns the following report codes 03 for zones 003 047 056 061 064 128 01 for zones 001 002 and 048 055 fire zones 02 for zones 062 063 panic transmitters amp 995 996 999 keypad panics 09 for all alarm resto
310. ppear Keypads can be individually programmed to suppress arm disarm beeps entry exit beeps and chime mode beeps This helps prevent unwanted sounds from disturbing users in other areas of the premises Enter a number 00 03 for the keypad sounding suppression options desired for the keypad as follows 00 no suppression 01 suppress arm disarm amp entry exit beeps 02 suppress chime mode beeps only 03 suppress arm disarm entry exit and chime mode beeps Press to accept entry If device type 1 alpha keypad is entered this prompt will appear Each keypad can give users with access to multi ple partitions the ability to arm and disarm those partitions from it To enable this keypad for global arming disarming enter 1 To prevent the ability to use this keypad for global arming disarming enter O Press to accept entry If device type 3 RF Receiver is selected this prompt will appear Enter the 2 digit HouselD 00 31 Thisis required for 5700 Series systems only or if using a wireless keypad 5827 5827BD with a 5800 Series system Press to accept entry If device type 4 relay module is selected this prompt will appear Enter Lif the unit is a 4204CF If not enter O If lis entered only Relay 1 Output A and relay 3 Output B on each module are able to be programmed for functions This module is usually used to add two additional supervised bell outputs to the system Press to accept entr
311. programming the global fields If the system has only 1 partition the partition specific fields will not be automatically skipped To program system wide data fields do the following 1 Enter Program Mode Installer code 8000 2 After entry into the Program M ode the following will be displayed Program Mode Fill View 00 3 Ifthe control has not been programmed before enter 97 to load factory defaults 4 Press and enter the first field number to be programmed for example 00 I nstaller s Code Make the desired entry When the field is complete the keypad will beep three times and will advance to the next field If you do not desire to change the next field press x and enter the next field number to be programmed First Page of fields 00 90 press 99 or 98 to exit Program Mode 5 fthenumber of digits that you enter in a data field is fewer than the maximum permitted for example a phone number the keypad displays the last entry and waits To proceed enter the next data field you wish to program e g press 08 Partition specific programming fields are skipped unless entered specifically or the system is set up for 1 partition only 6 Tochangetothe next page of fields press 94 Toreturn tothe previous page of fields press 99 Programming Partition Specific Data Fields To program partition specific data fields once in Program Mode do the following l Press 91 which will prompt you
312. pth Electrical Voltage I nput Current Drain Interface Wiring RED BLUE GREEN YELLOW BLACK Appendix D 2 6 25 inches 4 75 inches 1 25 inches 12VDC 100 mA 12VDC input 4 auxiliary power Not Used Data to control panel Data from control panel Ground and connection from supplemental power supply 70 Relay Mode 3 1 116 0 31 7 93 Menu Mode Key Commands 21 5 25 3 93 Menu Mode Programming 21 4 25 1 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT 24 15 1451 transfOETiel iuuocce ceno eter inn 20 1 D 1 402 3 3 3 311 27 2 2 Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors 6 5 2 Wire Smoke Detectors n 6 2 4 Wire Smoke Detectors 6 3 24 hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08 22 2 24 hour Audible Alarm Type 07 22 2 24 hour Silent Alarm Type 06 22 2 24 Hour Trouble Type 19 ssssssssnncinnn 22 3 3 1 and 4 1 Expanded Formats 27 2 3 1 and 4 1 Standard Formats 27 2 4100SM Interface Module 12 1 12 10 18 1 28 2 4100APG LED Indications 19 4 4100APG Pager Interface 19 1 4197 Polling Loop Extender
313. r if being used for UL commercial fire and burglary installations e hecontrol checks the receiver connections about every 45 seconds If the panel has lost communication with the receiver a CHECK or TRBL message will appear for the respective receiver supervisory zone 8 2 digit receiver device address for example Device address 05 supervisory zone 805 Supervisory zones must be programmed for 24 hour trouble type 19 The CHECK or TRBL display may be an indication that the wiring to the receiver is incorrect or that the DIP switches are not set for the same address the receiver was assigned to in the control s Device Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Section 8 Wireless Zone E xpansion e Two identical receivers can be used to provide either a greater area of coverage or redundant protection Any zone from 1 to 63 can be used as a 5700 Series wireless zone Any zone from 1 to 128 can be used as a 5800 Series wireless zone with the exception of zone 64 reserved for a wireless keypad RF System Installation Advisories 1 Placethereceiver in a high centrally located area for best reception Do not place it on or near metal objects This will decrease the range and or block transmissions 2 For maximum range install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the control panel or any keypads to avoid interference from the microprocessors in these units 3 If dual receivers are used A Both must beat least
314. r teea Master OpeB 1 n the above example User 3 has MASTER authority in Partition 1 and OPERATOR B authority in Partition 2 His user number is the same for both partitions Note that if a user number is already being used in a partition the system will automatically assign a new user an unused number Also notice that no access is allowed for this user into Partitions 3 8 Attempts to access these partitions would be denied automatically To ADD a Master Manager or Operator Code During user code entry normal key depressions at other keypads in a partition will be ignored However panic key depression will cause an alarm and terminate user entry 30 4 Section 30 User Access Codes Enter Installer Codell 8 T new user 002 150 new user s code TOr Master or Manager Code but must be code with higher level of authority than the code being changed i e Master Code can add a Manager or Operator level Code but cannot add another Master Code a Manager Code can add an Operator level Code but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code K eypad will prompt for the authority level for this user User Number 003 Enter Auth Level Open Close Rep 0 2 NO 1 YES Access Group Enter 0 8 HF Button OZNO 1 YES Enter Button ZN 001 087 Multi Access 0 NO 1 YES Enter the level number as follows 1 Master arm disarm bypass add or modify lower level users
315. r O PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR ALARMS This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Alarm reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR ALARMS This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Alarm reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TROUBLES This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Trouble reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TROUBLES This field is used to enter the Pager D number for Trouble reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR BYPASSES This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Bypass reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR BYPASSES LL titty i This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Bypass reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are requ
316. ransmitter as this will cause inaccurate results e Ifasinglereceiver is used the keypad will beep three times to indicate signal reception If two receivers are used the keypad will beep once if the first receiver recei ved the signal twice if the second receiver received the signal and three times if both receivers heard the signal which is desirable for redundant configurations fthekeypad does not beep reorient or move the transmitter to another location Usually a few inches in either direction is all that is required 3 Mount thetransmitter according to the instructions provided with the transmitter 4 Exit the mode by entering Installer Code 1 SECTION 9 Relay Outputs In This Section Relay Basics Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Re ay Modules Relay Basics Relays used in conjunction with this control panel are programmable switches that can be used to perform many different functions They can be used to turn lights on and off control sounders and doors or for status indications In this system each device must be programmed as to how to act ACTION when to activate START and when to deactivate STOP Each of these is described in Rday Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section This control supports up to eight 4204 or sixteen 4204CF Relay Modules Each 4204 Module provides 4 relays with Form C normally open and normally closed contacts This means you can program up to 32 relays to
317. re is the same as that of the Master who is adding the new user Level 2 Manager Codes Levels 3 5 Can perform all system functions arm disarm bypass etc programmed by Master May add delete or change other users of the system below this level Manager cannot assign anybody a level of O 1 or 2 May change his own code Open Close reporting of added users areis the same as that of the Manager whois adding the new user Operator Codes Can arm and disarm the system to the authority assigned but cannot add or modify any user code May operate a partition with one of the three Operator authority levels A through C in the table below Section 30 User Access Codes Functions Permitted Operator A Arm Disarm Bypass Operator C Arm Disarm only if armed with same code Operator C sometimes known as the Babysitter Code cannot disarm the system unless the system was armed with that code This code is usually assigned to persons who may have the need to arm and disarm the system at specific times only e g a babysitter needs to control the system only when babysitting Level 6 Duress Codes Sendsasilent alarm to a central monitoring station if the user is being forced to disarm or arm the system under threat only useful if the system is connected to a central station e When the system s Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are connected to another communi cation s media Derived Channel Long Range Radio no
318. re must be used Note that the maximum total wire length supported is cut in half when shielded wire is used 2 Wire each device to the polling loop making sure to use correct polarity when making connections refer to the device s instructions If you are using serial number devices and intend to have the control enroll each serial number automatically wire no more than 25 of these devices to the control at a time Then power up and program them as described in Zone Programming of the 93 Menu Mode Programmi ng section before connecting the next 25 Leave previously enrolled devices connected 3 If you intend to manually enter the serial numbers through the keypad or through V LINK or Compass downloading software all the devices may be connected before powering up to program 4 Notethe polling loop devices that have DIP switches on them Set each device s DIP switches for the zone number you are assigning it Refer to the device s instructions or the DIP Switch Tables at the end of this manual when setting addresses Certain polling loop devices such as the 4193SN and 4191SN do not have DI P switches nstead they have embedded serial numbers which must be enrolled by the control during Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Section 7 2 WirePolling Loop Expansion Certain polling loop devices have a DIP switch which can be used either to select the device s zone number or to select the enrolling of a unique embedded serial n
319. rent i Use polarized sounding devices 2k note 2 2k 2k 2k drawn from aux pwr 1 aux BURG CKTS Supervision not req d i pwr 2 polling loop bell 1 and i EOLRs not req d May use non ZONE 1 8 NOTES bell 2 cannot exceed 2 3A i polarized devices All zones provide Style B supervision Ratings for zones 1 2 NOTE 2 i Ratings 10 14VDC 1 7A max Zone resistance excluding EOLR 10 14VDC TO OTHER DEVICES 2k EOLR is Ademco model 610 7 i See note 1 see instructions Zones 1 2 8 100 ohms max 2mA max for smoke det up to 16 detectors Polling Loop NOTE 3 for compatible devices Other zones 300 ohms max of the type specified in the instructions Ratings See instructions on setting i For commercial fire bell timeout Si a did S ID A supervised addresses amp for max of keypads must be a minimum of 6 minutes D eters 128mA max See note 1 and wire run length restrictions Tike and QUE anon loop See instructions for Keypad color subject to approval ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT N C contacts for burg usage only compatible devices of local authority THE OUTPUT OF THE 1451 TRANSFORMER and for max wire ie a EE i run length VISTA 1 28FB The VISTA 128 Main Dialer Complies with FCC Rules Part 68 FCC Reg No AC398U 68192 AL E SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS Ringer Equivalence 0 7B ADEMCO GROUP 165 Eileen Way Syo
320. replaced LSENS and a zone number indicates a smoke detector with a low sensitivity level Detectors with a low sensitivity might not detect a smoke condition The detector should be cleaned or replaced RCVR SET UP ERROR at the keypad indicates that the system has more wireless zones programmed than the wireless receiver can support If this is not corrected none of the zones in the system will be protected If additional wireless zones are desired use an appropriate receiver MODEM COMM at the keypad indicates that the control is on line with a remote computer System Off Normal Report If programmed a unique Off Normal report will be generated instead of the periodic test report if any of the following conditions are present at the time of the report e Firetrouble on any zone zone response types 9 16 17 18 e Firesupervisory present zone response type 18 Unrestored fire alarm on any zone e Bypass of any fire zone e Bell circuit fault for any supervised fire bell e Bypass disable of any supervised fire bell e Telco fault of either dialer line e Bypass disable of either dialer e Earth ground fault present e Bypass of earth ground supervisory zone e Fault on LORRA XMIT OK signal if enabled e LORRA trigger bypassed ACfailure Low system battery Keypad supervision fault This report will be sent as follows Contact I D Code 608 High Speed Channel 3 of system report used channel 9 6
321. res Enables all zone type restores For expanded reporting enable fields 52 and 53 Selects ADEM CO express reporting format with checksum for both phone numbers Report codes for zones 001 128 RF receiver and keypad panics are sent as their respective zone ID numbers Duress is sent as DD Alarm restore is E 4 2nd digit Enables all zone type restores Selects ADEM CO High Speed format with no checksum for both phone numbers Zone reporting is assigned to channels as described later in this section Enables all zone type restores Enables duress to be sent Selects Contact I D format for both phone numbers Reporting is enabled for all zones Enables all zone type restores Refer to the Table of Contact ID Event Codes to follow 27 5 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES Code Definition Smoke Alarm Fire w Verification Audible Panic Interior Burglary 27 6 Code Definition 407 Remote Arm Disarm Download 408 411 421 Access Granted 4 AcessGrated 1 423 Door Force Open 4 425 426 427 428 429 4 431 432 Access Point Relay Trigger Fail 22 24 30 33 Access Point DSM nshunt 34 Access Point RTE Shunt 41 Armed STAY 451 Early Open Close 52 Late Open Close 53 54 55 57 59 520 524 4 4 4 501 521 522 551 Main Backup Dialer Bypass 570
322. rily if necessary 2 With all hardwired zones intact the alpha keypads connected to the system should display DISARMED READY TO ARM If the following is displayed instead press the X key to display the faulted zone s DISARMED Press to show faults Restore any faulted zone s as necessary also make sure that you have connected a 2000 ohm E OL resistor across the terminals of unused zones When the DISARMED READY TO ARM message is displayed you can proceed to the next step 3 Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to ensure that it is being monitored by the system Each time a zone is faulted the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the number of the faulted zone Tripping fire and panic zones will cause external sounders to sound and may trigger the dialer When each zone is restored the READY TO ARM message should appear again If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition s keypad s check both keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment When you get the proper displays on the keypad s the hardwired zones in the system are functioning properly 4 Power down and continue to the next section SECTION 7 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion Zones 009 128 In This Section Polling Loop Overview Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones Wiring Addressing RPM Devices Pol
323. rmed This manual uses various icons to denote critical notes and technical tips to assist you with the installation of this system These are easily seen in the left hand column of the relevant information xi Conventions Used in This Manual Before you begin using this manual it is important that you understand the meaning of the following symbols icons U L These notes include specific information which must be followed if you are installing this system for a UL Listed application cause damage to the system Please read each warning carefully This symbol also denotes A warnings about physical harm to the user Enter Zn Num Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to alpha Oude keypad display prompts These prompts are shown in a single line box 00 When programming the system data fields are indicated by a star followed by the data field number These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the installation and which if not observed could result in operational difficulties This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system or could PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS Unless noted otherwise references to specific model numbers represent ADEMCO products xii SECTION 1 General Description In This Section General Features General Features The VISTA 128FB is an 8 partition
324. rs keypad sounding and external sounding will occur and the zone s in alarm will be displayed on the keypad Pressing any key will silence the keypad sounder for 10 seconds Disarming the system will silence both keypad and external sounders When the system is disarmed the system s memory of alarm causes any zones that were in an alarm condition during the armed period to be displayed To clear this display simply repeat the disarm sequence enter the security code and press the OFF key The keypads also feature chime annunciation and 3 panic keys for silent audible fire or personal emergency alarms which can notify the central station of an alarm condition if that service is connected 31 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Arming Functions The following is a brief list of system commands For detailed information concerning system functions refer to the User s Manual Display Faulted Before arming the system must bein the READY condition all Zones zones must be intact If the NOT READY message appears press the READY key to display faulted zones Arming Away Enter code 2 AWAY Arming Stay Enter code 3 STAY all zones designated as zone types 4 and 10 will be automatically bypassed Arming Instant Enter code 7 INSTANT same as STAY without entry delay Arming Enter code 4 MAXI MUM same as AWAY without entry delay Maximum Disarming Enter code 1 OFF
325. rtition from which the user may be changed or deleted To CHANGE a Master Manager or Operator Code Enter Installer code 8 User number 002 150 new user s code Or Master or Manager code but must be code with higher level of authority than the code being changed i e Master Code can change a Manager or Operator level Code but cannot change another M aster Code a Manager Code can change an Operator level Code but cannot change a Master or another Manager Code User Number 003 NEW USER The system detects that the user number is already assigned and will prompt if this is a new user Press 0 NO The system will then confirm that the change is allowed based on authorization level To Add an RF Key to an Existing User To add an RF key to an existing user or to change a user s global arm option first delete that user s code then re add the user code as described in the To ADD a Master Manager or Operator Code paragraph 30 6 Section 30 User Access Codes To Delete a Master Manager or Operator Code Enter your code 8 User number 002 150 your code again Installer Master or Manager Code but must be code with higher level of authority than the code being deleted i e Master Code can delete a Manager or Operator level Code but cannot delete another Master Code a Manager Code can delete an Operator level Code but cannot delete a Master or another Manager Code OK TO D
326. ry exit and or interior zone s Therest of the system will be armed n addition the following dialer reports will be sent to the central station if programmed e Exit Error by User not sent if using ADEM CO High Speed format e Exit Error by Zone Sent as regular alarm if using ADEM CO High Speed format e Bypass reports VISTA 128FB Installation nstructions Recent Close Report Another report designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 5 minutes of arming is called the Recent Close report This report as well as the Exit Error reports are programmed in Report Code Programming Modein 93 Menu Mode Exit Delay Reset UL This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation This feature is designed to allow an operator to re enter the premises to retrieve a forgotten item without triggering an alarm This feature is enabled in program field 1 21 and works in the following way When the panel is armed the normal exit delay begins After the user exits and the door closes the exit delay time is reset to 60 seconds If within this 60 second period the entry door is re opened the panel will restart the exit delay sequence using the programmed exit delay time This feature will only be activated once after arming Cross Zoning UL This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation The Cross Zoning feature is designed so that a combination o
327. s 7720 WIRING DIAGRAM J2 CONNECTOR 4142TR CABLE 4142TR CABLE WIRE gt gt COLORS 7720 RADIO SEE 7720 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MORE DETAILED INSTALLATION USE 7720 ULF INSTEAD INFORMATION FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS YELLOW FIRE ALARM BURG AUDIBLE PANIC ALARM TROUBLE ZONE TROUBLE TELCO FAULT ETC SILENT PANIC DURESS ALARM NOTES MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C COM RUN WIRING FROM C COM TO 7720 IN CONDUIT Figure 12 5a Connections to 7720 Long Range Radio 12 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 7720 ULF WIRING DIAGRAM J2 CONNECTOR 3 RADIO FAULT PROGRAM FOR SHORT ON FAULT 7720 ULF RADIO SEE 7720 ULF INSTRUCTIONS FOR MORE DETAILED INSTALLATION CABLE gt INFORMATION 4142TR CABLE WIRE COLORS YELLOW CUT RESISTOR JUMPERS Z1 Z5 DO NOT USE 2k EOL RESISTOR PROGRAM 7720 ULF FOR SLAVE OPERATION PROGRAM ZONES 1 4 AS ALARM ZONES AND ZONE 5 AS A TROUBLE ZONE FIRE ALARM FIRE SUPERVISORY BURG AUDIBLE PANIC ALARM TROUBLE ZONE TROUBLE TELCO FAULT ETC SILENT PANIC DURESS ALARM NOTES MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C COM RUN WIRING FROM C COM TO 7720ULF IN CONDUIT Figure 12 5b Connections to 7720ULF Long RangeRadio 12 8 Section 12 J 2 Trigger Outputs J2 CONNECTOR amp 4142TR CABLE WIRES COLORS CONNECT TO POLLING LOOP GROUND SCREW 4142TR CABLE 4 7K NOTE 7920SE RADIO Om dE Z F
328. s the electronic components could fail at any time The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance This alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly The security keypad and remote keypad should be tested as well Wireless transmitters used in some systems are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years depending on the environment usage and the specific wireless device being used External factors such as humidity high or low temperatures as well as large swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation This wireless system however can identify a true low battery situation thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate but an alarm system is not a substitute for insurance Homeowners property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and continue to insure their lives and property We continue to develop new and improved protection devices Users of alarm systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY Alarm Device Manufacturing Company a
329. s Using Multiple Extender M 7 4 8 1 5881 RF Receiver cover removed 8 3 Sla 4204 Rday Modul erii bari ore ei iet ar ne 9 2 ID 4204CF Rday Mod l qos EsH 11111 900 9 3 10 1 4285 VIP Module Connections 10 3 11 1 Audio Alarm Verification Module CONNECTIONS i 11 3 12 1 2 Pin Assignments and FUNCHONS iii 12 2 12 2 Remote Keypad Sounder 6 12 2 12 35 RONEN Gs 11 711111111111 1 0 0 3 12 3 124 SIAOLED 6 2333 3 331 1 111 111 1 11111111111111111 CUR UYE R 12 5 12 5ba Connecti ons to 7720 Long
330. s a delay before auto disarming This delay is added to the end of the disarm time window e hedelay is set in 4 minute increments up to 56 minutes in partition specific program field 2 07 26 2 Section 26 Scheduling Options Restrict Disarming e This option allows disarming by users only during the disarm time window and during the arming time window in case user needs to re enter premises after manually arming the partition e This option is set in partition specific field 2 10 e ffield 2 10 is set it is highly recommended to set field 2 11 as well This field allows the partition to be disarmed outside the arm disarm time windows only if the partition is in alarm Exception Reports e This option allows the reporting of openings and closings to the central station only if the arming and disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening and closing time windows e This option is set in partition specific field 2 09 e The system can be programmed to send No Opening and No Closing reports if the partition is not armed or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time window Time Driven Events Byusingthetime windows the system can automatically activate and de activate relays at predetermined times to turn lights or other devices on and off hetime driven events can be activated at different times in relation to the time window 1 Atthe beginning of a time window 2 Attheend of a time window 3 Duri
331. s not used TOGGLE on and off alternately with each activation of event START STT The START programming determines when and under what conditions the device will be activated The following START options are available 1 EVENT EV isthe condition alarm fault trouble that must occur to a zone or group of zones zone list in order to activate the device These conditions apply only when a zonelist is used The different choices for EVENT arelisted below and in Programming Relays later in this section ALARM Relay action begins upon any alarm in an assigned zone in the zone list FAULT Relay action begins upon any opening of an assigned zone in the zone list ROUBLE Relay action begins upon any trouble condition in an assigned zone in the zone list NORESPONSE Relay action is not dependent upon one of the above events ZONE LIST ZL is a group of zones to which the EVENT applies in order to activate a particular device Note that there are a total of 8 zone lists that can be programmed when the selected EVENT alarm fault or trouble occurs in any zone in the selected Start ZONE LIST 1 8 activation of the selected device will START 25 25 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 2 ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION ZT If all zones to be used to 25 26 STOP STP 3 start the device have the same response type and there are no other zones of this type which are not to activate this device
332. s pressed Enter O NO to enroll later If O is entered the system will advance to the summary screen prompt 010 INPUT S N This prompt is displayed if 1 YES is entered in response to the LEARN S N prompt The serial number may be enrolled by one of two methods a Enter the 7 digit serial number printed on the device using an alpha keypad AXXX XXXX Or b Activate the device by faulting or restoring the input you wish to use for that zone e g press a button open or dose a door etc 010 INPUT S N The system will enroll the serial number of the first device A022 4064 heard If the serial and loop number combination is already present in the system the keypad will sound a single long beep and display the word DUPLICATE along with the serial number and the number of the zone containing the serial loop number combination The system will then enter an optional confirmation mode so that the operation of the actual programmed input can be confirmed Activate the loop input or button that corresponds to this zone We recommend that you confirm the programming of every device before proceeding to the next zone 010 CONFIRM RF 1 When the system sees activity on the appropriate input it will A022 4064 1 beep three times and display the confirmation message At any time during this step you may press the key on the keypad or the upper left hand button of the program tool if you are satisfied with the serial and l
333. s purpose 3 Run 120VAC wiring to the enclosure in conduit A dedicated circuit must be used Use wire nuts to splice the 120VAC wires to the transformer s white and black primary leads Connect the earth ground post on the back of the enclosure to a good earth ground 4 Usewirenuts to splice the transformer blue 18VAC secondary leads to 16AWG wire which is run in conduit to the panel These wires are connected to panel terminals 1 amp 2 e Use wires having insulation rated for at least 90 C operation and suitable for non power limited applications Usecare to keep 18VAC wiring separated from all other wiring inside the panel s enclosure This must be done by running non power limited 18VAC wiring into the panel s enclosure via one of the knockouts on the left hand side of the enclosure and then tie wrapping these wires to the tie wrap loops located near the knockout 20 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 5 Replacethe front cover of the enclosure and fasten with the screws supplied A few seconds after power is applied to the control the keypad should display DISARMED READY TO ARM Ifthereis no keypad display check that the 1451 Transformer is supplying proper voltage to the panel about 17 19 5VAC when the power line voltage is 110 120VAC Earth Ground Connections 1 Connect the earth ground post inside the 1451 enclosure to a good earth ground use grounding methods specified in the National Electric
334. s the event is to be Hit 0 8 x x activated Press Oto toggle all days on or off or else press keys 1 8 to toggle the letter x under the day on or off Monday 1 Holiday H 8 When all entries have been made the TIMED EVENT 72 prompt is displayed again Repeat the procedure for each timed event required for the installation Quit Enter O at the Quit prompt to return to the main menu 01 YES 0 NO 0 choices and continue programming Enter 1to quit Scheduling Menu Mode 26 15 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Limitation of Access Schedules Limitation of Access is a means by which a user s access code is limited to working during a certain period of time The system provides 8 Access Schedules each of which consists of two time windows for each day of the week and two time windows for holidays typically one for an opening time window and the second for a closing time window A user required to follow a schedule would be assigned to an access group of the same number 1 8 i e schedule 1 2 group 1 The user s access code is assigned to a group when that user is added to the system If nolimitations apply enter O Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access schedule Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat Sun Hol W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 ptt ft ft tt ON NN NN E 2 ft LL LL Lll 1 1 1 1 11 i
335. sent during a reporting session to the primary phone number the control will trigger the AAV if at least one of the messages was an Alarm report If Contact ID format is selected for the primary phone number and a Cancel report code is enabled the control will send a Listen in to Follow message E vent Code 606 which signals the 685 rev 4 6 or higher to hold the phone connection for 1 minute Once triggering occurs the control will give up the phone line to the AAV Module without breaking connection with the central station During the time the AAV is active all sirens and all continuous keypad sounds in all partitions will be shut off When the AAV indicates that the audio alarm verification session is completed all keypad sounds will be restored Sirens will be restored if the alarm timeout period has not expired As part of its fail safe software the control will limit all audio alarm verification sessions to 15 minutes This is because once the session begins the AAV Module controls the duration 11 1 VISTA 128FB Installation nstructi ons If a new fire alarm should occur during a session the control will break the phone connection and send the new Fire Alarm report then re trigger the AAV Mode All other dialer messages triggered during ongoing conversation will be held until either the AAV Module signals that it is inactive or the 15 minute ti meout occurs The AAV Module is triggered via the use of a 4204 Relay as sho
336. sset New York 11791 Copyright 1998 PITTWAY CORPORATION N8988 5 98
337. status use the highlighted words in the alpha vocabulary list in the Aloha Programming part of this section To enter relay voice descriptors do the following 1 From Data Field Programming Mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 2 Press 0 NO to each menu option until the RLY VOI CE DESCR prompt is displayed Follow theinstructions below Whilein this mode press to advance to next screen Press 4 to back up to previous screen RLY VOICE DESCR 0 no 1 yes ENTER RELAY NO 00 QUIT 01 01 ENTER DESC d1 01 ENTER DESC d3 01 ENTER DESC d2 Section 25 93 Menu Mode Programming Press 1to program voice descriptors for relays Enter the 2 digit relay number 01 32 for the relay desired or enter 00 to quit Relay Voice Descriptor Programming M ode Press From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter the 3 digit index number for the first word of the relay descri ptor phrase Press to accept entry From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter the 3 digit index number for the second word of the relay descriptor phrase If second word is not desired press 000 Press to accept entry From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter the 3 digit index number for the third word of the relay descriptor phrase If third word is not desired press 000 Press to accept entry The ENTER RELAY NO prompt will appear Enter the next relay number to be programmed
338. t all times Contacting Technical Support PLEASE before you call Technical Support be sure you READ THE INSTRUCTIONS Check all wiring connections Determinethat the power supply and or backup battery are supplying proper voltages e Verify your programming information where applicable Besureall keypads and devices are addressed properly Notethe proper model number of this product and the version level if known along with any documentation that came with the product Note your ADEMCO customer number and or company name Having this information handy will make it easier for us to serve you quickly and effectively Y ou may contact Technical Support via Toll Free Fax Please include your return fax number Y ou will receive a reply within 24 hours Y ou may also contact Technical Support via modem to ATLIS BBS Tech Support s Electronic Bulletin Board System Replies are posted within 24 hours East Coast Technical Support 1 800 645 7492 8 a m 6 p m E S T West Coast Technical Support 1 800 458 9469 8 a m 5 p m P S T Technical Support F ax Number 1 800 447 5086 ATLIS BBS Electronic Bulletin Board System 1 516 496 3980 1200 28 8 Baud 8 Data Bits 1 Start Stop Bit No Parity ATLIS FAX Automated Document Retrieval System 1 800 573 0153 or 1 516 921 6704 ext 1667 ADEMCO World Wide Web Page HTTP WWW ADEMCO COM Internet E Mail Address ADEMCO TECH _SPRT ADEMCO 165 ADEMCO COM A
339. t it to the VISTA 128F B burglary audible panic alarm trigger For Grade AA Service You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio e Connect the 7920SE tothe VISTA 128F B burglary audible panic alarm trigger UL611 UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm Follow the instructions for UL 609 local installations given above For Grade A Service You must usethe VISTA 128F B s dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio e Connect the control s burglary audible panic alarm trigger on J 2 header to the 7720 Program a 24 hour trouble response for Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision The VISTA 128FB will activate the burglary audible panic trigger when a corresponding alarm is detected and will activate the trouble trigger when a main dialer fault is detected e Alsoconnect the 7720 s radio fault output to one of the VISTA 128F B s EOLR supervised zones i e 1 8 Program this zone for a trouble by day alarm by night type 05 or a 24 hour alarm type 07 08 response to radio faults e Program the control s dialer to send Burglary Alarm Trouble Opening Closing and Low Battery reports Appendix A 2 Appendix A Regulatory Agency Statements For Grade AA Service e Follow the instructions for Grade A service except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720 California State Fire Marshal CSFM Requirements 24 hour backup The California State Fire Marshal has published new regulations which require that all residential fire alarm contro
340. t on a continuous basis An answer of 0 means that this schedule will be in effect for one week only The letter x under the day will then be cleared but all other entries for the output device will remain programmed Press to accept entry The system will quit User Scheduling M ode and return to normal operating mode 26 20 SECTION 27 System Communication In This Section A Successful Transmission Reporting Formats Loading Communication Defaults A Successful Transmission When a control panel calls the central station receiver it waits to hear a handshake frequency from the receiver to confirm that the receiver is on line and ready to receive its message Oncethe panel hears the handshake it is programmed to listen for it sends its message The panel then waits for a kissoff frequency from the receiver acknowledging that the message was received and understood Once the handshake frequency is received and understood by the panel the panel will send its message If thereis an error in the transmission the receiver does not receive a valid message the kissoff frequency will not be given by the central station receiver The panel will make a number of attempts to the primary telephone number and a number of attempts to the secondary telephone number if programmed to get a valid message through Thenumber of attempts that are made to each number is determined by the programming of field 3 21 If the pan
341. ta Gateway Module is installed along with the ADEM CO PassPoint Access Control System then these same inputs will automatically control the appropriate access points in the PassPoint ACS Entering User Code 75 will control the state protect bypass lock of a door Entering User Code 76 will pass a script number to the PassPoint ACS Entering User Code 77 will unbypass a PassPoint ACS zone see the Access Control section 31 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Delaying Closing Time f open close schedules are used end users can manually delay closing time by extending the dosing window by 1 or 2 hours This is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than usual Theuser must have an authority level of Manager or higher To extend the closing window enter User code 82 Closing Delay Enter the number hours 1 or 2 by which the end of the closing Hit 0 2 Hours window should be extended Note that the delay is from the scheduled closing time not from the current time Press to accept entry and exit this mode Press to exit this mode without changes The system will send an Access Schedule Change report to the central station when the closing window is extended if programmed An extension of the closing window cannot be reduced once it is set However a 1 hour delay can be increased to 2 hours This is to prevent the user from deleting the delay after the normal window expires
342. te station service you must use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module When using the LORRA connect its channel inputs to the VISTA 128F B s fire alarm fire supervisory if used and trouble triggers Also connect its XMIT OKAY output to Input lon the VISTA 128F B s J 2 header Program 2 Input 1 system Zone 973 for 24 hour trouble response type 19 to send radio faults When the main dialer is used enable it field 3 30 and connect it to a telephone line Assign a 24 hour trouble response type 19 to system Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision The VISTA 128FB will activate the trouble trigger when it detects a main dialer supervision fault When the backup dialer is used install it on the VISTA 128F B s PCB shield Enable it field 3 30 and connect it to a separate telephone line Assign a 24 hour trouble response type 19 to system Zone 975 to enable backup dialer supervision When the dialer is used program it to send fire alarm fire supervisory if used trouble AC loss low battery normal dialer test and off normal dialer test reports Field 27 must be set to 024 maximum so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours Appendix A 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 7 If a secondary number is programmed set the maximum number of dialer re tries to 3 4 or 5 in field 3 21 UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises Local Mercantile Safe amp Vault l UsetheVISTA 128FB 2 A
343. te that duress is signaled on the same trigger that signals silent panic whereas duress has its own unique report when digitally communicated e Assigned on a partition by partition basis and can be any code or codes desired Will disarm or arm the system but will also send a silent alarm to the central station If service is connected There will be no indication at the keypad that an alarm was sent Duress Reporting Note A non zero report code for zone 992 duress must be programmed and partition specific field 85 duress location enabled to enable Duress reporting heDuressreport triggering logic activates on the 5th key depression such as OFF not the Ath key depression last digit of code Duress reports will not be triggered if the 5th key is a such as when performing a GOTO or viewing the capabilities of a user General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes Thefollowing rules apply to users when making modifications within the system based on the user code authority levels e Master Codes and all lower level codes can be used interchangeably when performing system functions within a partition a system armed with a user s temporary code can be disarmed with the Master Code or another user s temporary code except the Operator L evel C Code described above e Auser may not delete or change the user code of the SAME or HIGHER authority than that which heis assigned e A user levels 0 1 amp 2 on
344. ted power Standby Capacity total standby load X 24 or 60 hours X 1 1 contingency supply load step 8 factor use total standby load from previous calculate the battery worksheet capacity required for Alarm Capacity total alarm load XX 0 083 hours 5 minutes or 0 250 the installation hours 15 minutes use total alarm load from previous worksheet Total Capacity Add standby and alarm capacities 20 6 Section 20 Final Power U p Procedure Battery Selection Table The following batteries will fit inside the VISTA 128FB cabinet Using the battery 12 AH Y uasa NP12 12 capacity value from 14 AH Y uasa NP7 12 connect 2 in parallel step 8 select the appropriate battery IZAN Yuasa NPG18 12 24 AH Yuasa NP 12 12 connect 2 in parallel 28 AH Yuasa NP7 12 connect 4 in parallel 34 4 AH Y uasa NPG18 12 connect 2 in parallel 20 7 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 20 8 SECTION 21 The Mechanics of Programming In This Section Using Data Field Program Mode System and Communication Defaults Entering Data Field Programming Mode Moving from One Page of Programming to Another Viewing Data Fields Entry Errors Programming System Wide Data Fidds Programming Partition Specific Data Fields 93 Menu Mode Programming Using Data Field Program Mode Data Field Program Mode is the program mode through which many system options are programmed The field numbers on the pro
345. ternal e Hayes Optima 336 e BizComplIntellimodem 1200 w volume e BizComp I ntellimodem 2400 Other brands are not compatible even if claimed to be 100 compatible 28 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions COMPASS DOWNLOADING software may be purchased from ADEMCO This software is available on 3 1 2 diskettes or CD ROM and includes a complete User s Manual It may also be downloaded from the ADEM CO web page The web address is http www ademco com 3 Internal modems must have a 4 position DIP switch Modems with a 6 position DIP switch will not Work Alternatively you may use a 4100SM interface module to direct wire the control panel to your computer at the site Getting On Line with a Control Panel 28 2 At the protected premises the Control panel must be connected to the existing telephone line refer to the System Communication section No programming of the panel is required before downloading to an initial installation To download do the following 1 Enter the Installer Code 5 The panel temporarily enables a ring count of 5 and sets the Download Callback option to 1 callback not required Call the panel using the downloader software set to First Communication Mode The downloader will establish a session with no callback The panel information can then be downloaded order to remotely access control or program the alarm panel a link must be established between the co
346. teway Module VGM fails this zone will be displayed on the keypad as CHECK 8XX XX the ECP address the VGM is set to Also if this zone fails all access control system ACS input zones will also display a CHECK Note that these zone types are for use by 5800 Series devices onl y NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS Keypad panic zones share the same zone response type for all 8 partitions but panics may be individually enabled for each partition IMPORTANT FAULT ANNUNCIATION Polling loop and RF troubles zones 988 990 amp 997 will report as trouble conditions only and as such should be assigned zone type 19 if annunciation is desired See Polling Loop Supervision in the Polling Loop Expansion section and RF System Operation and Supervision in the Wireless Zone Expansion section for more information 22 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 22 4 SECTION 23 Zone Index Zone Type Defaults In This Section Zonelndex Zone Type Defaults Zone Index The VISTA 128F B has 128 protection zones as well as supervisory zones for relays ECP devices devices which communicate through the keypad terminals and system troubles These zones are designated as follows ZONE FUNCTION ZONE RANGE ACTUAL ZONE 800 831 900 990 amp 997 601 632 99 999 Keypad Panics Relay Supervisory Zones ECP Device Supervisory Zones indudes keypads wireless receivers VIP Module relay System
347. th questions regarding the programming of a particular zone or device Refer to the 93 Menu Mode Programming section to program each option shown Thefollowing is a list of commands used while in the Menu M ode 93 Menu Mode Key Commands Enters Menu Mode Serves as ENTER key Press to have keypad accept entry Backs up to previous screen Press to answer NO Press to answer YES 00H E scapes from Menu Mode back into Data Field Programming Mode if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option 21 4 SECTION 22 Zone Type Definitions In This Section Zone Number Designations Zone Type Definitions Zone Number Designations The VISTA 128F B supports up to 128 zones of hardwire polling loop and or wireless protection distributed among up to 8 partitions The following table lists the zone numbers and the types of sensors that can be used with each in this system and some alternate functions the zones may be used as Zone 1 amp 2 5 6 7 8 1 8 1 63 1 128 9 128 995 996 999 Zone Type Definitions Sensors 2 wire Smoke Detectors if used Audio Alarm Verification if used Cabinet Tamper Ground Fault if used K eyswitch if used atching T ype Glassbreak Detectors if used Traditional Hardwired Zones 5700 Series Wireless Devices 5800 Series Wireless Devices Polling Loop Devices 1 Panic 3 Panic Panic Each zone must be assigned a zone type which defines the way in w
348. that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys in walls or roofs or on the other side of closed doors Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building A second floor detector for example may not sense a first floor or basement fire Finally smoke detectors have sensing limitations No smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time n general detectors may not always warn about fires caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed violent explosions escaping gas improper storage of flammable materials overloaded electrical circuits children playing with matches or arson Depending on the nature of the fire and or location of the smoke detectors the detector even if it operates as anticipated may not provide sufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their installation manual Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection They do create multiple beams of protection and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams They cannot detect motion or intrusion that takes place behind walls ceilings floors closed doors glass partitions glass doors or windows Mechanical tampering masking painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors windows or any part
349. the time programmed in field 1 31 A 5800 Series transmitter has been tampered cover removed e CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 6XX where XX 01 32 indicates a trouble on a 4204CF Supervised Bell Output corresponding relay number 01 32 e CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 8XX where XX 00 31 indicates a trouble on a peripheral device connected to the panel s keypad terminals of the corresponding device address 00 31 e CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 9XX where XX 00 99 indicates that a system trouble exists dialers bell outputs ground fault etc See the Zone Index ZoneT ype Defaults section If the problem has been corrected key an OFF sequence Security Code OFF twice to clear the display 32 4 Section 32 Testing TheSystem Other System Messages COMM FAILURE at the keypad indicates that a failure occurred in the telephone communi cation portion of your system LO BAT and a zone descriptor accompanied by a once per minute beep at the keypad indicates that a low battery condition exists in the wireless transmitter displayed The audible warning sound may be silenced by pressing any key SYSTEM LO BAT at the keypad indicates that a low battery condition exists with the system s backup battery HSENS and a zone number indicates a smoke detector with a high sensitivity level which may cause false alarms The detector is dirty and should be cleaned or
350. ther does not see the displayed zone s or the tamper switches are tripped Please check your DI P switch settings for the zone s your connections and or that the covers for the units with tamper switches are in place Once the situation has been corrected enter the User Code OF F sequence twice to clear the trouble 4 fthefollowing is displayed press the key to display the faulted zone s DISARMED Press to show faults 5 Restore any faulted zone s as necessary When the DISARMED READY TO ARM message is displayed you can proceed to the next step 6 Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to ensure that it is being monitored by the system Each time a zone is faulted the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the number of the faulted zone Tripping fire and panic zones will cause external sounders to sound and may trigger the dialer When each zone is restored the READY TO ARM message should appear again If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition s keypad s check both keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions When you get the proper displays on the keypad s the polling loop zones in the system are functioning properly 7 Power down and continue to the next section he 4208 must be mounted either inside the VISTA 128FB cabinet or in a sep
351. thereby missing the end of the window Partition GOTO Commands E ach keypad is assigned a default partition for display purposes and will show only that partition s information To see information for another partition or perform system functions in another partition use the GOTO command User Code partition number 0 8 The keypad will remain in the new partition until directed to go to another partition or until 120 seconds has elapsed with no keypad activity To return to your home partition enter Partition number O You must program data field 2 18 to enable the GOTO function This is a partition specific field that must be set for each partition the user wants to access from another partition s keypad Viewing Capabilities of a User 31 4 The keypad will display the partitions that a user is authorized for the user number and the authority level for all partitions authorized Enter User Code The user s capabilities in each authorized partition will typically be displayed as follows Part 1 AO WHSE Theuser s Open Close report capability is shown by the dot User 01 Auth 1G following the authority level If Open Close is not enabled for a user the dot will not appear Section 31 Keypad Functions Viewing Zone Descriptors The Alpha Keypads can display all programmed descriptors which is useful to the installer when checking entries and can be helpful to the user when there is a need to id
352. ting On Line with a Control Pane On Line Control Functions Access Security Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading General Information Downloading allows the operator to remotely access program and control the security system over normal telephone lines Anything that can be done directly from the keypad can be done remotely using ADEMCO s VLINK or COMPASS downloadi ng software To communicate with the control panel the following is required Using V LINK 1 AnIBM PC compatible 286 386 or 486 computer with at least 1MB RAM a hard disk with 12MB available disk space running MS DOS 3 1 or higher operating system 2 Oneofthefollowing modems Hayes Smartmodem 1200 external level 1 2 or higher internal level 1 1 or higher e Hayes Optima 24 Fax 96 external Other brands are not compatible even if claimed to be 100 compatible 3 V LINK 9DOWNLOADING software may be purchased from ADEMCO This software is available on 3 1 2 diskettes and includes a complete User s Manual It may also be downloaded from the ADEM CO web page The web address is http www ademco com Using Compass l AnIBM PC compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with 30 MB of available hard disk space and at least 8MB of RAM 12MB is preferred Windows 3 X Windows 95 or Windows NT 2 Oneofthefollowing modems Hayes Smartmodem 1200 external level 1 2 or higher internal level 1 1 or higher e Hayes Optima 24 Fax 96 ex
353. tinue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling M enu M ode 26 10 Section 26 Scheduling Options Time Driven Events These are the schedules used to activate outputs bypass zones etc based on a time schedule There are 20 of these events that may be programmed for the system with each event governed by the previously defined time windows The actions that can be programmed to automatically activate at set times are relay commands arm disarm commands zone bypassing commands and open close access conditions Time Driven Events Worksheet Fill out the worksheet using the steps outlined below Time Days Action Action Activation Window M T W T F S S H Desired Specifier Time 1 First enter the schedule number 01 20 and time window number 01 20 and note the day of the week the action Is desired 2 Enter the code for the desired action and action specifier The action codes are the events that are to take place when the scheduled time is reached Each action also requires an action specifier which defines what the action will affect relay relay group partition zone list user group The action specifier varies depending on the type of action selected The following is a list of the Action Codes desired actions used when programming time driven events Note that these codes are independent of the relay codes programmed during the Relay Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Relay commands Action Code Action
354. tion and field 15 must be set to the desired partition number The PAL 328N must be connected to J 2 OUT 5 as shown in Figure 12 2 J2 CONNECTOR AMSECO PAL 328N PIEZO SOUNDER 10MA HED Figure 12 2 Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring 12 2 Section 12 J 2 Trigger Outputs Remote Keyswitch Operation and Wiring An optional UL Listed remote keyswitch such as the ADEM CO 41406 can be used for remote arming disarming of the burglary portion of the system and for remotely silencing alarms If used the following must be programmed l Field 15 to assign the keyswitch to a partition 1 8 or 9 to silence fire bell if fire alarm occurs enter 0 to disable 2 Zone 7 must be assigned a non zero response type Field 3 20 must be set to 1 if you areusing 2 OUT 1 and 5 to operate keyswitch ARMED and READY LEDs if keyswitch provides LEDs 4 40 to enable Open Close report for keyswitch Wire the keyswitch as shown in Figure 12 3 Thetamper switch need not be used for fire or UL Household Burglary installations For UL Commercial Burglary installations the tamper switch must be wired to zone 8 and zone 8 must be programmed for Day Trouble Night Alarm zone type 5 When the keyswitch is removed from the wall the tamper switch will open causing an alarm or trouble on zone 8 and causing the control to disable keyswitch operation until the associated partition is disarmed from a keypad BROKEN LINES REPRESENT INSTALLER WIR
355. tion Instructions Do not mount the 4100APG on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board 2 When the 4100APG is to be mounted outside the cabinet use the screw holes at the rear to mount horizontally or vertically 2 faced adhesive tape may be used if preferred Y ou can bring wires out from the side or back a round breakout is also available on the back Wiring the 4100APG Without the Event Log Printer The 4100APG connects to the VISTA 128F B via the 4100SM The 4100SM wires to the 2 connector on the control via the 4142TR Cable SeeFigure 19 1 Connecting the 4100SM to the control 4142TR toJ 2 on the control RED wire of 4142TR to TB1 6 of 4100SM RxD VIOLET wire of 4142TR to TB1 1 of 4100SM DTR TB1 7 of 4100SM toterminal 12 Auxiliary Power of the control TB1 8 of 4100SM to terminal 11 Auxiliary Power of the control Connecting the 4100APG to the 4100SM l Incoming telephone line to the 4100A PG RJ 11 connector labeled LINE 2 Optional Handset side of telephone line to 4100APG RJ 11 connector labeled PHONE 3 DB25M to DB 9M Cable supplied from 4100SM 25 pin to 4100APG 9 pin connector labeled SERIAL PORT INPUT VE os op Violet 4100APG DB 9 Serial Port Input Figure 19 1 Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer 19 2 Section 19 4100APG Page Interface With the Event Log Printer The VISTA 128F B will support the 4100APG and serial printer See Figure 19 2
356. tional RJ 31X jack and a Direct Connect cord to make connections to the 4285 4286 10 2 Section 10 4285 4286 VIP Module INCOMING TELCO LINE RJ31X JACK m CALLER ID UNIT OC A LU tc GREEN GRAY BROWN GREEN RJ31X 8 CONDUCTOR DOUBLE PLUG JACK PREMISES CORD SUPPLIED T ANSWERING g MACHINE AND PHONES ANSWERING OT MACHINE TEEN MAIN OOO JACK lt DIALER gt JACK Control Panel CONNECT Wa CORD 4285 ey ja ADJUSTABLE 5 8 AUDIO OUT 1 FOR FUTURE USE m mum mu M i a TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS x BROWN o RING PHONE INPUT N i i 3 TIP PHONE OUTPUT NOT INSTALLER si RING NOT USED TO CONTROL CONNECTOR YELLOW TO DATA OUT term 14 panel WITH FLYING NO CONNECTION LEADS RED TO AUX term 11 BLACK TO AUX GROUND term 12 USED FOR GREEN TO DATA IN term 13 KEYPAD CONNECTIONS Figure 10 1 4285 4286 VIP Module Connections 1 Makeall connections exactly as shown in Figure 10 1 This is essential even if the system is not connected to a central station The 4285 4286 will not function if this is not done If the leads on the cable are too short to reach their assigned terminals splice additional wires to them as required 2 If Touch tones are not present following phone access to the security system via an on premises phone
357. tions themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 AVIS L tiquette du minist re des Communications du Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communications Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l entreprise utilis s pour un service individuel la ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier quil est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chet pas la d gradation du service dans
358. to enter Device Programming 1 YES 0 NO DEVICE ADDRESS The device address identifies the device to the control Enter 01 31 00 QUIT the 2 digit device address number to match the device s physical address setting 01 30 Press to accept entry Note Device Address 04 must be used for the 4285 4286 Voice Module if one is installed If not it can be used for another device type Device Address 00 is always set as an alpha keypad assigned to Partition 1 with no sounder suppression options and these settings cannot be changed DEVICE TYPE Select the type of addressable device as follows O device not used 1 alpha keypad 6139 6139R 3 RF receiver 4281 5881 4 output relay module 4204 5 Voice VIP Module 4285 4286 6 Long Range Radio 9 Vista Gateway Module VGM Press to accept entry Alpha Keypad CONSOLE PART If device type 1 alpha keypad is selected this prompt will appear Enter the addressable device s default partition number 01 to maximum number of partitions programmed for system in field 2 00 This is the primary partition for which the device is intended to be used Enter 9 to make this keypad a master keypad for the system Press to accept entry 25 21 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 25 22 SOUND OPTION KEYPAD GLBL RF Expander RF EXPANDER HOUSEID XX Output Relay Module SUPERVISED CF If device type 1 alpha keypad is entered this prompt will a
359. to the wiring length gauge chart below 2 Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect individual keypads to separate wire runs The maximum wire run length from the control to a keypad which is homerun back to the control must not exceed the lengths listed in the table Wire Run Length Table 22 gauge 450 feet 20 gauge 700 feet 18 gauge 1100 feet 16 gauge 1750 feet The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad conductor cable is used 1000 feet if unshielded cable is run in conduit or if shielded cable is used If more than one keypad is wired to a run then the above maximum lengths must be divided by the number of keypads on the run e g the maximum length is 225 feet if two keypads are wired on a 22 gauge run 5 1 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions 3 Run field wiring from the control to the keypads using standard 4 conductor cable of the wire gauge determined in step 1 4 f using only one keypad it may be connected to either Keypad Port 1 or 2 and must be mounted on or within 3 ft of the cabinet If using multiple keypads connect one to K eypad Port 2 and mount it on or within 3 ft of the cabinet Set the main keypad to an address of 00 This address cannot be disabled in programming Additional keypads can be mounted where desired and must be connected to K eypad Port 1 terminals 11 12 13 14 as shown in Figure5 1 The keypad on Port 2 is electrica
360. u M ode Programmi ng section for a detailed explanation Control of Lighting and Appliances Lighting and appliances can be controlled when an access or exit event occurs Lights or appliances can be automatically turned on or off when a valid entry or egress request is presented at an access point To control these devices the VISTA 128FB relays or the ACS relays or triggers are used with keypads and or rf transmitters whose response type is Access Point 27 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Programming the Control of Lighting and Appliances 1 Enter Relay Programming in 93 Menu M ode 2 Program all the information for the relay 3 Select therelay type ECP 1 for the 4204 and ACS 3 for an uncommitted relay or trigger on the PassPoint ACS 4 f 3 was selected enter the VGM s ECP address 01 30 and whether the device is a relay 0 or trigger 1 See Rday Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming secti on for a detailed explanation Using VISTA 128FB Without the VGM and PassPoint ACS TheVISTA 128FB can be used for access control without interfacing to PassPoint ACS A user can trigger an access point i e door strike for 2 seconds by entering User Code 0 Programming the Control for Stand alone Access Control Enter Relay Programming in 93 Menu M ode Program the relay type as 1 or 2 For type 1 program the ECP address and relay For type 2 program the house and unit codes Ur qw Tw Program the
361. uld be returned for repair If upon disconnection of the control panel there is still a problem on the line notify the telephone company that they have a problem and request prompt repair service The user may not under any circumstances in or out of warranty attempt any service or repairs to the system It must be returned to the factory or an authorized service agency for all repairs FCC PART 68 NOTICE This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company This equipment uses the following jacks An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENS contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance n
362. umber by the control panel When used with VI STA 128FB these devices must be set for the serial number mode of operation BASIC POLLING LOOP CONNECTIONS BUILT IN POLLING LOOP 2 WIRE RUNS SHOWN IN A STAR CONFIGURATION Figure 7 1 Polling Loop Connections The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide additional polling loop current to extend the polling loop wire run length and or to provide individual electrically isolated polling loops Refer to Figures 7 2a and 7 2b to follow DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender module with the VISTA 128FB Be sure to include the total current drawn on the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary load on the panel s power supply use the Auxiliary Current Draw Worksheet in the Final Power Up Procedure section VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Notes Do not use the 4197 module with VISTA 128FB Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information The limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions Do not connect 4297 modules in series CONTROL 4297 PANEL MODULE Input Loop Limits Extension Loop Limits 128mA max No more than 64mA Same as for the input polling loop on any individual wire run No individual wire run may exceed Gauge Length Combined Input and Extension Polling Loop Limits 650 ft No more than 120 devices combined 420 420 950 ft Total length of all wire runs on a
363. up to 20 time windows e The windows are shared by all 8 partitions and are used when programming the various schedules open close limitation of access as well as for time driven event control Scheduling Example Tounderstand scheduling take for example a store that has the following hours Monday to Thursday 9am to 6pm Friday 9am to 9pm Saturday 10am to 4pm Sunday Closed Holidays Closed Assume the owner desires the following time windows to allow time for employees to arm or disarm the system Monday to Thursday Open disarm 8am to 9am Close arm 6pm to 6 30pm Friday Open disarm 8am to 9am Close arm 9pm to 9 30pm Saturday Open disarm 9am to 10am Close arm 4pm to 4 30pm Sunday amp Holidays Closed To provide these schedules the following five time windows need to be programmed Window Start Stop Purpose 1 8am 9 M onday F riday open window 2 9am 10 Saturday open window 3 4pm 4 30pm Saturday close window 4 69m 6 30pm Monday Thurs dose window 5 9pm 9 30pm Friday dose window Using the 480 Menu Mode described later in this section the installer can program open close schedules by assigning each time window to a day of the week windows are entered as 2 digit entries Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol Op CI Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op CI 01 04 01 04 01 04 01 04 01 05 02 03 00 00 00 00 Note 00 is entered for those days on which the store is closed Employees can
364. utomatically added to the built in vocabulary at the end of the group of words beginning with the same letter Section 25 493 Menu Mode Programming Custom words are retrieved as word numbers 250 to 269 for words 1 to 20 respectively when using method 3a to enter alpha descriptors When using method 3b to enter alpha descriptors each word will be found at the end of the group of words that begin with the same letter as it does Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create up to a maximum of 20 custom words or word strings 7 Exit Custom Word Mode by entering 00 at the CUSTOM WORD prompt Partition Descriptors l Select Part DESCRIPT Mode The system will ask for the partition number desired Enter the number as a single key entry 1 8 2 Follow the same procedure as for custom words except that partition descriptors are limited to 4 characters e g WHSE for warehouse Custom Message Display Installer s Message Normally when the system is in the disarmed state the following display is present on the keypad DISARMED READY TO ARM Part or all of the above message can be modified to create a custom installer message for each partition For example DISARME D on the first line or READY TO ARM on the second line could be replaced by the installation company name or phone number for service Note that there are only 16 character spaces on each of the two lines To create a custom display messag
365. ux Pwr 1 output or from separate supply Figure 16 1 Auxiliary Relay Used as Unsupervised Bell Output Trouble Supervisory Activation 3 61 0 Steady activation in response to any zone or system related trouble condition or to any fire supervisory condition Remains activated until all fault conditions have been corrected and the User Code OFF has been entered 4 Wire Smoke Detector Reset 3 61 2 Momentary 6 second activation at second entry of User Code OFF sequence which interrupts power to 4 wire smoke detectors connected to hardwired zones Zones 1 8 or to polling loop zones allowing the detectors to be reset following an alarm Power to 4 wire smoke detectors should be wired to the auxiliary relay and to the Auxiliary Power 1 output as shown in Figure 16 2 d AUXILIARY RELAY EOL POWER SUPERVISION RELAY MODULE A77 716B 4 WIRE SMOKE DETECTORS CONTROL PANEL N SHOWN POWERED RELAY OPENS WHEN POWER IS LOST 20000 EOLR HEAT DETECTOR Four Wire Detector Circuit Figure 16 2 Auxiliary Relay Used for Resetti ng 4 Wire Smoke Detectors Section 16 Auxiliary Relay Battery Saver 3 61 3 When this function is selected the auxiliary relay will normally be activated i e N O and pole contacts will be connected N C contact will be open and will de activate 4 hours after the start of an AC power failure Using this feature noncritical loads such as supplementary keypads
366. vailable to the end user for the purpose of controlling output devices 4204 relay Thesetimers are comparable to the individual appliance ti mers that might be purchased at a department store The output devices themselves are programmed into the system by the installer during Relay Programming in the 93 Menu Mode The end user needs only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor The installer may set certain relays to be restricted during Re ay Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Theserelays may not be controlled by the end user this prevents the end user from controlling doors pumps bell outputs etc To enter this mode the user enters Security Code 83 Output Timer 01 20 00 Quit 01 06 07 00P 11 45P PORCHLITE 04 06 ENTER OUTPUT PORCH LITE 04 Enter the output timer number to be programmed 01 20 Press to accept entry and move to the next prompt Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode If that timer number has already been programmed a summary screen will appear n this example 06 Timer 07 00PM Start Time 11 45PM Stop Time PORCH LITE Descriptor for Output Device 4 04 Output Device Z affected by this timer Press to continue Enter the desired output number 01 32 As the number is entered the descriptor for that output device will be displayed Press to continue Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer Timer 06 in this example
367. val of time e g 12 hrs the receiver does not hear from a particular transmitter the word CHECK or TRBL will appear at the corresponding partition s keypad s accompanied by the zone number in question The trouble will not prevent you from arming the panel but the zone must first be bypassed e Zones 988 and 990 are used to supervise the RF reception of receivers 2 and 1 respectively The reception is supervised for two conditions l If within a programmed interval of time defined by program field 1 30 the receiver does not hear from any of its transmitters A CHECK or TRBL message will appear for zones 988 2 receiver or 990 1 receiver if response type 19 is assigned to these supervisory zones and if programmed Contact ID event code 333 is sent to the central station This message is an indication that the RF receiver is deaf The fault may be accompanied by a supervision fault for one or more RF transmitters 2 If the receiver has detected a condition that may impede proper RF reception i e jamming or other RF interference The control checks the receiver for this condition every 45 seconds A CHECK or TRBL message will appear for zones 988 2 receiver or 990 1 receiver if response type 19 is assigned to these supervisory zones and if programmed Contact D event code 344 is sent to the central station U L A response type must be programmed for zones 990 1 receiver and 988 2 receive
368. wn in Figure 11 1 The start and stop conditions for that relay must be set to choice 60 Audio Alarm Verification during Re ay Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section Some AAV modules allow remote triggering by ring detection at the alarm installation If this option is selected it may defeat modem download and 4285 4286 VI P Module remote access capability The DIP switch settings shown in Figure 11 1 disable remote AAV Module trigger option The control also requires that the AAV Module trigger type is falling edge which is set in DIP switch settings shown 685 Receiver software must be rev 4 6 or higher Earlier versions will not hold the phone line connection Contact ID code for Listen in to follow is 606 Contact ID is the only reporting format that will send a listen in to follow Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections Connect the Audio Alarm Verification Module s falling edge trigger input terminal 5 on Eagle Model 1241 to a 4204 Relay Module as shown in Figure 11 1 If also using a 4285 4286 VIP Module be sure to follow the corresponding diagram when making connections Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options 11 2 l With at least one 2 line alpha keypad 6139 6139R wired and set to a proper address temporarily apply power to the system 2 Enter Data Field Programming Mode Installer Code 8000 Program the following data fields 45 PRIMARY DIALER FORMAT Set for 1 Co
369. y Section 25 493 Menu Mode Programming Long Range Radio If device type 6 is chosen the 6139 K eypad will function similar to the 7720PLRR Programming Tool See Figure 25 2 for the functions of the keys on the 6139 READY SHIFT function indicated by turning on READY LED Figure 25 2 6139 Key Functions for Programming 7820 Radio E ach key has two possible functions a normal function and a SHIFT function To perform a normal key function simply press the desired key To perform a SHIFT key function press SHIFT key then press desired function key Normal and SHIFT key Functions Key Normal Key Function SHIFT Key Function BS ESC BS Press to delete entry ESC Press to quit Program M ode Also can reset EEPROM defaults if once a key is pressed Press again for each SHIFT function desired UA T Gr on Active only when the REVIEW prompt is displayed 25 23 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions The 6139 K eypad will display the following prompts which are sent by the Long Range Radio transmitter to the control DEVICE ADDRESS Enter the device address of the radio The default address is 3 ID Enter the 4 digit customer account number 0001 9999 This 1234 ID number will appear in the messages generated by the radio M essages generated by the panel and transmitted by the radio will contain the ID number programmed into the panel The radio and the panel should have the same I
370. y condition exists it will be displayed on the control s keypad Refer to the Testing the System section for more detailed information NOTE WHEN CONNECTING BATTERIES IN PARALLEL BATTERY TABS USE BATTERIES FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER AND WITH THE SAME VOLTAGE AND CAPACITY RATING USE BATTERIES WITH APPROXIMATELY SAME AGE AND STATE OF CHARGE USE CABLES PROVIDED AND OBSERVE POLARITY IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ALL BATTERIES BE REPLACED AT SAME TIME EVEN IF ONLY ONE BATTERY HAS BECOME WEAK AS LONG AS ONE GOOD BATTERY REMAINS CONNECTED Veces M THE ONCE PER 60 SECOND BATTERY TEST WILL NOT 2 PAIRS SUPPLIED DETECT THE DISCONNECTION OF REMAINING BATTERIES USE THE 2nd PAIR OF BATTERY BLK RED TABS AND THE 2nd PAIR OF c BATTERY HARNESSES SUPPLIED TO CONNECT ONE OR TWO ADDITIONAL BATTERIES IN PARALLEL T I le OBSERVE POLARITY Figure 20 1 Connecting the Backup Batteries to the Control Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet Refer to the Polling Loop Expansion section for device restrictions for fire and burglary usage RPM DEVICE CURRENT OF UNITS 4194 Contact IMA 4192SD Photo Smoke 0 4 MA 4192SDT Smoke w Heat 0 4 MA 4192CP lon Smoke 0 4 MA 4275 Dual PIR 1 0MA 4278 Quad PIR 1 0 MA 4190 2 Zone RPM 1 mA LOW 4190 2 Zone RPM 2 MA HIGH 4208 8 Zone RPM 16 MA 4191SN Recessed Contact 1 0 mA 4939SN Surface Mount 1 0 MA Contact TOTAL Cannot exceed 128MA Thetotal
371. y of these fields will already have been programmed If you need more information about actual programming procedures see The Mechanics of Programming section 00 08 09 10 11 12 INSTALLER CODE 5140 Thelnstaller s Code is 4 digit code reserved for installation company use This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program M ode from the keypad This code cannot be used to disarm the system if not used to arm the system This code cannot reenter Programming M ode if exited by the 98 command TEMPORAL SIREN PULSE 0 f either bell is selected for pulsing program field 3 15 this field will determine the rhythm and rate of pulsing as follows If enabled 1 pulse rate will bethree dings and a pause repeated If disabled 0 the pulse rate will be 1 sec on 1 sec off ENTRY DELAY 1 partition specific 02 Entry delay defines the delay time which allows users to re enter the premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm the system without sounding an alarm The system must be disarmed within this period or an alarm will occur Enter the entry delay time 01 15 multiplied by 15 seconds or 00 for no delay up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds 15 multiplied by 15 seconds for zones assigned to Zone Type 01 EXIT DELAY 1 partition specific 03 Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises through a
372. ypads will display Burg Walk Test in Progress and will sound a single beep every 15 seconds while the test remains active Open and close each protected door and window in turn Each action should produce 3 beeps from the keypad Walk in front of any motion detectors Listen for three beeps when the detector senses movement The keypad will display the zone number and alpha descri ptor while a door or window remains open or while a detector remains activated The system automatically issues a Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector Power Reset about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on this zone to allow faulted detectors to be reset Toend this test enter any security code and press OFF An End of Walk Test message will be sent to the central station 32 3 VISTA 128FB Installation Instructions Armed Burglary System Test 1 Alarm messages will be sent to the central station during the following tests Notify the central station that a test will be in progress 2 Adisplay of COMM FAILURE indicates a failure to communicate no kissoff by the receiver at the central station after the maximum number of transmission attempts is tried If this occurs verify that the phone line is connected the correct report format is programmed etc l Armthe system and fault one or more zones Silence alarm sounder s each time by entering the code and pressing OFF Check that entry exit delay zones provide the assigned delay times 2 Check the keypad initiat

vista-128fb-v1-insta..

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents